WO2010013600A1 - ゲームシステム - Google Patents
ゲームシステム Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2010013600A1 WO2010013600A1 PCT/JP2009/062884 JP2009062884W WO2010013600A1 WO 2010013600 A1 WO2010013600 A1 WO 2010013600A1 JP 2009062884 W JP2009062884 W JP 2009062884W WO 2010013600 A1 WO2010013600 A1 WO 2010013600A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- currency
- amount
- data
- game
- banknote
- Prior art date
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 claims description 974
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 claims description 737
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 claims description 538
- 238000003780 insertion Methods 0.000 claims description 243
- 230000037431 insertion Effects 0.000 claims description 243
- 238000003860 storage Methods 0.000 claims description 164
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 159
- 238000004891 communication Methods 0.000 claims description 150
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 123
- 230000005540 biological transmission Effects 0.000 claims description 60
- 230000007723 transport mechanism Effects 0.000 claims description 54
- 238000001514 detection method Methods 0.000 description 326
- 230000032258 transport Effects 0.000 description 210
- 230000000875 corresponding effect Effects 0.000 description 165
- 238000007726 management method Methods 0.000 description 165
- 238000012937 correction Methods 0.000 description 125
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 93
- 230000005856 abnormality Effects 0.000 description 85
- 238000010586 diagram Methods 0.000 description 80
- 230000000750 progressive effect Effects 0.000 description 77
- 238000003825 pressing Methods 0.000 description 71
- 238000013500 data storage Methods 0.000 description 65
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 description 62
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 56
- 238000005259 measurement Methods 0.000 description 49
- 230000008859 change Effects 0.000 description 47
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 45
- 230000001276 controlling effect Effects 0.000 description 43
- 230000007423 decrease Effects 0.000 description 37
- 238000009825 accumulation Methods 0.000 description 29
- 230000002441 reversible effect Effects 0.000 description 26
- 238000004364 calculation method Methods 0.000 description 21
- 230000001678 irradiating effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 21
- 238000011084 recovery Methods 0.000 description 20
- 230000002159 abnormal effect Effects 0.000 description 18
- 238000004519 manufacturing process Methods 0.000 description 14
- 230000014509 gene expression Effects 0.000 description 13
- 230000003247 decreasing effect Effects 0.000 description 12
- 238000003702 image correction Methods 0.000 description 12
- 238000000605 extraction Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 11
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 description 11
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 10
- 239000000284 extract Substances 0.000 description 9
- 238000003384 imaging method Methods 0.000 description 9
- 238000012423 maintenance Methods 0.000 description 9
- 230000001105 regulatory effect Effects 0.000 description 9
- 238000013461 design Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000012544 monitoring process Methods 0.000 description 8
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 8
- 230000037303 wrinkles Effects 0.000 description 8
- 230000008707 rearrangement Effects 0.000 description 7
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 6
- 230000008901 benefit Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000012790 confirmation Methods 0.000 description 6
- 229920003002 synthetic resin Polymers 0.000 description 6
- 239000000057 synthetic resin Substances 0.000 description 6
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000008094 contradictory effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 239000004973 liquid crystal related substance Substances 0.000 description 5
- 230000002093 peripheral effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000009466 transformation Effects 0.000 description 5
- 230000006399 behavior Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000005452 bending Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000004397 blinking Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000005520 cutting process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 230000002950 deficient Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000007599 discharging Methods 0.000 description 4
- 231100001079 no serious adverse effect Toxicity 0.000 description 4
- 230000036961 partial effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 238000000926 separation method Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000002834 transmittance Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000002066 L-histidyl group Chemical group [H]N1C([H])=NC(C([H])([H])[C@](C(=O)[*])([H])N([H])[H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 3
- 230000002411 adverse Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000013459 approach Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000005516 engineering process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000012840 feeding operation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000009434 installation Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000001788 irregular Effects 0.000 description 3
- 238000011946 reduction process Methods 0.000 description 3
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000725 suspension Substances 0.000 description 3
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 241000282994 Cervidae Species 0.000 description 2
- 240000004050 Pentaglottis sempervirens Species 0.000 description 2
- 235000004522 Pentaglottis sempervirens Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 241000282806 Rhinoceros Species 0.000 description 2
- 238000001994 activation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 235000021028 berry Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- PZTQVMXMKVTIRC-UHFFFAOYSA-L chembl2028348 Chemical compound [Ca+2].[O-]S(=O)(=O)C1=CC(C)=CC=C1N=NC1=C(O)C(C([O-])=O)=CC2=CC=CC=C12 PZTQVMXMKVTIRC-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 230000007547 defect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000006073 displacement reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000009826 distribution Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000035622 drinking Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000002657 fibrous material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000009931 harmful effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000002452 interceptive effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 2
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000000737 periodic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000003672 processing method Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000011514 reflex Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000004044 response Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000035807 sensation Effects 0.000 description 2
- 230000007704 transition Effects 0.000 description 2
- 238000011144 upstream manufacturing Methods 0.000 description 2
- 208000001613 Gambling Diseases 0.000 description 1
- PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycerine Chemical compound OCC(O)CO PEDCQBHIVMGVHV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 230000004308 accommodation Effects 0.000 description 1
- FFBHFFJDDLITSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzyl N-[2-hydroxy-4-(3-oxomorpholin-4-yl)phenyl]carbamate Chemical compound OC1=C(NC(=O)OCC2=CC=CC=C2)C=CC(=C1)N1CCOCC1=O FFBHFFJDDLITSX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000470 constituent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008602 contraction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007796 conventional method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000002596 correlated effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000001627 detrimental effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000007717 exclusion Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000013305 food Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000010437 gem Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910001751 gemstone Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 238000005286 illumination Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000012466 permeate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000001454 recorded image Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004441 surface measurement Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000004804 winding Methods 0.000 description 1
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D7/00—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency
- G07D7/06—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency using wave or particle radiation
- G07D7/12—Visible light, infrared or ultraviolet radiation
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D7/00—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency
- G07D7/003—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency using security elements
- G07D7/0034—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency using security elements using watermarks
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07D—HANDLING OF COINS OR VALUABLE PAPERS, e.g. TESTING, SORTING BY DENOMINATIONS, COUNTING, DISPENSING, CHANGING OR DEPOSITING
- G07D7/00—Testing specially adapted to determine the identity or genuineness of valuable papers or for segregating those which are unacceptable, e.g. banknotes that are alien to a currency
- G07D7/20—Testing patterns thereon
- G07D7/202—Testing patterns thereon using pattern matching
- G07D7/206—Matching template patterns
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
- G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
- G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
- G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
- G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
- G07F17/3225—Data transfer within a gaming system, e.g. data sent between gaming machines and users
- G07F17/3232—Data transfer within a gaming system, e.g. data sent between gaming machines and users wherein the operator is informed
- G07F17/3237—Data transfer within a gaming system, e.g. data sent between gaming machines and users wherein the operator is informed about the players, e.g. profiling, responsible gaming, strategy/behavior of players, location of players
- G07F17/3239—Tracking of individual players
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G07—CHECKING-DEVICES
- G07F—COIN-FREED OR LIKE APPARATUS
- G07F17/00—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services
- G07F17/32—Coin-freed apparatus for hiring articles; Coin-freed facilities or services for games, toys, sports, or amusements
- G07F17/3244—Payment aspects of a gaming system, e.g. payment schemes, setting payout ratio, bonus or consolation prizes
- G07F17/3246—Payment aspects of a gaming system, e.g. payment schemes, setting payout ratio, bonus or consolation prizes involving coins and/or banknotes
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a game system that enables a game to be played with a plurality of types of currencies.
- the conventional currency discriminator as described above generally has one type of currency that can be identified.
- the reason for this is that the money paid out when winning the game is usually a single currency, but the money that can be inserted is also the same currency as the single currency. However, it is highly convenient in that the paid money can be used as it is.
- the currency that the player can throw in is defined as a single currency (base currency) and the base currency on hand is exhausted, the player can use other currencies to continue the game.
- base currency a single currency
- the player can use other currencies to continue the game.
- the player often quits the game as it is when his / her basic currency is exhausted. Therefore, the fact that the player can input only a single currency has been a factor that prevents the player from playing the game for a long time.
- the reason that the player can insert only one currency is preferable in providing a gaming system capable of paying out a progressive jackpot. It is also considered that.
- a gaming system a plurality of gaming machines are linked by a network. Then, a part of the money corresponding to the money put into each gaming machine is pooled, and money according to the pooled money is paid out to the gaming machine winning the progressive jackpot.
- a player who plays a game in such a gaming system plays a game with a major purpose of enjoying the benefits related to such a progressive jackpot. In recent years, such a game has gained popularity among players. . In such a gaming system, if the player can insert money corresponding to a plurality of types of currencies, the amount of money used is pooled due to the plurality of types of currencies used. It was thought that evil would occur.
- the present invention provides the following game system.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to allow a player to continue a game without making the player feel inconvenient even when the basic currency on hand is lost.
- a further object is to provide a game system, a currency value conversion device, and a control method thereof that can prevent adverse effects when providing a gaming system capable of paying out a progressive jackpot.
- the game system of the present invention includes a plurality of gaming machines, a banknote identification device that is associated with each of the gaming machines, identifies banknotes in different currencies and the amount of the banknotes, and outputs data representing the identified results
- the data integrated with each of the gaming machines and output from the banknote identification device is converted into credit data for executing a game based on the exchange rate stored therein, and is sent to the gaming machine.
- a player tracking device a control device for inputting an exchange rate from outside, providing the input exchange rate to the player tracking device and updating the exchange rate stored in the player tracking device, and the player tracking device;
- the player is integrated according to the gaming result of the gaming machine
- An information card device for storing data corresponding to the amount to be given in the information card and sending credit data for executing a game to the gaming machine based on the data corresponding to the amount read from the information card; , It is characterized by providing.
- this game system it is possible to play a game using an information card instead of the conventional paper system.
- various currencies can be inserted, and converted into money amount data in a predetermined currency according to the type of the inserted currency. This amount data is used to play a game on the gaming machine, and amount data corresponding to the amount corresponding to the game result is written to the information card. It is also possible to play games on other gaming machines using this information card.
- the information card includes a storage unit that stores various data in a rewritable manner, a transmission / reception unit that performs data communication with an external device, and data for the external device An authentication unit that performs authentication by communication; and, if the authentication is appropriate, an access permission unit that allows the data stored in the storage unit to be accessed by the external device; and at least one stored in the storage unit And a display unit for displaying the data of the unit.
- At least a part of data stored in the storage unit can be visually recognized from the outside by displaying at least a part of the data in the storage unit on the display unit. . Therefore, when the data in the storage unit is rewritten by the external device, if the rewritten data is data displayed on the display unit, the rewritten result can be confirmed by the display on the display unit. . Further, the data in the storage unit rewritten by the external device is used for display on the display unit, so that the data stored in the same storage unit is shared for updating and display by the external device.
- the data stored in the storage unit is transferred to another storage unit as display data, or the data stored in the other storage unit is stored as display data at the same time as the display unit is updated.
- the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like at the time of data transfer is prevented, so that the data in the storage unit can be displayed on the display unit with high reliability.
- the player tracking device can accept a plurality of types of currencies and a controller included in the gaming machine, and identifies the types and amounts of the accepted currencies. Are connected via a communication line, and the correspondence relationship between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of currency other than the basic currency is other than the basic currency.
- a memory capable of storing exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate determined for each type, and a processor programmed to execute the following processes (A) to (B): .
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency (for example, Japanese currency) and the amount of currency (for example, 100 yen) and converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar) specified based on the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller included in the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the banknote recognition device includes an insertion slot into which a banknote is inserted, a transport mechanism capable of transporting paper sheets inserted from the insertion slot, and the transport mechanism.
- a reading unit that reads the conveyed paper sheet; and an authenticity determination unit that determines the authenticity of the paper sheet read by the reading unit, and the reading of the paper sheet by the reading unit ends.
- the damage determination means for determining the damage of the paper sheet based on the shape of the paper sheet in the read portion and the shape of the reference paper sheet
- a control means for controlling the conveyance of the paper sheet by the conveyance mechanism.
- the paper sheet is transported by the transport mechanism, passes through the scanning device, and before the reading is completed, the damage determination unit determines whether the paper sheet is damaged, and transports based on the determination result. Since the mechanism can be controlled, the possibility of transporting damaged paper sheets downstream of the apparatus is reduced, thereby making it possible to prevent defective transport of paper sheets.
- the banknote recognition device includes an insertion slot into which a banknote is inserted, a transport mechanism capable of transporting paper sheets inserted from the insertion slot, and the transport mechanism.
- a reading unit that reads the conveyed paper sheet
- a conversion unit that converts the image read by the reading unit into pixels that include color information having brightness and have a predetermined size as one unit
- the conversion And authenticating means for determining authenticity from the density value for each pixel converted by the unit and the density value for each pixel of the paper sheet serving as a reference, and reading the paper sheet by the reading means
- Damage determining means for determining damage of paper sheets based on the density value for each pixel in the read portion and the density value for each pixel serving as a reference corresponding to the read portion before the end of Based on the determination result by the damage determination means, Characterized in that a control means for controlling the conveyance of the paper sheet by the transport mechanism.
- the paper sheet is transported by the transport mechanism, passes through the scanning device, and before the reading is completed, the damage determination unit determines whether the paper sheet is damaged, and transports based on the determination result. Since the mechanism can be controlled, the possibility of transporting damaged paper sheets downstream of the apparatus is reduced, thereby making it possible to prevent defective transport of paper sheets.
- the banknote recognition device includes a light emitting unit that irradiates light on a paper sheet, transmitted light that is irradiated from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the paper sheet, and paper A light receiving unit that receives reflected light reflected from leaves, and transmitted light and reflected light received by the light receiving unit are converted for each pixel including color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit.
- a storage unit that stores a reflection image composed of pixels, an authenticity determination processing unit that determines the authenticity of a paper sheet based on each image stored by the storage unit, and brightness of pixels in a predetermined region of the transmission image And a predetermined transparent image Based on the comparison result between the brightness of the pixels of the corresponding reflection image to pass, characterized in that it comprises, Excluding discriminator the predetermined area from the target of authenticity determination.
- the state of the paper sheet is determined in the determination unit from the brightness of the pixel of the transmission image in the predetermined area of the paper sheet and the brightness of the pixel of the reflection image corresponding to the predetermined area of the transmission image. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a change (mainly containing moisture or having a defect such as a hole). If there is a change in the state of a predetermined area of the paper sheet, the predetermined area is excluded from the object of authenticity determination, so that even a genuine note is less likely to be determined to be a fake ticket, and authenticity determination accuracy Can be improved.
- the player tracking device includes a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, a camera installed so as to be able to image the inside of the facility,
- the server includes a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, an output device, and a processor.
- the processor is (A) a process for storing employee identification data read by the admission card reader; (B) a process of continuously storing image data indicating an image captured by the camera; (C) Each image data stored in the process (B) is compared with each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data stored in the process (A), and a specific condition is satisfied Processing to determine whether or not, and (D) The face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied and / or the employee identification data corresponding to the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied are output. It is programmed to execute a process output from the apparatus.
- a server stores a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, and an output device (for example, an image display device or a sound output). Device) and a processor.
- the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader at the entrance gate to the facility. Further, the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the processor reads each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data read by the entrance card reader from the memory, compares it with each image data obtained by imaging with the camera, and specifies a specific condition (for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same) is determined.
- a specific condition for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same
- the personal tracking system is a system used when only employees are arranged in a facility. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the face person indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied is a person who has not read the employee identification data by the entrance card reader. become.
- the processor outputs, from the output device, face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied and / or employee identification data corresponding to the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied To do. That is, face image data of a person who does not read employee identification data, that is, a person who does not have an employee card (for example, an ID card) in which employee identification data is stored in the output device And / or employee identification data of the person is output. As a result, it is possible to identify a person who has not read employee identification data (a person who does not have an employee card in which employee identification data is stored).
- the object of the present invention is to allow the player to continue the game without feeling inconvenient even when the basic currency on hand is lost, and to pay out the progressive jackpot.
- An object of the present invention is to provide a currency value conversion device that can prevent a harmful effect from occurring when providing a gaming system that can be used, and a control method thereof.
- the present invention provides a currency value conversion apparatus having the following configuration. That is, the currency value conversion device includes a controller provided in the gaming machine and a currency identification device capable of accepting a plurality of types of currencies and identifying the types and amounts of accepted currencies. And are connected via a communication line. In addition, the currency value conversion device has exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency is determined for each type other than the basic currency. A memory capable of storing is provided.
- the currency value conversion device is configured to: (A) convert currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device and currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency via the communication line; Processing received from the currency identification device, and (B) If the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the processing (A) is not the basic currency, the currency type and the processing (A) The converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the basic currency specified based on the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data and the exchange rate data stored in the memory is sent to the controller via the communication line.
- a processor programmed to execute processing to be transmitted to the computer.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the amount of currency for example, the converted currency amount data indicating the amount (for example, 1 dollar) of the basic currency specified based on the exchange rate and 100 yen
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency), the type of the currency (for example, Japanese currency) and the currency Based on the amount and the exchange rate, the amount of the currency (for example, 100 yen) is converted into the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar). Therefore, when trying to construct a gaming system capable of paying out progressive jackpots, it is only necessary to pool the amount based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. In particular, there will be no serious adverse effects.
- a basic currency for example, US currency
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency Based on the amount and the exchange rate the amount of the currency (for example, 100 yen) is converted into the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar). Therefore, when trying to construct a gaming system capable of paying out progressive jackpots, it is only necessary to pool the amount based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. In particular, there will be no serious adverse effects.
- the present invention provides a currency value conversion apparatus having the following configuration. That is, the currency value conversion device includes a controller provided in the gaming machine, a currency identification device capable of accepting a plurality of types of currencies, and capable of identifying the types and amounts of accepted currencies, Each exchange server is connected via a communication line to a currency exchange server that repeatedly obtains currency exchange information indicating the correspondence between the currency amount and the currency amount other than the basic currency at a predetermined timing.
- the currency value conversion apparatus includes exchange rate data in which a correspondence relationship between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency indicates an exchange rate determined for each type other than the basic currency. Is provided.
- the currency value conversion apparatus (A) every time the exchange server acquires exchange information, a process of receiving information specified based on the exchange information from the exchange server via the communication line, (B) Processing for updating the exchange rate data stored in the memory based on the information received by the processing (A), (C) Currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device And currency amount data indicating the currency amount from the currency identification device via the communication line, and (D) the currency type data indicated by the currency type data received by the processing (C). If the type is not the basic currency, the currency type, the currency amount indicated by the currency amount data received by the process (C), and the exchange rate data stored in the memory are specified.
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of base currency, through the communication line, comprising a processor programmed to execute a process of transmitting to the controller.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the amount of currency for example, the converted currency amount data indicating the amount (for example, 1 dollar) of the basic currency specified based on the exchange rate and 100 yen
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency), the type of the currency (for example, Japanese currency) and the currency Based on the amount and the exchange rate, the amount of the currency (for example, 100 yen) is converted into the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar). Therefore, when trying to construct a gaming system capable of paying out progressive jackpots, it is only necessary to pool the amount based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. In particular, there will be no serious adverse effects.
- a basic currency for example, US currency
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency Based on the amount and the exchange rate the amount of the currency (for example, 100 yen) is converted into the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar). Therefore, when trying to construct a gaming system capable of paying out progressive jackpots, it is only necessary to pool the amount based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. In particular, there will be no serious adverse effects.
- the exchange server acquires exchange information
- information specified based on the exchange information is received from the exchange server, and exchange rate data is updated based on the information.
- the exchange rate data can indicate the latest exchange rate.
- the currency value conversion device includes a controller provided in the gaming machine and a currency identification device capable of accepting a plurality of types of currencies and identifying the types and amounts of accepted currencies. And are connected via a communication line.
- the currency value conversion device has exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency is determined for each type other than the basic currency.
- a memory capable of storing is provided.
- the control method includes (A) currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device and currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency via the communication line.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not the basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency Converted currency amount data indicating the amount (for example, 1 dollar) of the base currency specified based on the amount (for example, 100 yen) and the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller of the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency type accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (eg, US currency)
- the type of the currency eg, Japanese currency
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of the basic currency for example, 1 dollar
- the currency value conversion device includes a controller provided in the gaming machine, a currency identification device capable of accepting a plurality of types of currencies, and capable of identifying the types and amounts of accepted currencies, Each exchange server is connected via a communication line to a currency exchange server that repeatedly obtains currency exchange information indicating the correspondence between the currency amount and the currency amount other than the basic currency at a predetermined timing. Further, the currency value conversion device stores exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency is determined for each type other than the basic currency.
- the control method includes (A) receiving information specified based on the exchange information from the exchange server via the communication line every time the exchange server acquires the exchange information. ) Updating the exchange rate data stored in the memory based on the information received in the step (A); (C) currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device; Receiving the currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency from the currency identification device via the communication line; and (D) the currency type indicated by the currency type data received in the step (C). If it is not the basic currency, a base specified based on the type of the currency, the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data received in the step (C), and the exchange rate data stored in the memory.
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of currency through the communication line, comprising the step of transmitting to the controller.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not the basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency Converted currency amount data indicating the amount (for example, 1 dollar) of the base currency specified based on the amount (for example, 100 yen) and the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller of the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency type accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (eg, US currency)
- the type of the currency eg, Japanese currency
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of the basic currency for example, 1 dollar
- an object of the present invention is to provide a personal tracking device, a personal tracking system, a personal tracking system that can apply a technique for tracking a person using a face image to the game field while maintaining convenience. It is an object of the present invention to provide a tracking device control method and a personal tracking system control method.
- the above-described face authentication technology is also applied to the casino game to solve the above-described problem.
- the above-described face authentication technology is simply applied to a gaming machine, the following problem occurs. It becomes.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to apply a technique for tracking an individual using a face image to the game field while maintaining convenience. It is an object to provide a personal tracking device, a personal tracking system, a control method for the personal tracking device, and a control method for the personal tracking system.
- the personal tracking device includes a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of a player playing on a gaming machine, a memory, and a controller programmed to execute the following processes (A) to (C).
- Prepare. A process of continuously storing image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- Image data that does not satisfy a predetermined condition can be deleted from the image data stored in the memory.
- the camera is installed so that the face of the player who plays with the gaming machine can be imaged. Then, image data indicating an image captured by the camera is continuously stored in the memory regardless of whether or not the player is playing.
- the image data stored in the memory is set to an erasable state when a predetermined condition (for example, a prize requiring payment of tax is established) is not satisfied. Thereafter, when the storable area of the memory becomes smaller than a predetermined amount, the image data set in the erasable state is erased from the image data stored in the memory. As a result, the amount of image data stored in the memory can be relatively reduced.
- the face player can be specified using the face image indicated by the image data satisfying the predetermined condition.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory is reduced as much as possible to minimize the maintenance, and the image data for tracking an individual can be reliably acquired.
- the present invention further provides a personal tracking device having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking device includes a connection unit that enables communication with a gaming machine equipped with a card reader, a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of a player playing on the gaming machine, a memory, and the following ( And a controller programmed to execute the processes A) to (E).
- (B) a detection signal indicating that identification data for distinguishing from other cards is read by the card reader;
- C a non-detection signal indicating that the identification data can no longer be detected by the card reader via the connection unit.
- the camera is installed so that the face of the player who plays with the gaming machine can be imaged. Then, image data indicating an image captured by the camera is continuously stored in the memory regardless of whether or not the player is playing.
- image data stored in the memory the image data stored from when the detection signal is received from the card reader to when the non-detection signal is received is set to be erasable.
- the identification data is data for distinguishing from other cards.
- the detection signal is a signal indicating that the identification data has been read by the card reader
- the non-detection signal is a signal indicating that the identification data cannot be detected by the card reader.
- the image data set in the erasable state is erased from the image data stored in the memory.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory can be relatively reduced. If a non-detection signal is received after receiving a detection signal from the card reader, the card is not left behind. Therefore, there are few problems even if the image data stored during this time is erased. On the other hand, if the non-detection signal is not received after receiving the detection signal from the card reader, the card is misplaced. However, in this case, the image data is not erased. Accordingly, the face player can be specified using the face image indicated by the image data.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory is reduced as much as possible to minimize the maintenance, and the image data for tracking an individual can be reliably acquired.
- the present invention further provides a personal tracking device having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking device includes a connection unit that enables communication with a gaming machine, a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of a player playing on the gaming machine, a memory, and the following (A) to (D And a controller programmed to execute the process (1).
- the personal tracking device includes a connection unit that enables communication with a gaming machine, a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of a player playing on the gaming machine, a memory, and the following (A) to (D And a controller programmed to execute the process (1).
- the camera is installed so that the face of the player who plays with the gaming machine can be imaged. Then, image data indicating an image captured by the camera is continuously stored in the memory regardless of whether or not the player is playing.
- image data stored in the memory the image data whose period after the storage is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) without receiving the abnormality detection signal is set to be erasable.
- the abnormality detection signal is a signal indicating that an abnormality has been detected. Thereafter, when the storable area of the memory becomes smaller than a predetermined amount, the image data set in the erasable state is erased from the image data stored in the memory. As a result, the amount of image data stored in the memory can be relatively reduced.
- the image data is not deleted if an abnormality detection signal is received during that period. That is, the image data of the image captured from the predetermined period before the abnormality is detected until the abnormality is detected is not erased.
- an image of a player who is performing an action in which an abnormality is detected for example, an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an abnormal voltage is applied to the gaming machine. Accordingly, since such image data is not deleted, it is possible to specify the player of the face using the face image indicated by the image data, and to specify the player who has behaved abnormally. Can do.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory is reduced as much as possible to minimize the maintenance, and the image data for tracking an individual can be reliably acquired.
- the present invention further provides a personal tracking system having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking system includes a plurality of personal tracking devices installed in a facility, a server including a processor, and a plurality of card readers installed in the facility. Each of the individual tracking devices includes a connection unit that enables communication with the gaming machine, a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of an employee working on the gaming machine, a memory, and a controller. .
- the controller (A) a process of receiving an abnormality detection signal indicating that an abnormality has been detected from the gaming machine via the connection unit, and (B) when the abnormality detection signal is received, It is programmed to execute the process of transmitting a signal.
- the processor is: (a) a process of acquiring identification data read from a card owned by one or more employees existing in the facility by any one of the card readers; (b) a source of the abnormal signal (C) a process for specifying the card reader closest to the personal tracking device, (c) a process for specifying identification data acquired from the card reader specified by the process (b), and (d) the process (c ) Is programmed to execute processing for starting communication with the employee terminal corresponding to the identification data specified by.
- the controller further includes (C) a process of continuously storing in the memory image data indicating an image captured by the camera after receiving at least the abnormality detection signal, and (D) receiving the abnormality detection signal. And (E) receiving the abnormality detection signal and then completing the restoration It is programmed to execute a process of transmitting the image data stored in the memory until the signal is received and the period data indicating the period measured by the process (D) to the server.
- the personal tracking system includes a server.
- the controller included in the personal tracking device receives an abnormality detection signal from the gaming machine, the controller transmits an abnormality signal to the server.
- a processor included in the server acquires identification data read from a card owned by one or a plurality of employees existing in the facility by any card reader. Then, the card reader closest to the individual tracking device that sent the abnormal signal is specified. Further, identification data acquired from the specified card reader is specified. And the process which starts communication with the terminal for employees (for example, mobile phone) corresponding to the specified identification data is performed.
- the server starts communication with the employee terminal owned by the employee closest to the gaming machine that has output the abnormality detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to give an instruction to the employee that is closest to the gaming machine that has output the abnormality detection signal so that the employee is immediately directed to the gaming machine.
- Each of the individual tracking devices includes a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of an employee who works on the gaming machine, and a memory.
- the controller included in the personal tracking device continuously stores in the memory image data indicating an image captured by the camera after receiving at least an abnormality detection signal.
- the controller measures a period from when the abnormality detection signal is received to when the recovery completion signal indicating that the recovery of the gaming machine is completed is received from the gaming machine. Then, after receiving the abnormality detection signal, the controller transmits the image data stored in the memory until the restoration completion signal is received and the period data indicating the measured period to the server.
- the server includes a period from when an abnormality is detected in the gaming machine to recovery (period from reception of an abnormality detection signal to reception of a recovery completion signal) and employees who have worked during that period. Image data indicating an image of the face is transmitted. As a result, it can be confirmed that a person impersonating an employee is not working. In addition, it is possible to evaluate which employee has a short period until the gaming machine is restored.
- the present invention further provides a method for controlling a personal tracking device having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking device controlled in the method for controlling the personal tracking device includes a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of a player playing on the gaming machine, a memory, and a controller.
- the control method includes a step (A) in which the controller continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the control method includes a step (B) in which the controller sets image data that does not satisfy a predetermined condition among the image data stored in the memory to an erasable state.
- the controller is set to an erasable state among the image data stored in the memory when the storable area of the memory becomes smaller than a predetermined amount. Erasing existing image data.
- the personal tracking device controlled by the control method of the personal tracking device is provided with a camera that can capture the face of the player who plays with the gaming machine. Then, image data indicating an image captured by the camera is continuously stored in the memory regardless of whether or not the player is playing.
- the image data stored in the memory is set to an erasable state when a predetermined condition (for example, a prize requiring payment of tax is established) is not satisfied. Thereafter, when the storable area of the memory becomes smaller than a predetermined amount, the image data set in the erasable state is erased from the image data stored in the memory. As a result, the amount of image data stored in the memory can be relatively reduced.
- the face player can be specified using the face image indicated by the image data satisfying the predetermined condition.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory is reduced as much as possible to minimize the maintenance, and the image data for tracking an individual can be reliably acquired.
- the present invention further provides a method for controlling a personal tracking device having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking device controlled in the method for controlling the personal tracking device can capture a connection unit that enables communication with a gaming machine equipped with a card reader and a face of a player playing on the gaming machine.
- the camera includes an installed camera, a memory, and a controller.
- the control method includes a step (A) in which the controller continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the controller receives, from the gaming machine, a detection signal indicating that the card reader has read identification data for distinguishing from other cards via the connection unit. including.
- control method the controller receives a non-detection signal indicating that the identification data cannot be detected by the card reader from the gaming machine via the connection unit. including.
- control method includes a step (D) of setting the image data stored in the memory to an erasable state from when the controller receives the detection signal to when the controller receives the non-detection signal.
- step (E) when the storable area of the memory is less than a predetermined amount, the controller is set to an erasable state among the image data stored in the memory. Erasing the stored image data.
- the personal tracking device controlled by the control method of the personal tracking device is provided with a camera that can capture the face of the player who plays with the gaming machine. Then, image data indicating an image captured by the camera is continuously stored in the memory regardless of whether or not the player is playing.
- image data stored in the memory the image data stored from when the detection signal is received from the card reader to when the non-detection signal is received is set to be erasable.
- the identification data is data for distinguishing from other cards.
- the detection signal is a signal indicating that the identification data has been read by the card reader
- the non-detection signal is a signal indicating that the identification data cannot be detected by the card reader.
- the image data set in the erasable state is erased from the image data stored in the memory.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory can be relatively reduced. If a non-detection signal is received after receiving a detection signal from the card reader, the card is not left behind. Therefore, there are few problems even if the image data stored during this time is erased. On the other hand, if the non-detection signal is not received after receiving the detection signal from the card reader, the card is misplaced. However, in this case, the image data is not erased. Accordingly, the face player can be specified using the face image indicated by the image data.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory is reduced as much as possible to minimize the maintenance, and the image data for tracking an individual can be reliably acquired.
- the present invention further provides a method for controlling a personal tracking device having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking device controlled in the control method of the personal tracking device includes a connection unit that enables communication with a gaming machine, and a camera that is installed so as to be able to capture the face of a player playing on the gaming machine. A memory and a controller.
- the control method includes a step (A) in which the controller continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the control method includes a step (B) in which the controller receives an abnormality detection signal indicating that an abnormality has been detected from the gaming machine via the connection unit.
- the controller sets the image data that has been stored in the memory for a predetermined period or longer without receiving the abnormality detection signal in an erasable state. Including the steps of: In the control method, (D) when the storable area of the memory is less than a predetermined amount, the controller is set to an erasable state among the image data stored in the memory. Erasing the stored image data.
- the personal tracking device controlled by the control method of the personal tracking device is provided with a camera that can capture the face of the player who plays with the gaming machine. Then, image data indicating an image captured by the camera is continuously stored in the memory regardless of whether or not the player is playing.
- image data stored in the memory the image data whose period after the storage is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 5 minutes) without receiving the abnormality detection signal is set to be erasable.
- the abnormality detection signal is a signal indicating that an abnormality has been detected. Thereafter, when the storable area of the memory becomes smaller than a predetermined amount, the image data set in the erasable state is erased from the image data stored in the memory.
- the amount of image data stored in the memory can be relatively reduced.
- the image data is not deleted if an abnormality detection signal is received during that period. That is, the image data of the image captured from the predetermined period before the abnormality is detected until the abnormality is detected is not erased. During this period, there is a high possibility that an image of a player who is performing an action in which an abnormality is detected (for example, an impact is applied to the gaming machine or an abnormal voltage is applied to the gaming machine) is taken.
- the present invention further provides a method for controlling a personal tracking system having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking system controlled in the control method of the personal tracking system includes a plurality of personal tracking devices installed in a facility, a server including a processor, and a plurality of card readers installed in the facility. With. Each of the individual tracking devices includes a connection unit that enables communication with the gaming machine, a camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of an employee working on the gaming machine, a memory, and a controller. .
- the control method includes a step (A) in which the controller receives an abnormality detection signal indicating that an abnormality has been detected from the gaming machine via the connection unit.
- the control method includes a step (B) of transmitting an abnormality signal to the server when the controller receives the abnormality detection signal.
- the control method includes a step (a) in which the processor acquires identification data read from a card owned by one or more employees existing in the facility by any of the card readers.
- the control method includes a step (b) in which the processor specifies a card reader closest to the personal tracking device that has transmitted the abnormal signal.
- the control method includes a step (c) in which the processor specifies identification data acquired from the card reader specified in the step (b).
- the control method includes a step (d) in which the processor starts communication with the employee terminal corresponding to the identification data specified in the step (c).
- the control method includes a step (C) in which the controller continuously stores in the memory image data indicating an image captured by the camera after receiving at least the abnormality detection signal.
- step (D) a period from when the controller receives the abnormality detection signal to when the recovery completion signal indicating that the recovery of the gaming machine is completed is received from the gaming machine is measured.
- step (E) the controller measures the image data stored in the memory from the reception of the abnormality detection signal to the reception of the restoration completion signal, and the step (D). Transmitting period data indicating a period to the server.
- a plurality of personal tracking devices and a plurality of card readers are installed in a facility (for example, a casino store).
- the personal tracking system includes a server.
- the controller included in the personal tracking device receives an abnormality detection signal from the gaming machine, the controller transmits an abnormality signal to the server.
- a processor included in the server acquires identification data read from a card owned by one or a plurality of employees existing in the facility by any card reader. Then, the card reader closest to the individual tracking device that sent the abnormal signal is specified. Further, identification data acquired from the specified card reader is specified. And the process which starts communication with the terminal for employees (for example, mobile phone) corresponding to the specified identification data is performed.
- the server starts communication with the employee terminal owned by the employee closest to the gaming machine that has output the abnormality detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to give an instruction to the employee that is closest to the gaming machine that has output the abnormality detection signal so that the employee is immediately directed to the gaming machine.
- each of the individual tracking devices includes a camera installed so as to be able to take an image of an employee's face working on the gaming machine, and a memory.
- the controller provided in the personal tracking device continuously stores in the memory image data indicating an image captured by the camera after receiving at least an abnormality detection signal.
- the controller measures a period from when the abnormality detection signal is received to when the recovery completion signal indicating that the recovery of the gaming machine is completed is received from the gaming machine. Then, after receiving the abnormality detection signal, the controller transmits the image data stored in the memory until the restoration completion signal is received, and the period data indicating the measured period to the server.
- the server includes a period from when an abnormality is detected in the gaming machine to recovery (period from reception of an abnormality detection signal to reception of a recovery completion signal) and employees who have worked during that period. Image data indicating an image of the face is transmitted. As a result, it can be confirmed that a person impersonating an employee is not working. In addition, it is possible to evaluate which employee has a short period until the gaming machine is restored.
- the object of the present invention is to allow the player to continue the game without feeling inconvenient even when the basic currency on hand is lost, and to pay out the progressive jackpot. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming system and a control method thereof that can prevent harmful effects from occurring.
- a gaming machine in which a player can play a game by inserting money.
- the money inserted by the player is identified by a currency discriminator such as bill validator (so-called bill validator), and the game proceeds based on information indicating the identified amount.
- a currency discriminating machine those provided in the gaming machine itself and those installed separately from the gaming machine are known. For example, US Pat. No. 5,577,959, US Pat. No. 5,628,855. No. 6, U.S. Pat. No. 6,852,029, U.S. Pat. No. 6,846,238 and the like.
- the conventional currency discriminator as described above generally has one type of currency that can be identified.
- the reason for this is that the money paid out when winning the game is usually a single currency, but the money that can be inserted is also the same currency as the single currency. However, it is highly convenient in that the paid money can be used as it is.
- the currency that the player can throw in is defined as a single currency (base currency) and the base currency on hand is exhausted, the player can use other currencies to continue the game.
- base currency a single currency
- the player can use other currencies to continue the game.
- the player often quits the game as it is when his / her basic currency is exhausted. Therefore, the fact that the player can input only a single currency has been a factor that prevents the player from playing the game for a long time.
- the reason that the player can insert only one currency is preferable in providing a gaming system capable of paying out a progressive jackpot. It is also considered that.
- a gaming system a plurality of gaming machines are linked by a network. Then, a part of the money corresponding to the money put into each gaming machine is pooled, and money according to the pooled money is paid out to the gaming machine winning the progressive jackpot.
- a player who plays a game in such a gaming system plays a game with a major purpose of enjoying the benefits related to such a progressive jackpot. In recent years, such a game has gained popularity among players. . In such a gaming system, if the player can insert money corresponding to a plurality of types of currencies, the amount of money used is pooled due to the plurality of types of currencies used. It was thought that evil would occur.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to allow a player to continue a game without making the player feel inconvenient even when the basic currency on hand is lost.
- a further object is to provide a gaming system and a control method for the same that make it possible to prevent adverse effects when paying out a progressive jackpot.
- the present invention provides a gaming system having the following configuration. That is, a gaming machine including a currency identification device that can accept a plurality of types of currencies and that can identify the type and amount of the accepted currency, a controller, the currency identification device, and the controller And the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of currencies other than the above basic currencies indicates the exchange rate determined for each type other than the above basic currencies.
- a currency value conversion device comprising a memory capable of storing exchange rate data and a processor, wherein the processor (A) currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device; Processing for receiving currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency from the currency identification device via the communication line, and (B) the processing (A) If the currency type indicated by the received currency type data is not the basic currency, the currency type, the currency amount indicated by the currency amount data received by the processing (A), and the memory are stored.
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the basic currency specified based on the exchange rate data is transmitted to the controller via the communication line, and the controller executes (a) the processing ( B) processing for receiving converted currency amount data transmitted by (b), (b) if the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the processor by the processing (A) is not the basic currency, a predetermined fee is charged A process of cumulatively counting all or a part of the amount of the corresponding base currency as an accumulated value, (c) a currency indicated by the currency amount data received by the processor in the process (A) A process of executing the game based on the BET value, with the amount of the currency obtained by subtracting the amount of the base currency corresponding to the predetermined fee from the amount of the base currency equivalent to the amount as a BET value, and (d ) When a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, a process of paying out game media to the gaming machine is executed based on the accumulated value.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency), the type of the currency (for example, Japanese currency),
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency (for example, 1 dollar) specified based on the amount of currency (for example, 100 yen) and the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller provided in the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of money should be pooled based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. There is no particular negative effect.
- the basic currency amount corresponding to the predetermined fee is subtracted from the basic currency amount indicated by the converted currency amount data.
- the game is executed with the amount of currency obtained as a BET value. Further, all or part of the amount of the base currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is cumulatively counted as an accumulated value. Then, when a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out to the gaming machine based on the accumulated value. That is, according to the above gaming system, when a currency other than the basic currency is used, all or a part of the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is pooled in the gaming machine as an accumulated value. It will be. Then, when a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, a bonus is provided with a predetermined fee when using a currency other than the basic currency as a source. The presence of bonuses with different funds from the conventional game can improve the interest of the game.
- the gaming system preferably further has the following configuration.
- the amount of the basic currency corresponding to a predetermined ratio of the amount of the basic currency equivalent to the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data received by the processor in the process (A) is calculated in advance.
- the fractional amount obtained by dividing the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined ratio by the above basic currency unit amount is cumulatively accumulated. This is a process of counting.
- the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined ratio is equivalent to the predetermined ratio on the condition that it is not a natural number multiple of a predetermined basic currency unit amount (for example, one dollar).
- the fractional quantity obtained by dividing the quantity of the basic currency by the basic currency unit quantity is cumulatively counted as an accumulated value. For example, when the amount of the base currency corresponding to a predetermined ratio is 2.75 dollars, a fractional amount of $ 0.75 is obtained by dividing 2.75 dollars by 1 dollar which is the base currency unit amount. Count as accumulated value. Further, when the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined ratio is $ 2.0, the bonus accumulated value is not counted.
- the sales of casino stores are reduced compared to the case where the total amount of base currency corresponding to a predetermined ratio is counted as the accumulated value. Can be kept to a minimum.
- the present invention provides a gaming system having the following configuration. That is, it is possible to accept a plurality of types of currencies, a currency identification device capable of identifying the types and amounts of accepted currencies, a plurality of gaming machines including a controller, and a progressive including a control unit.
- the server, the currency identification device, the controller, and the control unit are connected to each other via a communication line, and the correspondence relationship between the amount of the base currency and the amount of currency other than the base currency is
- a currency value conversion device comprising: a memory capable of storing exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate determined for each type other than the basic currency; and a processor, the processor comprising: (A) the currency identification device Currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the above and currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency via the communication line.
- the process received from the identification device and (B) if the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the process (A) is not the basic currency, the currency type and the process received by the process (A).
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency specified based on the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data and the exchange rate data stored in the memory is sent to the controller via the communication line.
- the controller executes a process to be transmitted, and the controller (a) receives the converted currency amount data transmitted by the process (B), and (b) the currency received by the processor by the process (A).
- the amount of the basic currency obtained by subtracting the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee from the amount of the base currency equivalent to the amount of currency indicated by the amount data A process for executing a game is executed, and the control unit (I) corresponds to a predetermined fee when the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the processor in the process (A) is not the basic currency.
- a process of paying out game media is executed.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency), the type of the currency (for example, Japanese currency),
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency (for example, 1 dollar) specified based on the amount of currency (for example, 100 yen) and the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller provided in the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of money should be pooled based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. There is no particular negative effect.
- the basic currency amount corresponding to the predetermined fee is subtracted from the basic currency amount indicated by the converted currency amount data.
- the game is executed with the amount of currency obtained as a BET value.
- the control unit included in the progressive server cumulatively counts the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee as an accumulated value.
- the game medium is paid out to any one of the plurality of gaming machines based on the accumulated value. That is, according to the gaming system described above, by using a currency other than the basic currency, the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is pooled as an accumulated value.
- a bonus using a predetermined fee when using a currency other than the basic currency as a source is given to any of the plurality of gaming machines. .
- the presence of bonuses with different funds from the conventional game can improve the interest of the game.
- the gaming system preferably further has the following configuration.
- the process (II) is a currency identification device in which, when a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, based on the accumulated value, among the plurality of gaming machines, an accepted currency type is a currency other than the basic currency. Is a process of paying out game media to a gaming machine equipped with.
- a player using a currency other than the base currency can be given a bonus using a predetermined fee as a resource when using a currency other than the base currency.
- a bonus using a predetermined fee when using a currency other than the basic currency as a source is given to a player who uses only the basic currency that has not contributed to the accumulation of accumulated values. There is nothing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unfair feeling between players.
- the present invention further provides a game control method having the following configuration. That is, the game control method includes (A) exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency is determined for each type other than the basic currency.
- a currency value conversion device comprising a memory capable of storing, currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device, and currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency, via a communication line, Receiving from the currency identification device.
- the game control method may further include: (B) if the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the currency value conversion device in the step (A) is not the basic currency, the currency type, and the step The converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency specified based on the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data received in (A) and the exchange rate data stored in the memory is transmitted via a communication line. And transmitting to the controller of the gaming machine.
- the game control method includes (a) the gaming machine receives the converted currency amount data transmitted in the step (B).
- the game control method includes: (b) when the gaming machine has a predetermined fee when the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the currency value conversion device in the step (A) is not the basic currency.
- the game control method includes: (c) the predetermined fee based on an amount of the base currency equivalent to the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data received by the gaming machine in the step (A).
- the game control method includes a step (d) paying out game media to the gaming machine based on the accumulated value when the gaming machine satisfies a predetermined progressive payout condition.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency (for example, 1 dollar) specified based on the amount of currency (for example, 100 yen) and the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller of the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency value conversion apparatus if the currency type accepted from the currency identification apparatus is not a basic currency (for example, a US currency), the currency (for example, a Japanese currency) Based on the type, the amount of currency, and the exchange rate, the amount of the currency (for example, 100 yen) is converted into the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar). Therefore, even when trying to build a gaming system capable of paying out progressive jackpots, the amount of money should be pooled based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. There is no particular negative effect.
- a basic currency for example, a US currency
- the currency for example, a Japanese currency
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of money for example, 100 yen
- the amount of money should be pooled based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. There is no particular negative effect.
- the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is subtracted from the amount of the basic currency indicated by the converted currency amount data.
- the game is executed with the amount of currency obtained as a BET value. Further, all or part of the amount of the base currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is cumulatively counted as an accumulated value. Then, when a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out to the gaming machine based on the accumulated value.
- the present invention further provides a game control method having the following configuration. That is, the game control method includes (A) exchange rate data indicating an exchange rate in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency is determined for each type other than the basic currency.
- a currency value conversion device comprising a memory capable of storing, currency type data indicating the type of currency identified by the currency identification device, and currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency, via a communication line, Receiving from the currency identification device.
- the game control method may further include: (B) if the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the currency value conversion device in the step (A) is not the basic currency, the currency type, and the step The converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency specified based on the amount of currency indicated by the currency amount data received in (A) and the exchange rate data stored in the memory is transmitted via a communication line. And transmitting to the controller of the gaming machine.
- the game control method includes (a) the gaming machine receives the converted currency amount data transmitted in the step (B).
- the game control method includes the following: (b) the gaming machine changes the base currency amount equivalent to the currency amount indicated by the currency amount data received by the currency value conversion device in the step (A) from the basic currency amount to a predetermined fee.
- a step of executing a game based on the BET value is defined by using the amount of the basic currency obtained by subtracting the amount of the corresponding basic currency as a BET value.
- the game control method corresponds to (I) a progressive server when the currency type indicated by the currency type data received by the currency value conversion device in the step (A) is not the basic currency.
- the game control method includes the following: (II) When the progressive server satisfies a predetermined progressive payout condition, the game control method is configured to play a game against any one of the plurality of gaming machines based on the accumulated value. Including paying out the medium.
- the type of currency accepted from the currency identification device is not a basic currency (for example, US currency)
- the type of the currency for example, Japanese currency
- the converted currency amount data indicating the amount of the base currency (for example, 1 dollar) specified based on the amount of currency (for example, 100 yen) and the exchange rate is transmitted to the controller of the gaming machine.
- a game is played in the gaming machine.
- the player can play a game using a plurality of different types of currencies such as US currency and Japanese currency. Therefore, even if the basic currency on hand (for example, US currency) is lost, the player continues the game using the currency (for example, Japanese currency) that he / she has separately without having to exchange money. can do. This can make it difficult for the player to feel inconvenient. Further, the possibility that the player quits the game when the base currency on hand has run out can be reduced, and an environment in which the player can easily play the game for a long time can be established.
- the basic currency on hand for example, US currency
- Japanese currency for example, Japanese currency
- the currency value conversion apparatus if the currency type accepted from the currency identification apparatus is not a basic currency (for example, a US currency), the currency (for example, a Japanese currency) Based on the type, the amount of currency, and the exchange rate, the amount of the currency (for example, 100 yen) is converted into the amount of the basic currency (for example, 1 dollar). Therefore, even when trying to build a gaming system capable of paying out progressive jackpots, the amount of money should be pooled based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. There is no particular negative effect.
- a basic currency for example, a US currency
- the currency for example, a Japanese currency
- the amount of the currency for example, 100 yen
- the amount of money for example, 100 yen
- the amount of money should be pooled based on the amount of base currency converted in this way. There is no particular negative effect.
- the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is subtracted from the amount of the basic currency indicated by the converted currency amount data.
- the game is executed with the amount of currency obtained as a BET value.
- the control unit included in the progressive server cumulatively counts the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee as an accumulated value. Then, when a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, the game medium is paid out to any one of the plurality of gaming machines based on the accumulated value.
- the amount of the basic currency corresponding to the predetermined fee is pooled as an accumulated value. Then, when a predetermined progressive payout condition is satisfied, a bonus using a predetermined fee when using a currency other than the basic currency as a source is given to any one of the plurality of gaming machines. .
- the presence of bonuses with different funds from the conventional game can improve the interest of the game.
- the present invention has been made in view of the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a personal tracking system capable of specifying a person who does not have what should be held in the facility, and control of the personal tracking system. It is to provide a method.
- the present invention provides a personal tracking system having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking system includes a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, and a camera installed so as to be able to image the inside of the facility.
- the server includes a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, an output device, and a processor.
- the processor includes: (A) a process for storing employee identification data read by the entrance card reader; (B) a process for continuously storing image data indicating images captured by the camera; Each image data stored in the process (B) is compared with each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data stored in the process (A) to determine whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. Processing to be determined, and (D) face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied, and / or employee corresponding to face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied It is programmed to execute a process of outputting the worker identification data from the output device.
- the server stores a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, and an output device (for example, an image display device or a sound output). Device) and a processor.
- the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader at the entrance gate to the facility. Further, the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the processor reads each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data read by the entrance card reader from the memory, compares it with each image data obtained by imaging with the camera, and specifies a specific condition (for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same) is determined.
- a specific condition for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same
- the personal tracking system is a system used when only employees are arranged in a facility. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the face person indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied is a person who has not read the employee identification data by the entrance card reader. become.
- the processor outputs, from the output device, face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied and / or employee identification data corresponding to the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied To do. That is, face image data of a person who does not read employee identification data, that is, a person who does not have an employee card (for example, an ID card) in which employee identification data is stored in the output device And / or employee identification data of the person is output. As a result, it is possible to identify a person who has not read employee identification data (a person who does not have an employee card in which employee identification data is stored).
- the present invention further provides a personal tracking system having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking system includes a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, and a camera installed so as to be able to image the inside of the facility.
- the server includes a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, an output device, and a processor.
- the processor includes: (A) a process for storing employee identification data read by the entrance card reader; (B) a process for continuously storing image data indicating images captured by the camera; Each image data stored in the process (B) is compared with each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data stored in the process (A) to determine whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. (D) The image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition by the process (C) is compared with each of the face image data stored in the memory, and the specific condition is determined.
- a process for determining whether to satisfy the condition (E) a process for storing or erasing the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition in the process (D) in the memory as customer image data, and (F) Face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the process (D) and / or face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied by the process (D) Is programmed to execute a process of outputting employee identification data corresponding to the above-mentioned output device.
- the server stores a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, and an output device (for example, an image display device or a sound output). Device) and a processor.
- the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader at the entrance gate to the facility. Further, the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the processor reads each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data read by the entrance card reader from the memory, compares it with each image data obtained by imaging with the camera, and specifies a specific condition (for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same) is determined.
- a specific condition for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same
- the personal tracking system is a system used when employees and customers exist in the facility.
- the specific condition is not satisfied, the face person indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied is reading employee identification data by the entrance card reader. It means no person. That is, the person is an employee or a customer who has not read employee identification data.
- the processor compares the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition with each of the face image data stored in the memory, and determines whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.
- the face person indicated by the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition is a customer.
- the processor stores or deletes the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition in the memory as customer image data. By storing it in the memory, it is possible to confirm what kind of customers were in the facility. Further, by erasing, it becomes possible to secure a free memory space.
- the specific condition is satisfied at this stage, the person of the image indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied is reading employee identification data by the entrance card reader. That means there are no employees.
- the processor outputs face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied and / or employee identification data corresponding to the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied from the output device. That is, face image data of an employee who has not read employee identification data and / or employee identification data of the employee is output to the output device. As a result, employees who have not read employee identification data can be identified.
- the present invention further provides a method for controlling a personal tracking system having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking system controlled in the control method of the personal tracking system includes a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, and a camera installed so that the inside of the facility can be imaged.
- the server includes a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, an output device, and a processor.
- the control method includes a step (A) in which the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader.
- the control method includes a step (B) in which the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera.
- control method (C) the processor stores each of the image data stored in the step (B) and the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data stored in the step (A). And determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.
- control method includes (D) face image data when the processor determines that the specific condition is not satisfied, and / or face image when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied. Outputting employee identification data corresponding to the data from the output device.
- the personal tracking system controlled by the control method of the personal tracking system images a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, and the inside of the facility And a camera installed as possible.
- the server stores a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, and an output device (for example, an image display device or a sound output). Device) and a processor.
- the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader at the entrance gate to the facility. Further, the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the processor reads each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data read by the entrance card reader from the memory, compares it with each image data obtained by imaging with the camera, and specifies a specific condition (for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same) is determined.
- a specific condition for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same
- the personal tracking system is a system used when only employees are arranged in a facility. If the specific condition is not satisfied, the face person indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied is a person who has not read the employee identification data by the entrance card reader. become.
- the processor outputs, from the output device, face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied and / or employee identification data corresponding to the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied To do. That is, face image data of a person who does not read employee identification data, that is, a person who does not have an employee card (for example, an ID card) in which employee identification data is stored in the output device And / or employee identification data of the person is output. As a result, it is possible to identify a person who has not read employee identification data (a person who does not have an employee card in which employee identification data is stored).
- the present invention further provides a method for controlling a personal tracking system having the following configuration. That is, the personal tracking system controlled in the control method of the personal tracking system includes a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, and a camera installed so that the inside of the facility can be imaged.
- the server includes a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, an output device, and a processor.
- the control method includes a step (A) in which the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader.
- the control method includes a step (B) in which the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera.
- control method the processor stores each of the image data stored in the step (B) and the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data stored in the step (A). And determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.
- the processor compares the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition in the step (C) and the face image data stored in the memory. And determining whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.
- the control method includes the step (E) of storing or erasing the image data determined as not satisfying the specific condition in the step (D) in the memory as customer image data. Including.
- control method may include (F) face image data when the processor determines that the specific condition is satisfied in the step (D) and / or the specific condition in the step (D).
- the personal tracking system controlled by the control method of the personal tracking system images a server, an entrance card reader installed at an entrance gate to the facility, and the inside of the facility And a camera installed as possible.
- the server stores a memory in which employee identification data for identifying an employee and face image data indicating an image of the employee's face are stored in association with each other, and an output device (for example, an image display device or a sound output). Device) and a processor.
- the processor stores employee identification data read by the entrance card reader at the entrance gate to the facility. Further, the processor continuously stores image data indicating an image captured by the camera in the memory.
- the processor reads each of the face image data corresponding to the employee identification data read by the entrance card reader from the memory, compares it with each image data obtained by imaging with the camera, and specifies a specific condition (for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same) is determined.
- a specific condition for example, Whether the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data meet the criteria for determining that they are the same
- the personal tracking system is a system used when employees and customers exist in the facility.
- the specific condition is not satisfied, the face person indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is not satisfied is reading employee identification data by the entrance card reader. It means no person. That is, the person is an employee or a customer who has not read employee identification data.
- the processor compares the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition with each of the face image data stored in the memory, and determines whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.
- the face person indicated by the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition is a customer.
- the processor stores or deletes the image data determined not to satisfy the specific condition in the memory as customer image data. By storing it in the memory, it is possible to confirm what kind of customers were in the facility. Further, by erasing, it becomes possible to secure a free memory space.
- the specific condition is satisfied at this stage, the person of the image indicated by the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied is reading employee identification data by the entrance card reader. That means there are no employees.
- the processor outputs face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied and / or employee identification data corresponding to the face image data when it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied from the output device. That is, face image data of an employee who has not read employee identification data and / or employee identification data of the employee is output to the output device. As a result, employees who have not read employee identification data can be identified.
- an object of the present invention is to provide an IC card for a gaming machine that can display data such as credit data with high reliability.
- a game is started by betting a predetermined amount, and scrolling of a plurality of symbol columns displayed on the display is started, and scrolling of the plurality of symbol columns is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed.
- a predetermined time has elapsed.
- the player is interested in the number of credits stored in the card, so it is necessary to display the number of credits.
- the number of credits can be displayed by rewriting the display on the card surface using electronic ink, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-30365.
- display data used for rewriting the card surface is generated completely independently from the credit data of the IC card, the credit data of the IC card may not be displayed with high reliability. .
- An object of the present invention is to provide an IC card for a gaming machine that can display data such as credit data with high reliability.
- the present invention includes a storage unit that stores various data in a rewritable manner, a transmission / reception unit that performs data communication with an external device, an authentication unit that performs authentication through data communication with the external device, and the authentication is appropriate.
- a gaming device comprising: an access permission unit that makes the data stored in the storage unit accessible by the external device; and a display unit that displays at least a part of the data stored in the storage unit. This is an IC card for a machine.
- the data stored in the storage unit can be viewed from the outside by displaying at least a part of the data in the storage unit on the display unit. Therefore, when the data in the storage unit is rewritten by the external device, if the rewritten data is data displayed on the display unit, the rewritten result can be confirmed by the display on the display unit. . Further, the data in the storage unit rewritten by the external device is used for display on the display unit, so that the data stored in the same storage unit is shared for updating and display by the external device. As a result, the data stored in the storage unit is transferred to another storage unit as display data, or the data stored in the other storage unit is stored as display data at the same time as the display unit is updated. Compared with the case where the data is transferred, the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like at the time of data transfer is prevented, so that the data in the storage unit can be displayed on the display unit with high reliability.
- the storage unit stores authentication data and credit-related data as the various types of data
- the authentication unit authenticates with the authentication data
- the access permission unit May make the credit-related data accessible by the external device
- the display unit may display the credit-related data.
- the credit-related data stored in the storage unit can be viewed from the outside by displaying the credit-related data in the storage unit on the display unit. Accordingly, when the credit-related data in the storage unit is rewritten by the external device, the rewritten credit-related data can be confirmed by the display on the display unit.
- the credit-related data in the storage unit rewritten by the external device is used for display on the display unit, so that the credit-related data stored in the same storage unit is shared for updating and display by the external device. It becomes a state.
- the credit-related data in the storage unit is transferred as display data to another storage unit, or the credit-related data in the storage unit is updated and simultaneously stored as display data in another storage unit. Compared to the case where the data is displayed afterwards, the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like during data transfer is prevented, so that credit-related data can be displayed on the display unit with high reliability.
- the display unit may be made visible from the outside even when data communication is performed with respect to the external device.
- the updated data can be confirmed by the display on the display unit, so that the sense of security that the IC card data can always be confirmed during the game. Obtainable.
- the display unit may display data immediately before and after data rewritten by the external device.
- the gaming machine IC card of the present invention when the data in the storage unit is rewritten by an external device, the rewritten result is the data displayed on the display unit. Can be confirmed by the display on the display unit.
- the storage unit data is transferred to another storage unit as display data, or the storage unit data is updated and simultaneously stored as display data in another storage unit, and then displayed. Compared with the case where the data is transferred, the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like during data transfer is prevented, so that the data in the storage unit can be displayed on the display unit with high reliability.
- an object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet processing apparatus that can prevent a decrease in authenticity determination accuracy even when a state change occurs in the paper sheet due to adhesion of moisture or the like.
- the banknote handling apparatus that handles banknotes that are one aspect of the paper sheet determines the authenticity of the banknotes inserted from the banknote insertion slot by the user, and according to the banknote value determined to be authentic, It is incorporated in service equipment that provides various products and services, such as game media lending machines installed in amusement halls, or vending machines and ticket machines installed in public places.
- the bill authenticity determination processing is performed by irradiating a bill moving on a bill conveyance path with light, for example, as disclosed in JP-A-6-60242, and transmitting transmitted light and reflected light from the bill. This is done by detecting with a light receiving sensor and comparing it with regular data stored in dictionary data. Specifically, transmitted light data and reflected light data from the bills to be conveyed are acquired, and this is converted into, for example, information on brightness, and comparison processing is performed with regular data.
- the above-mentioned transmitted light data and reflected light data may have different brightness when the bill contains moisture or the like. This is considered to be caused by the fact that when water adheres to the bill surface, which is fibrous, surface irregularities due to the fiber are smoothed, and irregular reflection at that portion is reduced. That is, when moisture adheres to the banknote and the surface is smoothed, irregular reflection on the banknote surface decreases, so the amount of transmitted light of the banknote increases, and the transmitted light data increases in brightness (light intensity). End up. Moreover, about reflected light data, since the irregular reflection in the banknote surface reduces and the transmitted light amount of a banknote increases, the brightness (light intensity
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described circumstances, and provides a paper sheet processing apparatus capable of preventing a decrease in authenticity determination accuracy even when a state change occurs in the paper sheet due to adhesion of moisture or the like.
- the purpose is to do.
- a paper sheet processing apparatus includes: a light emitting unit that irradiates light to a paper sheet; a transmitted light that is irradiated from the light emitting unit and transmitted through the paper sheet; and a paper sheet A light receiving unit that receives reflected light that has been reflected, and a conversion unit that converts transmitted light and reflected light received by the light receiving unit, for each pixel including color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit.
- a transmission image composed of a plurality of pixels converted by the conversion unit from the transmission light received by the light receiving unit, and a plurality of pixels converted by the conversion unit from the reflected light received by the light receiving unit
- a storage unit that stores the reflected image
- an authenticity determination processing unit that determines the authenticity of the paper sheet based on each image stored in the storage unit, brightness of pixels in a predetermined region of the transmission image, and transmission
- the image corresponding to a predetermined area of the image Based on the result of comparison between the brightness of the pixels of the image, and having a Excluding determination unit from the target of authenticity determination of the predetermined region.
- the brightness of the pixels of the transmission image in the predetermined area of the paper sheets and the brightness of the pixels of the reflection image corresponding to the predetermined area of the transmission image are determined by the determination unit. It is possible to determine whether or not there is a change in the state of the paper sheet (mainly containing water or having a defect such as a hole). If there is a change in the state of a predetermined area of the paper sheet, the predetermined area is excluded from the object of authenticity determination, so that even a genuine note is less likely to be determined to be a fake ticket, and authenticity determination accuracy Can be improved.
- the predetermined area is set to be other than a characteristic area where different pixel information is acquired when light having a different wavelength is emitted from the light emitting unit.
- a region in which different pixel information is acquired when light having a different wavelength is emitted from the light emitting unit is a characteristic when performing the authenticity determination of the paper sheet. Since it is a region (characteristic region), other regions are excluded from the object of authenticity determination as the predetermined region described above. That is, even if the above-described state change occurs in a region that is not a feature region (non-feature region), it is unlikely to particularly affect the authenticity determination.
- the predetermined area as described above, it is possible to prevent the authentication accuracy from being lowered.
- the feature region of the paper sheet corresponds to, for example, a watermark image formed on a banknote.
- the light receiving section is constituted by a line sensor that reads the entire range of the paper sheet in the width direction.
- the paper sheet processing apparatus having the above-described configuration, since the image information of the entire width direction of the paper sheet can be acquired by the line sensor, it is possible to accurately specify the predetermined area and the characteristic area, and authenticate determination The accuracy can be further improved.
- the present invention it is possible to obtain a paper sheet processing apparatus capable of improving the accuracy of authenticity determination even when the state of the paper sheet changes due to adhesion of moisture or the like.
- an object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet processing apparatus that can prevent paper sheet conveyance failure.
- the banknote processing apparatus which is one aspect
- mode of a paper sheet processing apparatus identifies the effectiveness of the banknote inserted from the banknote insertion slot by the user, and according to the banknote value identified as effective, It is incorporated in service equipment that provides various products and services, such as game media lending machines installed in amusement halls, or vending machines and ticket machines installed in public places.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-302235 includes a transport mechanism that transports a bill inserted into a bill insertion slot and a reading unit that reads a bill.
- a banknote processing apparatus that conveys an identified banknote to a storage unit and returns a banknote identified as a fake to the banknote insertion slot side.
- this patent document 1 discloses providing a drawing prevention mechanism for preventing the movement of the bill toward the bill insertion slot so that the bill cannot be pulled out after reading the bill information by the reading means. Yes.
- banknote handling apparatus various types of banknotes may be inserted from a banknote insertion slot by a user.
- a damaged banknote is inserted such that the tip portion is missing.
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a paper sheet processing apparatus capable of preventing a paper sheet from being poorly conveyed.
- the paper sheet processing apparatus includes an insertion port into which a paper sheet is inserted, a transport mechanism that can transport the paper sheet inserted from the insertion port, and a transport mechanism that transports the paper sheet.
- the damage determination means for determining the damage of the paper sheet based on the shape of the paper sheet in the read portion and the shape of the reference paper sheet
- a control means for controlling the conveyance of the paper sheet by the conveyance mechanism.
- the damage determination unit determines whether the paper sheet is damaged before the paper sheet is transported by the transport mechanism and passes through the reading unit before the reading is completed. Since the transport mechanism can be controlled based on the determination result, the possibility of transporting a damaged paper sheet downstream of the apparatus is reduced, thereby preventing a paper sheet from being poorly transported.
- the reading means includes a line sensor that reads the entire range of the conveyed paper sheet in the conveyance path width direction.
- an extraction preventing member for preventing the paper sheet from being conveyed in the insertion direction is installed on the downstream side of the reading unit, and the damage determination unit is configured to prevent the paper sheet from passing through the extraction preventing member.
- the present invention is characterized in that a process for determining damage to paper sheets is performed.
- control means is capable of controlling the transport mechanism so as to transport the paper sheets toward the insertion port side, and when the damage determination means determines that the paper sheets are damaged, The leaves are transported toward the insertion port side.
- an object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet processing apparatus that can prevent paper sheet conveyance failure.
- the banknote processing apparatus which is one aspect
- mode of a paper sheet processing apparatus identifies the effectiveness of the banknote inserted from the banknote insertion slot by the user, and according to the banknote value identified as effective, It is incorporated in service equipment that provides various products and services, such as game media lending machines installed in amusement halls, or vending machines and ticket machines installed in public places.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-302235 includes a transport mechanism that transports a bill inserted into a bill insertion slot and a reading unit that reads a bill.
- a banknote processing apparatus that conveys an identified banknote to a storage unit and returns a banknote identified as a fake to the banknote insertion slot side.
- this patent document 1 discloses providing a drawing prevention mechanism for preventing the movement of the bill toward the bill insertion slot so that the bill cannot be pulled out after reading the bill information by the reading means. Yes.
- various types of banknotes may be inserted from a banknote insertion slot by a user.
- a banknote in an inappropriate state hereinafter referred to as an “invalid state in which bending or the like has occurred” will be referred to as “damage”
- damage such as a bent tip portion
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a paper sheet processing apparatus capable of preventing a paper sheet from being poorly conveyed.
- the paper sheet processing apparatus includes an insertion port into which a paper sheet is inserted, a transport mechanism that can transport the paper sheet inserted from the insertion port, and a transport mechanism that transports the paper sheet.
- a reading unit that reads the read paper, a conversion unit that converts an image read by the reading unit for each pixel including color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit, and the conversion unit Authenticity determination means for determining authenticity from the density value for each pixel converted in step 1 and the density value for each pixel of the reference paper sheet, and reading of the paper sheet by the reading means is provided.
- Damage determination means for determining damage of paper sheets based on the density value for each pixel in the read portion and the density value for each pixel serving as a reference corresponding to the read portion before the end; Based on the determination result by the damage determination means, the transfer mechanism And control means for controlling the conveyance of the paper sheet, characterized in that the provided.
- the damage determination unit determines whether the paper sheet is damaged before the paper sheet is transported by the transport mechanism and passes through the reading unit before the reading is completed. Since the transport mechanism can be controlled based on the determination result, the possibility of transporting a damaged paper sheet downstream of the apparatus is reduced, thereby preventing a paper sheet from being poorly transported.
- the reading means includes a line sensor that reads the entire range of the conveyed paper sheet in the conveyance path width direction.
- an extraction preventing member for preventing the paper sheet from being conveyed in the insertion direction is installed on the downstream side of the reading unit, and the damage determination unit is configured to prevent the paper sheet from passing through the extraction preventing member.
- the present invention is characterized in that a process for determining damage to paper sheets is performed.
- control means is capable of controlling the transport mechanism so as to transport the paper sheets toward the insertion port side, and when the damage determination means determines that the paper sheets are damaged, The leaves are transported toward the insertion port side.
- the place made into the objective of this invention is providing the authenticity determination method used for such a banknote processing apparatus and such a banknote processing apparatus which can perform authenticity determination correctly, even when expansion and contraction generate
- a banknote processing apparatus identifies the effectiveness of the banknote inserted by the user from the banknote insertion slot, and provides various products and services according to the banknote value identified as valid, For example, it is incorporated in a game medium lending machine installed in a game hall, or a vending machine or a ticket machine installed in a public place.
- the above-described banknote handling apparatus is configured to determine the type of the inserted banknote (authentication determination) as disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6-243234.
- the banknote processing apparatus disclosed in Patent Document 1 is configured to perform authenticity determination of a banknote using length data, and a light emitting element and a light receiving element are installed in a transport path through which the banknote is transported. The length of the inserted bill is detected.
- the pattern data of the banknote is obtained based on the time-series output of the light receiving element, pattern comparison means for comparing with the reference pattern data corresponding to the type of banknote is provided, and the detected length data, And the authenticity of a banknote is determined based on the comparison result of a pattern comparison means.
- the banknotes may be determined to be false even if the banknotes are genuine. That is, since the banknote is usually formed of a fibrous material, for example, there is a problem that it shrinks when dried after containing moisture, and at this time, the printing area of the banknote also shrinks. Therefore, in the conventional method of acquiring the length data from the print area and performing the authenticity determination, there is a possibility that an erroneous determination process is performed.
- the present invention has been made by paying attention to the above-described circumstances, and is used for a banknote processing apparatus capable of accurately determining the authenticity even when the banknote expands and contracts, and such a banknote processing apparatus.
- An object is to provide a method for determining authenticity.
- the banknote processing device stores a permissible range from a reference value that is a reference for the length of the print area for each side of the banknote reading means and banknotes.
- a correction value is calculated for the measured data.
- the actual measurement data on the other surface is corrected, and the corrected actual measurement data is compared with the allowable range on the other surface stored in the allowable range storage unit to perform authentication determination processing.
- a comparison / determination unit to be executed.
- the permissible range that is permitted from the reference value that is the reference for the length of the print area is stored in advance in each permissible range storage unit.
- the said banknote reading means will acquire the reading data (measurement data) about the length of the printing area printed on both surfaces of the banknote.
- the measured data on the length of the print area on one side of the banknote is out of the allowable range on the side, the length on the print area acquired on the other side based on the measured data.
- Correction processing is performed on the measured data. And since the actual measurement data corrected by this correction process is compared with the allowable range on the other surface stored in the allowable range storage unit and the authenticity determination process is executed, even if the banknote is stretched, However, accurate authentication can be performed.
- the comparison / determination unit executes the authenticity determination process when the measured data of the one surface is equal to or less than an allowable range on the surface.
- the measured data on the one surface may be below the allowable range on that surface.
- the other surface contracts at a similar rate, and in the above-described configuration, in such a case, the print acquired on the other surface based on the measured data on one surface
- the actual measurement data of the length related to the area is corrected, and the authenticity determination process of the banknote is executed. For this reason, when a banknote shrink
- the reference value is characterized in that the lengths of the printing areas on both sides are extracted from a plurality of genuine banknotes, and is the average value of the lengths of the printing areas on each side.
- the authenticity determination method includes an allowable range specifying step for specifying an allowable range in advance from a reference value that is a reference for the length of the print area for each surface of the bill.
- an allowable range specifying step for specifying an allowable range in advance from a reference value that is a reference for the length of the print area for each surface of the bill.
- the authenticity determination method when the authenticity determination is performed, actual measurement data is acquired for each of the lengths of the print areas printed on both sides of the bill.
- the permissible range is specified in advance for each surface of the banknote from a reference value that is a reference for the length of the print area, and the actual measurement data on the length of the print area on one side of the banknote
- correction processing is performed on the actual measurement data on the length of the print area acquired on the other surface based on the actual measurement data.
- the corrected actual measurement data is compared with an allowable range on the other side stored in advance, and authenticity determination processing is executed. Therefore, even if the banknote is stretched, accurate authentication is performed. Is possible.
- the actual measurement data of the length obtained with respect to the printing area of one side of the banknote is less than the allowable range on the side
- the corrected actual measurement data on the other side obtained in the correction processing step is When it is within the allowable range on the surface, the bill is determined to be authentic.
- the measured data on the one surface may be below the allowable range on that surface.
- the other surface contracts at a similar rate, and in the above-described configuration, in such a case, the print acquired on the other surface based on the measured data on one surface
- the actual measurement data of the length related to the area is corrected, and if the corrected actual measurement data is within the allowable range on the surface, the bill is determined to be authentic. For this reason, when a banknote shrink
- the actual measurement data of the length obtained with respect to the print area of one side of the banknote is within the allowable range on the side
- the actual measurement data of the length obtained with respect to the print area of the other side of the banknote is When it is outside the allowable range on the surface, the bill is discriminated as a fake.
- the banknote is not expanded or contracted. For this reason, if the actual measurement data is outside the allowable range for the other surface, the banknote can be determined to be fake, so that it is not necessary to perform a correction process, and the authenticity determination process is simplified.
- the reference value serving as a reference for the length of the print area specified for each surface of the banknote is obtained by extracting the length of the double-sided print area from a plurality of genuine banknotes, It is determined by an average value.
- the present invention it is possible to obtain a banknote processing apparatus capable of accurately determining the authenticity even when the banknote is expanded and contracted, and an authenticity determining method used in such a banknote processing apparatus.
- an object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet identification device and a paper sheet identification method capable of accurately identifying authenticity even when a crease or the like is generated in a watermark formed on the paper sheet. It is to be.
- a banknote handling apparatus that handles banknotes that are one aspect of paper sheets identifies the authenticity of banknotes inserted from a banknote insertion slot by a user, and according to the banknote value identified as authentic, It is incorporated in service equipment that provides various products and services, such as game media lending machines installed in amusement halls, or vending machines and ticket machines installed in public places.
- identification of the authenticity of a banknote is performed by a banknote identification device installed in a banknote conveyance path provided continuously at the banknote insertion slot, and light is applied to the banknote moving in the banknote conveyance path. Then, the transmitted light and reflected light are received by the light receiving sensor, and the authenticity is identified by comparing the received light data with the regular data.
- a watermark has been formed (hereinafter, a watermark or a watermark formed on a banknote is collectively referred to as a “watermark”).
- a watermark may be used as a genuine recognition target area in improving the accuracy of identifying a banknote.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-285775 irradiates a watermark with infrared light or visible light.
- a bill discriminating apparatus that identifies authenticity of a bill by acquiring transmitted light and reflected light is disclosed.
- the identification accuracy of the authenticity of the banknote is improved by using the watermark part of the banknote, but normally, when the banknote is stored in a wallet or the like, it may be folded in half. In many cases, if a watermark area is formed in this part, the area is affected by a crease, and the authenticity of authenticity may be lowered. In this case, as disclosed in the publicly known document 1 described above, there is a possibility that even if the banknote is pressed by the pressing portion, the wrinkles are not sufficiently removed, and there is a limit in improving the identification accuracy. In the conventional identification of the authenticity of a banknote, there is no technique for identifying a watermark by removing a fold.
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described circumstances, and a paper sheet identification device capable of accurately identifying authenticity even when a crease or the like is generated in a watermark formed on the paper sheet, and An object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet identification method.
- a paper sheet identification device includes a reading unit that reads a watermark image formed on a paper sheet, and a watermark image read by the reading unit, using color information having brightness.
- a conversion unit that converts each pixel having a predetermined size as one unit, a watermark image for each pixel converted by the conversion unit, an average density value for each pixel row in one direction, and a pixel in another direction
- a watermark image correction processing unit that calculates an average density value for each column and an average density value of the entire watermark image, and corrects the density value of each pixel so as to approximate or match the average density value of the entire watermark image
- a reference watermark image that serves as a comparison reference, a storage unit that stores color information having brightness and stores each pixel having a predetermined size as one unit, and an image corrected by the watermark image correction processing unit. , The reference transparent stored in the storage unit Compared to the image, and having an an identification processing unit for identifying the authenticity.
- the paper sheet identification apparatus having the above-described configuration, it is possible to improve the accuracy of authenticity of authenticity by acquiring the information of the watermark image for preventing forgery and comparing it with the watermark image information as a reference.
- the image information of the crease part is different from a normal one, and becomes dark image information along the crease, but is read by the reading means described above.
- the comparison is made with the reference watermark image stored in the storage unit in advance, so that the fold is not included in the watermark image. Even if it has etc., it becomes possible to identify authenticity with high accuracy.
- the reference watermark image stored in the storage unit includes, from the reference watermark image, an average density value for each pixel row in one direction, an average density value for each pixel row in the other direction, and the entire watermark image. An average density value is calculated, and the density value correction process of each pixel is performed so as to approximate or match the average density value of the entire watermark image.
- the same watermark image is subjected to the same correction process as that of the watermark image of the read paper sheet.
- the relevance becomes higher, and authenticity can be identified with higher accuracy.
- the identification processing unit calculates a correlation coefficient from the density value for each pixel corrected by the watermark image correction processing unit and the density value for each pixel of the reference watermark image stored in the storage unit. When the correlation coefficient is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, it is determined to be authentic.
- the correlation coefficient is calculated from the density value for each pixel corrected by the watermark image correction processing unit and the density value for each pixel of the reference watermark image stored in the storage unit. Therefore, authenticity can be compared not in the partial area of the watermark image but in the entire watermark image, and the authenticity can be identified with higher accuracy.
- the paper sheet identification method obtains a watermark image formed on a paper sheet for each pixel including a color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit.
- Watermark image acquisition step and from the watermark image acquired for each pixel, an average density value for each pixel row in one direction, an average density value for each pixel row in the other direction, and an average density value of the entire watermark image
- a watermark image correction process for calculating and correcting the density value of each pixel so as to approximate or match the average density value of the entire watermark image, and using the corrected watermark image as a reference watermark image
- an identification processing step for identifying authenticity.
- the paper sheet identification method having the above-described configuration, it is possible to improve authentication accuracy of authenticity by acquiring information on a watermark image for preventing forgery and comparing it with watermark image information serving as a reference.
- the image information of the crease part is different from usual, and dark image information along the crease is obtained.
- the watermark image is compared with the reference watermark image, so that even if the watermark image has a fold or the like. It is possible to identify authenticity with high accuracy.
- the reference watermark image includes, from the reference watermark image, an average density value for each pixel row in one direction, an average density value for each pixel row in the other direction, and an average density value of the entire watermark image.
- the density value of each pixel is corrected so that it is calculated and approximated or matched with the average density value of the entire watermark image.
- the reference watermark image is subjected to the same correction processing as that of the watermark image of the read paper sheet.
- the relevance becomes higher, and authenticity can be identified with higher accuracy.
- the identification processing step calculates a correlation coefficient from the density value for each pixel corrected in the watermark image correction processing step and the density value for each pixel of the reference watermark image, and the correlation coefficient is predetermined.
- the threshold value is equal to or greater than the threshold value, it is determined to be authentic.
- the correlation coefficient is calculated from the density value for each pixel corrected in the watermark image correction processing step and the density value for each pixel of the reference watermark image.
- the present invention it is possible to obtain a paper sheet identification apparatus and a paper sheet identification method capable of accurately identifying authenticity even when a crease or the like is generated in a watermark formed on the paper sheet.
- Another object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet identification apparatus and a paper sheet identification method that can identify the authenticity of a watermark area formed on a paper sheet without increasing the cost. is there.
- a banknote handling apparatus that handles banknotes that are one aspect of paper sheets identifies the authenticity of banknotes inserted from a banknote insertion slot by a user, and according to the banknote value identified as authentic, It is incorporated in service equipment that provides various products and services, such as game media lending machines installed in amusement halls, or vending machines and ticket machines installed in public places.
- identification of the authenticity of a banknote is performed by a banknote identification device installed in a banknote conveyance path provided continuously at the banknote insertion slot, and light is applied to the banknote moving in the banknote conveyance path. Then, the transmitted light and reflected light are received by the light receiving sensor, and the authenticity is identified by comparing the received light data with the regular data.
- a watermark has been formed (hereinafter, a watermark or a watermark formed on a banknote is collectively referred to as a “watermark”).
- a watermark may be used as a genuine recognition target area in improving the accuracy of identifying a banknote.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-285775 irradiates a watermark with infrared light or visible light.
- a bill discriminating apparatus that identifies authenticity of a bill by acquiring transmitted light and reflected light is disclosed.
- the above-mentioned banknote watermark is formed by a special method so that it cannot be counterfeited. Therefore, it is considered to be extremely effective in determining authenticity. If such a watermark is counterfeited, it is conceivable to apply a thin print image similar to the watermark image on either side of the paper to be counterfeited.
- the counterfeit banknote in which the watermark image is formed by performing thin printing on one of the surfaces is irradiated with light on the banknote, Although it is possible to identify the authenticity by obtaining the reflected light, it is necessary to install light receiving sensors on both sides of the bills to be conveyed, and there is a problem that the cost increases.
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described circumstances, and is a paper sheet identification device and paper sheet that can identify the authenticity of a watermark area formed on a paper sheet without increasing the cost.
- An object is to provide an identification method.
- the paper sheet identification device includes a light receiving unit that receives reflected light of a watermark image formed on a conveyed paper sheet, and a reflected light of the watermark image received by the light receiving unit.
- a conversion unit that converts color information having brightness and that has a predetermined size as a unit, a density value for each pixel converted by the conversion unit, and a reference paper sheet
- An identification processing unit that calculates a correlation coefficient from a density value for each pixel by transmitted light of the watermark image and identifies the authenticity of the watermark image based on the correlation coefficient.
- the paper sheet identification apparatus uses this relationship to install light receiving means only on one side of the conveyed paper sheet to identify authenticity.
- the conversion unit since the density value for each pixel obtained by the reflected light of the watermark image is opposite to the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light obtained at the same position, a correlation coefficient shifted to the minus side can be obtained within the range of ⁇ 1 ⁇ R ⁇ 1, which is the range that the correlation coefficient R can take (The ideal value is considered to be a correlation coefficient of ⁇ 1, but it is actually a value larger than ⁇ 1 due to the effects of banknote defacement, wrinkles, watermark misalignment, etc.) For this reason, by setting a threshold value that is equal to or less than a predetermined value, it is possible to derive such a contradictory density value between the transmitted light and the reflected light, and the conveyed paper sheet.
- the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the reference paper sheet may be acquired by the transmitted light from the actually transported paper sheet, or an identification processing unit as a reference value in advance. It may be stored in the memory.
- the light receiving unit can receive the transmitted light of the watermark image of the conveyed paper sheet
- the identification processing unit includes a density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image acquired by the light receiving unit, and The correlation coefficient is calculated from the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the paper sheet as the reference, and the authenticity of the watermark image is identified based on the correlation coefficient.
- the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the conveyed paper sheet and the density for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the reference paper sheet Since the correlation coefficient is calculated from the values to identify the authenticity, it is possible to eliminate paper sheets that do not have a watermark pattern formed thereon.
- the identification processing unit performs position correction by moving the pixel position of the acquired watermark image so as to correspond to the pixel position of the watermark image of the paper sheet as a reference. Then, the authenticity is identified by extracting the place where the absolute value of the correlation coefficient is the highest.
- the light applied to the paper sheet is near infrared light.
- the paper sheet identification method includes color information having brightness, and is formed on a transported paper sheet for each pixel having a predetermined size as one unit. Correlation coefficient from the image acquisition step for acquiring the reflected light of the watermark image, the density value for each pixel by the reflected light of the watermark image, and the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the reference paper sheet And an authenticity identifying step using reflected light for identifying the authenticity of the watermark image based on the correlation coefficient.
- the paper sheet identification method utilizes this relationship to install light receiving means only on one side of the conveyed paper sheet to identify authenticity.
- the density value for each pixel based on the reflected light of the watermark image is in a relationship with the density value for each pixel based on the transmitted light obtained at the same position.
- the correlation coefficient R is calculated from the density value of each pixel, and a threshold value equal to or less than a predetermined value is set, so that such a contradictory density between the transmitted light and the reflected light.
- the relationship between the values is derived to identify the authenticity of the watermark formed on the paper sheet.
- the density value for each pixel by the reflected light of the watermark image described above is the density for each pixel by the transmitted light obtained at the same position. Since the correlation coefficient is opposite to the value, a correlation coefficient shifted to the minus side can be obtained (the ideal value is considered to be a correlation coefficient of -1, but such as banknote defacement, wrinkles, and watermark misalignment) Due to the influence, the value is actually larger than ⁇ 1), and by setting a threshold value not more than a predetermined value, such a contradictory density value is obtained between the transmitted light and the reflected light.
- the relationship can be derived, and the authenticity of the watermark formed on the paper sheet can be identified by the light receiving means installed on one side of the conveyed paper sheet.
- the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the reference paper sheet may be acquired from the transmitted light from the actually transported paper sheet or stored as a reference value in advance. It may be a thing.
- the image acquisition step acquires the transmitted light of the watermark image formed on the conveyed paper sheet for each pixel including color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit
- the correlation coefficient is calculated from the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image acquired in the image acquisition process and the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the reference paper sheet. It is further characterized by further comprising an authenticity identifying step using transmitted light for identifying the authenticity of the watermark image based on the number.
- the density value for each pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image acquired in the image acquisition process, and the pixel-by-pixel by the transmitted light of the watermark image of the reference paper sheet is calculated.
- the watermark image acquired so as to correspond to the pixel position of the watermark image of the paper sheet used as a reference when calculating the correlation coefficient The pixel position is moved, position correction is executed, the place where the absolute value of the correlation coefficient is the highest is extracted, and authenticity is identified.
- paper sheets such as banknotes, coupons, and gift certificates are provided with various forgery prevention measures in order to prevent forgery.
- various forgery prevention measures for example, as one of such anti-counterfeiting measures, microprints (very fine characters and patterns, etc.) are applied, and the effectiveness of the anti-counterfeiting can be verified by reading the microprint information and comparing it with authentic data. Identification (authentication determination) is performed. That is, since such a microprint has a fine line width, it is known to exhibit a unique pattern (moire fringe; moire pattern) due to light interference, and this moire fringe (moire pattern) is acquired. Then, the effectiveness of the paper sheet is identified by comparing with regular data.
- a hidden pattern composed of lines is formed on an information recording body as a paper sheet, and this hidden pattern is irradiated with a light source and the reflected light is confirmed.
- a technique for detecting with an optical sensor via a pattern (a confirmation line pattern is formed) is disclosed.
- the optical sensor can detect a unique moire pattern by the interference of the hidden lines of the hidden pattern and the lines of the confirmation pattern. By comparing it with the standard moire pattern, the authenticity judgment can be performed. Is going.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-306964 discloses a moire fringe generating means for irradiating a paper sheet having a microprint with a stroboscopic illumination device and generating a moire fringe from the reflected light, as in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-78620.
- a technique for detecting by an image detection means (area sensor) via a (lattice plate) is disclosed. Specifically, moire fringes are generated by the reflected light from the microprint passing through the lattice plate described above.
- the moire fringes are detected by an area sensor that is an image detecting means, and the periodic component fm If the intensity exceeds a preset threshold value Th, it is judged as good, and if the periodic component fm does not exceed the threshold value Th, it is judged as no.
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described problems, and provides a paper sheet identification apparatus that suppresses an increase in cost and enables authenticity determination using microprints formed on a paper sheet. With the goal.
- the paper sheet identification device includes a reading unit that reads the paper for each pixel including color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit, and the reading unit.
- Storage means for storing image data composed of a plurality of read pixels, increase / decrease means for increasing / decreasing the number of pixels of the image data, and the paper sheet based on the image data increased / decreased by the increase / decrease means
- paper sheet identifying means for identifying the authenticity of the paper.
- moire data in which a striped pattern (moire fringes) unique to the paper sheet appears is obtained by increasing or decreasing the number of pixels of the image data relating to the captured paper sheet. It becomes possible. Thereby, for example, in order to improve the identification accuracy, it is necessary to newly manufacture a filter for generating moire fringes even when the sensor constituting the paper sheet reading unit is changed to one having a high resolution. It becomes possible to suppress the increase in cost.
- the increase / decrease in the number of pixels by the increase / decrease means is increased / decreased at different ratios in the direction of taking in the paper sheet and the direction orthogonal thereto.
- moiré fringes are generated in the image data simply by increasing / decreasing the number of pixels of the image data regarding the captured paper sheet at different ratios in the capturing direction of the paper sheet and the direction orthogonal thereto. It becomes easy to generate
- the present invention is characterized by having a parameter setting unit for setting the increase / decrease ratio so that the increase / decrease of the number of pixels by the increase / decrease means is executed at a predetermined increase / decrease ratio in the direction of taking in the paper and the direction orthogonal thereto.
- Another object of the present invention is to provide a paper sheet identification device capable of improving the processing speed associated with authenticity determination when performing authenticity determination processing using microprints formed on a paper sheet. .
- paper sheets such as banknotes, coupons, and gift certificates are provided with various forgery prevention measures in order to prevent forgery.
- various forgery prevention measures for example, as one of such anti-counterfeiting measures, microprints (very fine characters and patterns, etc.) are applied, and the effectiveness of the anti-counterfeiting can be verified by reading the microprint information and comparing it with authentic data. Identification (authentication determination) is performed. That is, since such a microprint has a fine line width, it is known to exhibit a unique pattern (moire fringe; moire pattern) due to light interference, and this moire fringe (moire pattern) is acquired. Then, the effectiveness of the paper sheet is identified by comparing with regular data.
- a hidden pattern composed of lines is formed on an information recording body as a paper sheet, and this hidden pattern is irradiated with a light source and the reflected light is confirmed.
- a technique for detecting with an optical sensor via a pattern (a confirmation line pattern is formed) is disclosed.
- the optical sensor can detect a unique moire pattern by interfering with the hidden lines of the hidden pattern and the confirmation pattern. By comparing it with the standard pattern, the authenticity of the paper sheet is detected. Judgment is being made.
- the true bill comparison data is moiré data obtained by interference between the confirmation pattern and the hidden pattern via the optical sensor. It is created based on image data that captures all areas where the pattern and the hidden pattern interfere. For this reason, the amount of moire data increases, and there is a problem that the processing speed of authenticity determination becomes slow.
- the present invention has been made paying attention to the above-described problems, and is capable of improving the processing speed associated with authenticity determination when performing authenticity determination processing using microprints formed on a paper sheet.
- An object is to provide an apparatus.
- the paper sheet identification device includes a reading unit that reads the paper for each pixel including color information having brightness and having a predetermined size as one unit, and the reading unit.
- Storage means for storing image data composed of a plurality of read pixels, and when reading a paper sheet by the reading means, the number of read pixels in the other direction is lowered than the one direction, and the pixels of the image data
- a sheet identifying means for identifying the authenticity of the sheet based on the image data changed by the changing means.
- the moire data unique to the paper sheet is acquired by lowering the number of read pixels in the other direction than in one direction. It becomes possible. Since the moire data is obtained by reducing the reading accuracy of the paper sheet, the amount of data is reduced, and the amount of comparison data to be compared with this can be reduced. It becomes possible to improve the processing speed of processing.
- a paper sheet transport mechanism that transports the paper sheet
- the reading unit includes a line sensor that reads the paper sheet transported by the paper sheet transport mechanism in the transport width direction of the paper sheet.
- the other direction is a paper sheet transport direction.
- moire data can be acquired by delaying the image capturing timing by the line sensor and lowering the reading accuracy in the bill conveyance direction (thinning out pixels). Since the moire data is obtained by lowering the reading accuracy of the paper sheet, the data amount is reduced and the processing speed of the authenticity determination process can be improved.
- control means for controlling the transport speed by the paper sheet transport mechanism.
- the paper conveyance speed is set to a high speed, and the reading accuracy in the paper sheet conveyance direction is lowered (thinning out pixels), so that moire data is obtained. It becomes possible to get. Since the moire data is obtained by lowering the reading accuracy of the paper sheet, the data amount is reduced and the processing speed of the authenticity determination process can be improved.
- the game can be continued without causing the player to feel inconvenience even when the basic currency on hand is lost.
- FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing a casino system having a gaming machine of the present invention.
- FIG. 11 is a conceptual diagram illustrating a connection state of the gaming machine. It is a timing chart of a game system. It is an explanatory view showing an outline of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is a view illustrating a function flow of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a game system including a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overall configuration of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is an enlarged view of the PTS terminal with which the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is provided.
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a card unit and an IC card provided in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a PTS terminal.
- FIG. 10 is a view illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the LCD of the PTS terminal when a bill is inserted into a bill validator of a gaming machine in which the PTS terminal according to the embodiment of the present invention is mounted. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the process of the mini game 2 performed with the PTS terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the credit conversion process performed with the PTS terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention.
- FIG. 10 is a view illustrating an example of a screen displayed on the LCD of the PTS terminal when a bill is inserted into a bill validator of a gaming machine in which the PTS terminal according to the embodiment of the present invention is mounted.
- FIG. 25 shows an arrangement of base game symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the reel of the slot machine related to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 48 shows an arrangement of bonus game symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the reel of the slot machine related to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of a symbol string determination table provided in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. A code No. included in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of a determination table.
- FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of a wild symbol increase count determination table provided in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is explanatory drawing of the trigger symbol increase number determination table with which the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention is provided.
- FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram of a payout table provided in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display state of the symbol display device included in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display state of the symbol display device included in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention;
- FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display state of the symbol display device included in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention;
- 42 is a flowchart of a base game execution process of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- 21 is a flowchart of a base game symbol determination process in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 42 is a flowchart of a bonus game execution process in the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- 10 is a flowchart of display update processing of the slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of the payment process of the slot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the credit conversion process of the PTS terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the adjustment process of the PTS terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the authentication process of the PTS terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the human body detection process of the PTS terminal which concerns on embodiment of this invention.
- FIG. 6 is a front view schematically showing a gaming system according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 65A is a view illustrating an example of an image displayed on the upper image display panel included in the slot machine included in the gaming system according to the second embodiment of the present invention
- FIG. 65B is a view illustrating the second embodiment of the present invention.
- FIG. 26 is a view showing an example of an image displayed on the upper image display panel included in the slot machine constituting the gaming system according to FIG.
- FIG. 64 is an overhead view schematically showing a personal tracking system included in the casino system shown in FIG.
- FIG. 63 It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the staff management server with which an individual tracking system is provided.
- FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a staff management table stored in the staff management server shown in FIG. 67. It is a flowchart which shows the staff management process performed in a staff management server.
- FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an external appearance of a slot machine constituting the gaming system.
- FIG. 71 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the slot machine shown in FIG. 70. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a PTS terminal that configures the gaming system.
- FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the exchange server which comprises a gaming system.
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of a progressive server that configures the gaming system. It is a flowchart which shows the exchange information acquisition process performed in an exchange server.
- FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a deposit acceptance process performed in the PTS terminal shown in FIG. 72.
- FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of image storage processing performed in the PTS terminal shown in FIG. 72.
- FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of the card
- 42 is a flowchart showing a slot machine game execution process performed in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the subroutine of a flag set process.
- FIG. 82A is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols rearranged on the winning line and a payout number
- FIG. 82B shows a combination of the symbols rearranged on the winning line and the payout number
- FIG. 82C is a diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols rearranged on the winning line and a payout number. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol rearranged to the display block.
- FIG. 90A is a diagram showing a light emission number determination table
- FIG. 90B is a diagram showing a light emission number determination table. It is a bird's-eye view which shows typically a personal tracking system concerning other embodiments. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the slot machine side abnormal time process performed in the slot machine which concerns on other embodiment.
- FIG. 1 It is a flowchart which shows the money_receiving
- FIG. 1 It is a figure which shows the structure of the banknote processing apparatus which concerns on 3rd Embodiment, and is a perspective view which shows the whole structure.
- the perspective view which shows the state which opened the opening-and-closing member with respect to the main body frame of an apparatus main body.
- the right view which showed roughly the conveyance path
- the right view which shows schematic structure of the power transmission mechanism for driving the press board arrange
- the left view which shows schematic structure of the drive source for driving a banknote conveyance mechanism, and a driving force transmission mechanism.
- the block diagram which shows the structure of the control means which controls the drive of drive members, such as a banknote conveyance mechanism and a banknote reading means.
- the flowchart explaining a conveyance path open process procedure. 7 is a flowchart for explaining a skew correction operation processing procedure.
- the flowchart which shows the subroutine of an information output process.
- the timing chart which shows the lighting control of the light emission part in a banknote reading means, and shows the lighting control of the light emission part at the time of reading a banknote.
- the block diagram which shows the structure of the control means which controls the drive of drive members, such as a banknote conveyance mechanism and a banknote reading means.
- the figure which shows the state which the chip
- (A) is a plan view of a normal banknote
- (b) is a side view showing a state in which the leading edge of the banknote being conveyed is broken, and (c) is a state in which a chip of the banknote being conveyed is occurring. Plan view.
- movement of the banknote in the banknote processing apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. 7 is a flowchart for explaining damage determination processing. 7 is a flowchart for explaining damage determination processing.
- the block diagram which shows the structure of the control means which controls the drive of drive members, such as a banknote conveyance mechanism and a banknote reading means.
- the schematic diagram which illustrates the range which acquires the length data of the printing area
- the timing chart which shows the lighting control of the light emission part in a banknote reading means, and shows the lighting control of the light emission part at the time of reading a banknote.
- the block diagram which shows the structure of the control means which controls operation
- Flowchart for explaining bill authentication processing operation (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the banknote with a crease
- (A) is a figure which shows the structure of the banknote by which the crease was correct
- (b) is a figure which shows the arrangement
- the block diagram which shows the structure of the control means which controls operation
- (A) is a figure which shows the arrangement
- (b) is a figure which shows the arrangement
- the perspective view which shows the whole structure of one Embodiment of the banknote identification device of 5th Embodiment.
- the perspective view which shows the state which opened the upper frame with respect to the lower frame.
- the figure which showed the structure of the banknote identification apparatus typically.
- the block diagram which shows the control system of a banknote identification device.
- (A) And (b) is a figure which shows the image data of the banknote obtained after performing the increase / decrease process of the number of pixels, respectively. It is a schematic diagram explaining the generation
- FIG. 1 is a schematic view schematically showing an overall image of the casino system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
- the casino system 1802 includes a management server block 2820, a customer terminal block 1821, and a staff terminal block 1822.
- the management server block 2820 includes a casino hall server 1861, an exchange server 2862, a casino / hotel staff management server 1860, a member management server 1864, an IC card / money management server 1865, a megabucks server 1866, and an image server 1867. And.
- the casino hall server 1861 is a server for collecting money flow in the casino, creating a renting table, and managing each server in the management server block 2820.
- the exchange server 2862 is a server for obtaining exchange information from the outside (Internet 1815) via the communication line 1823.
- the casino / hotel staff management server 1860 is a server for managing attendance of staff working at the casino / hotel, and grasping the current position of the staff in the casino.
- the member management server 1864 is a server for managing member information such as personal information of members and past game results.
- the IC card / money management server 1865 is a server for counting sales by cashless IC cards.
- the megabucks server 1866 is a server for managing accumulated values for progressive granting and determining progressive granting.
- the image server 1867 is a server for storing and managing the images of the faces of staff members and players taken by a camera provided in the casino.
- the customer terminal block 1821 includes a slot machine 1010 such as a slot machine equipped with a PTS (player tracking system) terminal 1700, and a settlement machine 1868.
- the slot machine 1010 is connected to the management server block 2820 via a PTS terminal 1700 via a network.
- one PTS terminal 1700 is provided in a part of the housing for one slot machine 1010.
- the staff terminal block 1822 (FIG. 1) includes a staff management terminal 1869 and a member card ticketing terminal 1870.
- the staff management terminal 1869 is controlled by the casino / hotel staff management server 1860.
- the staff management terminal 1869 transmits information to a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) (not shown) carried by the staff based on a signal received from the casino / hotel staff management server 1860, or a mobile phone carried by the staff. Or start communication.
- PDA Personal Digital Assistant
- the member card ticketing terminal 1870 includes a camera, and when the member card (IC card) is issued, the face of the player who receives the IC card is photographed. The captured image is stored in the image server 1867 in association with the customer ID. The personal information of the member input at the time of issuing the member card or registering the member is stored in the member management server 1864 in association with the customer ID.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is connected to the bill validator 1022 via a communication line (or slot machine 1010) (described later).
- FIG. 2 is a conceptual diagram showing a configuration in which the exchange function is integrated with the PTS terminal 1700.
- a player identification unit human body detection camera 1712 (1713), microphone 1704 (1705), human body detection sensor 1115 (FIG. 12)
- the PTS terminal 1700 can add information related to authentication and information related to exchange using a dedicated line by using a communication line as an additional function while maintaining compatibility with the existing system.
- various information can be downloaded from the management server block 2820 (FIG. 1), and megabacks can be obtained through communication with the management server block 2820.
- services such as image recording and personal rescue for individual players in games can be provided.
- the banknote discriminator 1022 can accept banknotes of a plurality of countries (currencies), discriminates the denomination (type of currency) and amount of the inserted banknotes, and stores denomination data and money amount data representing them. Output. If the inserted bill cannot be identified, error data is output (described later).
- the PTS terminal 1700 stores in advance the currency of the country in which the PTS terminal 1700 (slot machine 1010) is installed. Based on the denomination data and money amount data output from the bill validator 1022, these data are stored. Is converted into the value of the currency of the country in which the PTS terminal 1700 is installed (described later).
- the banknote processing apparatus 3001 mentioned later about FIG. 101 can be used.
- the PTS terminal 1700 converts the currency into the US currency based on the exchange rate. Conversion (exchange) is performed. Then, the converted currency amount data indicating the currency amount after conversion (exchange) is transmitted from the PTS terminal 1700 to the gaming machine. Therefore, the player can play a game on the gaming machine using a currency other than the US currency.
- the currency amount after conversion (exchange) is equivalent to a currency amount obtained by subtracting a currency amount corresponding to a predetermined fee (hereinafter, also referred to as exchange fee) from the currency amount before conversion (exchange).
- exchange fee data indicating the amount of currency corresponding to the exchange fee is transmitted from the PTS terminal 1700 to the Megabucks server 1866.
- the megabucks server 1866 updates the bonus accumulation value based on the currency amount indicated by the received exchange fee data.
- the bonus accumulation value reaches a specific value, coins are paid out as jackpots to one of the gaming machines.
- a bonus using the exchange fee as a source is provided.
- FIG. 3 is a timing chart showing a processing procedure in the casino system.
- the exchange server downloads exchange data from the Internet 1815 and updates the exchange data stored in the memory in the exchange server 2862 (step S1011). .
- the exchange server 2862 always stores the latest exchange data.
- the denomination data and amount data are transmitted to the PTS terminal 1700 as the identification result (step S1013).
- the identification result is stored in the memory of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the PTS terminal 1700 periodically requests exchange data from the exchange server 2862 (step S1014), and in response, the exchange server 2862 transmits the updated exchange data to the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1015). ).
- the PTS terminal 1700 performs rate calculation for converting the identification result transmitted from the bill validator 1022 into the amount data of the local currency based on the latest exchange data (step S1016).
- the PTS terminal 1700 further converts the money amount data converted to the local currency obtained as a result of the rate calculation into credit data for the game, and transmits this to the gaming machine controller as the calculation result (step S1017). Further, the PTS terminal 1700 transmits the money amount data converted into the local currency obtained as a result of the rate calculation to the IC card / money management server 1865 (step S1018).
- the gaming machine controller displays the calculation result on a display unit (described later) (step S1019), and executes the game based on the amount of money that has been input and converted into the value of the local currency.
- the game result is transmitted from the gaming machine controller to the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1021), the payout calculation based on the game result is performed in the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1022), and the amount to be paid out to the player is determined.
- the determined amount is written in the IC card as the amount data converted into the local currency, and the IC card is discharged (step S1023).
- the amount data obtained as a result of the game is added to the amount data of the inserted IC card. This will update this.
- the IC card / money management server 1865 displays the calculation result (step S1018) transmitted from the PTS terminal 1700, together with information for specifying a player playing at the slot machine 1010 provided with the PTS terminal 1700 at this time data. Is stored, the correspondence between the player and the amount of money put into the PTS terminal 1700 is always managed.
- FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing an outline of the gaming machine (slot machine) 1010.
- slot machine a gaming machine
- FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing an outline of the gaming machine (slot machine) 1010.
- slot machine a gaming machine
- the present invention is not limited to a slot machine but can be applied to a gaming machine that performs various games.
- the slot machine 1010 of the present invention displays a display window 1150 constituting five rows of pseudo reels 1151 to 1155 on the lower image display panel 1141 provided in the symbol display device 1016.
- a plurality of symbols 1501 are arranged on the pseudo reels 1151 to 1155, respectively, and are rotated according to the operation of the player. Further, the slot machine 1010 executes a so-called slot game in which a payout corresponding to a predetermined combination is awarded according to the arrangement state of the symbols 1501 due to the stopped pseudo reels 1151 to 1155 being stopped.
- the plurality of symbols 1501 will be described later.
- a credit number display section 1400 is displayed above the display window 1150, and the current credit number is displayed.
- “credit” is a virtual game medium on the game used when the player bets.
- the credit number display unit 1400 displays the total number of credits currently owned by the player.
- fractional cash display unit 1403 displays fractional cash.
- Fractional cash refers to cash that has not been converted into credit because the amount of money invested is insufficient.
- cash input from a PTS terminal 1700 is credit-converted by the PTS terminal 1700 using exchange rate data and denomination data.
- 1 dollar is 95 yen according to the exchange information in the exchange rate data
- 1 credit is 2 dollars according to the credit conversion rate in the denomination data.
- the PTS terminal 1700 first converts 10000 yen into $ 105 and 25 yen. Thereafter, $ 105 is converted to 52 credits and $ 1. Therefore, 10,000 yen inserted from the PTS terminal 1700 is converted into 52 credits and 120 yen.
- 120 yen is the sum of the fractional amounts by dollar conversion and credit conversion, and the fractional cash data including the information of this fractional amount is stored in the IC card / money management server 1865 of the management server block 2820. It has become. Note that the IC card / money management server 1865 of the management server block 2820 accumulates and stores fractional cash data for each identification code owned by the IC card 1500 described later.
- the “IC card 1500” is a card in which an IC (Integrated Circuit) for recording and calculating various data such as credit data is incorporated.
- the player can own credit-related data by using the IC card 1500 and can freely carry it between different slot machines.
- the credit related data is data including at least cash data in local currency units and an identification code. Then, by inserting the IC card 1500 into the PTS terminal 1700 of the slot machine 1010, the player can use the amount data stored in the IC card 1500 and use it in the slot machine 1010.
- the player may be able to store cash such as coins and banknotes in the IC card 1500 as cash data from a machine installed in an amusement store or the like.
- the IC card 1500 of this embodiment is provided with a display unit 1510, and the player inserts the IC card 1500 into the slot machine 1010 so that the amount data stored in the IC card 1500 can be stored at the time of payment. Can be confirmed. Further, the credit amount display unit 1400 on the lower image display panel 1141 provided in the slot machine 1010 displays the amount data stored in the IC card 1500 owned by the player after being converted into credits. Yes. That is, the player can check the amount owned by the player on the display unit 1510 of the IC card 1500 as well as on the credit amount display unit 1400 of the slot machine 1010.
- the IC card 1500 contained in the slot machine 1010 is discharged to a position where the player can easily pull it out.
- the display unit 1510 is exposed to the extent that the player can visually recognize it. Further, the exposed display portion 1510 displays “10000 yen”, which is the total amount owned by the player by the current settlement.
- the credit amount (“52” in the credit number display unit 1400) which is the result of credit conversion of “10000 yen”, and fractional cash (“120” in the fractional cash display unit 1403). ) And are displayed.
- the fractional cash displayed on the fractional cash display unit 1403 may be a local currency unit or a specific common unit.
- the IC card 1500 is not completely inserted into the slot machine 1010 and is inserted with the display unit 1510 exposed so that the player can play while checking the process of using the credit in the IC card 1500. It may be. Furthermore, the cash data display displayed on the display unit 1510 may be updated immediately after the credit is updated.
- credit-related data including information such as cash data is stored.
- “credit related data” is data related to credit, and in the case of this embodiment, includes at least cash data and an identification code. This credit-related data is also used as display data for displaying the number of credits on the display unit 1510.
- the IC card 1500 displays the credit data of the display writing IC 1505 on the display unit 1510, so that the credit related data stored in the display writing IC 1505 can be visually recognized from the outside. Therefore, when the credit-related data of the display writing IC 1505 is rewritten by the slot machine 1010, the rewritten credit-related data can be confirmed by the display on the display unit 1510. Further, the credit-related data of the display writing IC 1505 rewritten by the slot machine 1010 is used for the display of the display unit 1510, whereby the credit-related data stored in the same storage unit is updated and displayed by the slot machine 1010. It becomes the state shared by.
- the credit-related data in the storage unit is transferred as display data to another storage unit, or the credit-related data in the storage unit is updated and simultaneously stored as display data in another storage unit.
- the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like during data transfer is prevented, so that the credit data can be displayed on the display portion 1510 with high reliability.
- the updated data can be confirmed by the display on the display unit 1510. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a sense of security that the data of the IC card 1500 can always be confirmed during the game. it can.
- the symbol 1501 shown in FIG. 4 includes a specific symbol 1503 and a normal symbol 1502 to form a plurality of symbols 1501. That is, the symbol 1501 is a superordinate concept of the specific symbol 1503 and the normal symbol 1502.
- the specific symbol 1503 includes a wild symbol 1503a and a trigger symbol 1503b.
- the wild symbol 1503a is a symbol that can be used as a symbol 1501 of any kind.
- the trigger symbol 1503b is a symbol serving as a trigger for starting execution of at least a bonus game. That is, the trigger symbol 1503b serves as a trigger for shifting from the normal game to the bonus game, and serves as a trigger for increasing the specific symbol 1503 stepwise over time after the execution of the bonus game is started.
- the trigger symbol 1503b is a trigger that increases the specific symbol 1503 in the bonus game, that is, increases the specific symbol 1503 of at least one of the trigger symbol 1503b and the wild symbol 1503a.
- the trigger symbol 1503b may be a trigger that increases the number of bonus games in the bonus game.
- bonus game is synonymous with feature game.
- the bonus game in the present embodiment has been described as a game in which a free game is repeated.
- the bonus game may be any type of game as long as the game state is more advantageous than the normal game.
- other bonus games may be adopted as long as the game state is advantageous to the player, that is, the game state is more advantageous than the base game.
- the bonus game has various states such as a state in which more game values can be obtained than a normal game, a state in which game values can be acquired with a higher probability than a normal game, and a state in which the number of game values consumed is less than in a normal game. May be realized alone or in combination.
- the “free game” is a game that can be executed with less BET of game value than a normal game. “A game value can be executed with a small BET” includes the case where the BET is “0”. Therefore, the “free game” may be a game that is executed without a game value BET as a condition and pays an amount of game value according to the rearranged symbols 1501. In other words, the “free game” may be a game that is started without assuming the consumption of game value.
- the “normal game” is a game that is executed on the condition that a BET of the game value is paid and pays an amount of game value corresponding to the rearranged symbol 1501. In other words, the “normal game” is a game that is started on the premise that the game value is consumed.
- “Relocation” means a state in which the symbol 1501 is arranged again after the arrangement of the symbol 1501 is canceled.
- “Arrangement” means that the symbol 1501 can be visually confirmed by an external player. (Function flow of gaming machine)
- the slot machine 1010 has an external control device 1621 (center controller 1200) connected to the slot machine 1010 so as to be able to communicate data.
- the external control device 1621 is connected to a plurality of slot machines 1010 installed in the hall so that data communication is possible.
- the slot machine 1010 has a BET button 1601 (BET buttons (1-BET buttons 1034 to 10-BET buttons 1039 shown in FIG. 9), a spin button 1602 and a display 1614, and a game for controlling these components.
- the BET button 1601 and the spin button 1602 are a kind of input device, and the slot machine 1010 further includes a transmission / reception unit 1652 that enables data communication with the external control device 1621. is doing.
- the BET button 1601 has a function of accepting a BET amount by a player's operation.
- the spin button 1602 has a function of accepting the start of a game such as a normal game by a player's operation, that is, a start operation.
- the display 1614 has a function of displaying various symbols 1501, still image information such as numerical values and symbols, and moving image information such as effect images. Further, the display 1614 has a touch panel 1069 as an input device, and has a function of accepting various commands by a pressing operation of the player.
- the display 1614 has a symbol display area 1614a, a video display area 1614b, and a common game display area 1614c.
- the symbol display area 1614a displays the symbol 1501 of FIG.
- the video display area 1614b displays various types of effect video information executed while the game is in progress using moving images and still images.
- the common game display area 1614c is an area for displaying a common game such as a jackpot game. Note that the common game display area 1614c may be formed together with the symbol display area 1614a and the video display area 1614b, or may appear only when the common game is executed.
- the game controller 1100 includes a coin insertion / start check unit 1603, a base game execution unit 1605, a bonus game start determination unit 1606, a bonus game execution unit 1607, a random value extraction unit 1615, a symbol determination unit 1612, and an effect.
- the normal game execution unit 1605 has a function of executing a normal game on condition that the BET button 1601 is operated.
- the bonus game start determination unit 1606 determines whether or not to execute the bonus game based on the combination of symbols 1501 rearranged in the base game. That is, the bonus game start determination unit 1606 determines that a bonus game has been won when a trigger symbol 1503b described later is rearranged under a predetermined condition, and executes the bonus game so that the bonus game is executed from the next unit game.
- the “unit game” is a series of operations from the start of BET acceptance until a state where a prize can be established.
- the unit game of the normal game is in a state including a BET time for accepting a BET, a game time for rearranging the stopped symbols 1501, and a payout time for payout processing for giving a payout once.
- the unit game in the normal game is called a unit normal game.
- the bonus game execution unit 1607 has a function of executing a bonus game in which a free game is repeated with a plurality of games only by operating the spin button 1602.
- the symbol determination unit 1612 uses a random value from the random value extraction unit 1615 to determine a symbol 1501 to be rearranged, and rearranges the determined symbol 1501 to the symbol display area 1614a of the display 1614.
- the effect random number extracting unit 1616 When receiving the effect command signal from the symbol determining unit 1612, the effect random number extracting unit 1616 has a function of extracting the effect random number value and a function of outputting the effect random number value to the effect content determining unit 1613.
- the effect content determination unit 1613 has a function of determining the effect contents using the effect random number value, a function of outputting video information of the determined effect content to the video display area 1614b of the display 1614, and a voice / A function of outputting light emission information to the speaker portion 1617 and the lamp portion 1618.
- the winning determination unit 1619 is based on the function of determining the presence / absence of winning when the rearrangement information of the symbol 1501 that is rearranged on the display 1614 is obtained, and the winning combination when it is determined that the winning is achieved.
- the payout unit 1620 has a function of paying out game value to the player in the form of coins, medals, credits, and the like. In particular, the payout unit 1620 has a function of adding credit data corresponding to the payout credit to credit data stored in an IC card 1500 inserted into a PTS terminal 1700 described later.
- the game controller 1100 has a storage unit 1661 that stores various bet amount data and a timeout unit 1663.
- the storage unit 1661 is a device that stores data such as a hard disk device or a memory in a rewritable manner.
- the timeout unit 1663 has a function of displaying a non-input time during which the start operation of the spin button 1602 is not performed on the display 1614 together with a timeout time.
- the game controller 1100 has a common game execution unit 1653 and an additional BET unit 1651.
- the additional BET unit 1651 has a function that enables an increase in betting by the touch panel 1069 of the display 1614 when the common game is started or when the common game is not won or lost.
- the common game execution unit 1653 is stored in the storage unit 1661, and receives a BET input from the BET button 1601 for the BET amount corresponding to the BET amount data that can be bet for the normal game, and the normal game after the BET input is completed.
- the game controller 1100 is connected to a PTS terminal 1700 described later.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is a unit in which an LCD 1719, microphones 1704 and 1705, human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713, and the like are integrated, and has a function of rendering a game, for example, by communicating with the game controller 1100.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is provided with a card insertion slot 1706 so that an IC card 1500 can be inserted.
- the player can use the credit stored in the IC card 1500 in the slot machine 1010 by inserting the IC card 1500 into the card insertion slot 1706.
- the mechanical configuration of the PTS terminal 1700 will be described later.
- the game controller 1100 when the game controller 1100 receives credit data from the PTS terminal 1700, the game controller 1100 updates the credit display on the display 1614.
- the game controller 1100 outputs the adjustment credit data to the PTS terminal 1700 when the game is adjusted.
- the PTS terminals 1700 included in each of the plurality of slot machines 1010 are connected to the management server block 2820 so as to be able to communicate with each other, and collectively download images and manage IC cards 1500 and credits. (Operation of slot machine 1010)
- the slot machine 1010 checks whether or not the BET button 1601 has been pressed by the player, and subsequently checks whether or not the spin button 1602 has been pressed by the player. (Symbol decision)
- the slot machine 1010 extracts a random number value for symbol determination, and stops scrolling the symbol row in accordance with each of the plurality of video reels displayed on the display 1614.
- the symbol 1501 to be displayed on the player is determined. (Symbol display)
- the slot machine 1010 starts scrolling the symbol column of each video reel, and stops scrolling so that the determined symbol 1501 is displayed on the player. (Winning determination)
- the slot machine 1010 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols 1501 displayed on the player is related to winning. (Payout)
- the slot machine 1010 gives the player a privilege according to the combination type of the symbols 1501.
- the slot machine 1010 pays out a payout according to the combination of symbols 1501 to the player.
- the slot machine 1010 starts the bonus game when the combination of trigger symbols 1503b related to the bonus game trigger is displayed.
- a bonus game a game (free game) in which lottery related to the determination of the symbols to be stopped is performed a predetermined number of times without consuming coins.
- the slot machine 1010 pays out the jackpot amount to the player when the combination of symbols 1501 relating to the jackpot trigger is displayed.
- the jackpot accumulates a part of the coins consumed by the player in each slot machine 1010 as a jackpot amount.
- the jackpot is accumulated for that slot machine 1010. A function that pays out the amount of jackpot.
- the slot machine 1010 calculates the amount (accumulated amount) accumulated in the jackpot amount for each game and transmits it to the external control device 1621.
- the external control device 1621 accumulates the accumulated amount transmitted from each slot machine 1010 in the jackpot amount.
- the slot machine 1010 is provided with benefits such as a mystery bonus and insurance in addition to the above benefits.
- the mystery bonus is that a predetermined amount is paid out by winning a special lottery.
- the slot machine 1010 extracts a random value for the mystery bonus, and determines whether or not to establish the mystery bonus by lottery.
- Insurance is a function provided for the purpose of relieving the player from the situation where the bonus game has not been played for a long time.
- the player can arbitrarily select whether or not the insurance is valid.
- insurance When insurance is activated, it is exchanged for a predetermined amount of insurance.
- the slot machine 1010 starts counting the number of games when insurance is validated.
- the slot machine 1010 pays out the amount set for insurance when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number without paying out a large amount due to a bonus game or the like.
- the slot machine 1010 pays out a credit-converted payout by rewriting and updating credit data stored in the IC card 1500 inserted in the PTS terminal 1700. (Determination of production)
- the slot machine 1010 produces an effect by displaying an image on the display 1614, outputting light from the lamp 1111 and outputting sound from the speaker 1112.
- the slot machine 1010 extracts a random number value for production, and determines the content of the production based on the symbol 1501 determined by lottery. (Overall game system)
- a game system 1350 including the slot machine 1010 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the game system 1350 constitutes a part of the casino system 1802.
- the game system 1350 includes a plurality of slot machines 1010, each slot machine 1010, and an external control device 1621 connected via a communication line 1301.
- External controller 1621 controls a plurality of slot machines 1010.
- the external control device 1621 is a so-called casino hall server 1861 (FIG. 1) installed in a gaming facility having a plurality of slot machines 1010.
- Each slot machine 1010 is given a unique identification number, and the external control device 1621 determines the origin of data sent from each slot machine 1010 based on the identification number. Also, when data is transmitted from the external control device 1621 to the slot machine 1010, the transmission destination is specified using the identification number.
- the game system 1350 may be constructed in one game facility capable of performing various games, such as a casino, or may be constructed between a plurality of game facilities. Further, when the game system 1350 is constructed in one gaming facility, the game system 1350 may be constructed for each floor or section of the gaming facility.
- the communication line 1301 may be wired or wireless, and a dedicated line or an exchange line can be employed.
- FIG. 7 is a view showing a block image of the PTS system in the slot machine 1010 according to the embodiment of the present invention.
- the PTS terminal 1700 attached to the slot machine 1010 is communicably connected to the game controller 1100 and the bill validator controller 1890 of the slot machine 1010.
- the PTS terminal 1700 performs a game effect or updates credit data using sound or images. In addition, the PTS terminal 1700 transmits credit data necessary for settlement in communication with the bill validator controller 1890.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is connected to the management server block 2820 so as to be communicable.
- the PTS terminal 1700 communicates with the management server block 2820 between two lines of the general communication line and the additional function communication line.
- the PTS terminal 1700 communicates data such as cash data, identification code data, player member information, and the like on a general communication line. On the other hand, the PTS terminal 1700 performs communication related to a newly added function in the additional function communication line.
- the PTS terminal 1700 includes an exchange function, an IC card function, a biometric authentication function, a camera function, and an RFID (Radio Frequency) function that performs individual identification using radio waves in an additional function communication line. IDentification) function. (Machine configuration of slot machine)
- coins, bills, or electronic valuable information corresponding to these are used as game media.
- credit-related data such as cash data stored in the IC card 1500 is used.
- the slot machine 1010 includes a cabinet 1011, a top box 1012 installed on the upper side of the cabinet 1011, and a main door 1013 provided on the front surface of the cabinet 1011.
- the main door 1013 is provided with a symbol display device 1016 called a lower image display panel 1141.
- the symbol display device 1016 is formed of a transparent liquid crystal panel.
- the screen displayed by the symbol display device 1016 has a display window 1150 in the center.
- the display window 1150 is composed of 20 display blocks 1028 of 5 columns and 4 rows.
- Four display blocks 1028 in each column form pseudo reels 1151 to 1155.
- Each of the pseudo reels 1151 to 1155 rotates the symbol 1501 displayed on each display block 1028 in the vertical direction by moving and displaying the four display blocks 1028 downward while changing the overall speed. It is possible to perform rearrangement that stops later.
- the payline generation sequence on the left side as viewed from the player side includes 25 payline generation units 1065L (1065La, 1065Lb, 1065Lc, 1065Ld, 1065Le, 1065Lf, 1065Lg, 1065Lh, 1065Li, 1065Lj, 1065Lk, 1065Ll, 1065Lm, 1065Ln, 1065Lm, 1065Lm, 1065Lm 1065Lp, 1065Lq, 1065Lr, 1065LS, 1065Lt, 1065Lu, 1065Lv, 1065Lw, 1065Lx, 1065Ly).
- the payline generation row on the right side includes 25 payline generation units 1065R (1065Ra, 1065Rb, 1065Rc, 1065Rd, 1065Re, 1065Rf, 1065Rg, 1065Rh, 1065Ri, 1065Rj, 1065Rk, 1065Rl, 1065Rm, 1065Rn, 1065Ro, 1065Rn, 1065Ro, 1065Rn , 1065Rr, 1065RS, 1065Rt, 1065Ru, 1065Rv, 1065Rw, 1065Rx, 1065Ry).
- the payline generation unit 1065L forms a pair with any payline generation unit 1065R.
- a payline L that is a line from each payline generation unit 1065L to a payline generation unit 1065R that is paired with the payline generation unit 1065L is defined in advance. In FIG. 42, only one payline L is drawn for ease of explanation, but in the present embodiment, 25 paylines L are defined.
- the above-mentioned payline L is activated by connecting the payline generation units 1065L and 1065R. Otherwise, it is disabled.
- the valid number of paylines L is determined based on the BET amount. In the case of MAXBET, which is the maximum BET amount, the maximum number of 25 paylines L is activated.
- the activated payline L establishes various winning combinations for each symbol 1501. Details of the winning combination will be described later.
- the slot machine 1010 is a so-called video slot machine.
- the slot machine 1010 of the present invention substitutes a so-called mechanical reel for some of the pseudo reels 1151 to 1155. Also good.
- a touch panel 1069 is provided on the front surface of the symbol display device 1016, and the player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 1069.
- An input signal is transmitted from the touch panel 1069 to the main CPU 1071.
- An upper image display panel 1131 is provided on the front surface of the top box 1012.
- the upper image display panel 1131 includes a liquid crystal panel and constitutes a display.
- the upper image display panel 1131 displays an image related to the effect, an introduction of the contents of the game, and an image showing the explanation of the rules.
- the top box 1012 is provided with a speaker 1112 and a lamp 1111. In the slot machine 1010, an effect is executed by displaying an image, outputting sound, and outputting light.
- a data display 1174 and a keypad 1173 are provided below the upper image display panel 1131.
- the data display 1174 includes a fluorescent display, an LED, and the like, and displays, for example, member data read from the IC card 1500 inserted from the PTS terminal 1700 and data input by the player via the keypad 1173. is there.
- the keypad 1173 is for inputting data.
- PTS terminal machine configuration (PTS terminal machine configuration)
- FIG. 8 is an enlarged view of the PTS terminal 1700.
- an LCD 1719 is provided at the center of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the LCD 1719 displays, for example, an effect image that produces a game.
- the human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713 detect the presence or absence of a player by a camera function, and output a signal to a unit controller 1730 described later.
- the microphones 1704 and 1705 are used when the player participates in the game by voice or authenticates the player by voice recognition.
- the speakers 1707 and 1708 are dedicated speakers for the PTS terminal 1700 and are provided separately from the slot machine game speakers provided in the slot machine 1010.
- the speakers 1707 and 1708 produce a game by voice, and output a notification sound due to forgetting to remove the IC card 1500.
- the speakers 1707 and 1708 also output a notification sound even when authentication of the inserted IC card 1500 fails.
- the speakers 1707 and 1708 are installed so that sound can be heard in stereo in the front (player side) through a duct from the back side of the LCD 1719, and thus can be installed in a small space.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is provided with an LED 1709 and a card insertion slot 1706.
- the LED 1709 is lit in a plurality of colors to notify the remaining number of IC cards 1500 accumulated in a card stacker 1714 described later. Specifically, the LED 1709 lights yellow when the remaining number of IC cards 1500 is 5 or less, lights blue when 6 to 24, and lights green when 25 or more. When the remaining number of IC cards 1500 is 0 or 30, the LED 1709 is lit gray and the running game is stopped. Thereby, for example, when the LED 1709 is lit yellow, the staff of the casino hall can immediately determine that the remaining number of the IC cards 1500 is small, and replenish the IC cards 1500.
- the staff of the casino hall can immediately determine that the remaining number of IC cards 1500 is full, and the IC card 1500 can be extracted.
- the IC card 1500 can be replenished by inserting the IC card 1500 owned only by each staff from the card insertion slot 1706.
- the IC card 1500 is extracted, ten IC cards 1500 are discharged together with the replenishment card by inserting one card called a replenishment card from the card insertion slot 1706. In this way, the staff does not need to check the remaining number of IC cards 1500 of each slot machine 1010 on the management server or to actually check by opening the main door 1013 of the slot machine 1010, thereby improving security. It leads to.
- the card insertion slot 1706 has a mechanism for inserting or removing the IC card 1500.
- the IC card 1500 is inserted so that the display unit 1510 faces upward and faces away from the card insertion slot 1706.
- the IC card 1500 is completely inside when the player is playing the game, but is discharged so that the display unit 1510 is exposed at the time of payment. Thereby, the player can check credit-related data such as updated cash data. Further, the IC card 1500 may be held so that the display unit 1510 is exposed without completely entering the player even during the game. Thereby, the player can always confirm that the credit is updated during the game.
- the IC card 1500 When it is detected that there is no player using the human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713 at the time of credit settlement, the IC card 1500 is drawn into the inside and stored in the card stacker 1714. Thus, for example, even if a player who has confirmed that the remaining credit is small on the display unit 1514 stands by leaving the IC card 1500 on purpose, the IC card 1500 does not remain inserted for a long time. In the case of this embodiment, up to 30 card stackers 1714 can be stored.
- the PTS terminal 1700 of the present embodiment saves space because various devices having a microphone function, a camera function, a speaker function, a display function, and the like integrally form a single unit. Is realized. Thus, for example, when each function is installed as a single product, there is no inconvenience that the speaker cannot be installed toward the player when the LCD is directed toward the player. (Electric configuration of slot machine)
- the control panel 1030 includes a start button 1046, a GAMABLE Button 1045, BET button (1-BET button 1034-10-BET button 1039), line selection button (2-line selection button 1040-50 line selection button 1044), RESERVE button 1031 and TAKE WIN / COLLECT button 1032 And a GAME RULES button 1033 are provided.
- the start button 1046 is used to input an instruction to start symbol scrolling.
- the TAKE WIN / COLLECT button 1032 is used to input an instruction to pay out a credited coin to the coin tray 1018 or an instruction to write credit information corresponding to the credited coin on the IC card.
- the 1-BET button 1034 is used to input an instruction to bet one coin among the credited coins, and the 2-BET button 1035 is two coins out of the credited coins.
- the 3-BET button 1036 is used to input an instruction to bet three coins among the credited coins.
- the -BET button 1038 is used to input an instruction to bet 5 coins among the credited coins, and the 10-BET button 1039 is used to input 10 coins out of the credited coins. This is for inputting an instruction to bet coins on the game.
- the line selection buttons 1040 to 1044 are for designating the symbol columns of the plurality of display blocks 1028 displayed on the lower image display panel 1141 as BET targets.
- the 2-line selection button 1040 is a button for selecting two symbol columns
- the 10-line selection button 1041 is a button for selecting 10 symbol columns
- the 20-line selection button 1042 is 20
- the 40 line selection button 1043 is a button for selecting 40 symbol columns
- the 50 line selection button 1044 is for selecting 50 symbol columns. It is a button.
- the banknote discriminator 1022 recognizes the suitability of banknotes (base currency) and accepts regular banknotes in the cabinet 1011. As described above, the bill validator 1022 can accept bills of a plurality of countries other than the base currency of the country in which the slot machine 1010 is installed. It can be read.
- a berry glass 1132 on which a character of the slot machine 1010 is drawn is provided on the lower front surface of the front door 1013, that is, below the control panel 1030.
- PTS terminal arrangement area An area for PTS terminals (PTS terminal arrangement area) is provided between the lower image display panel 1141 and the control panel 1030, and a PTS terminal 1700 is provided in this PTS terminal arrangement area. .
- the PTS terminal 1700 is a device that receives various information from the management server block 2820 (FIG. 1) and provides it to a specific player.
- an LCD 1719 for displaying various information received from the management server block 2820, a card insertion slot 1706 for inserting and ejecting an IC card, and a player identification for identifying the player Part (human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713, microphones 1704 and 1705, human body detection sensor 1115), LED 1709 that emits light in a color corresponding to the remaining number of IC cards stocked inside, and for outputting sound effects and the like Ducts 1707A and 1708A are provided.
- the LCD 1719 is provided with a touch panel. As shown in FIG. 12, the human body detection camera 1713 and the microphone 1705 are attached instead when there is no space for the regular human body detection camera 1712 and the microphone 1704.
- the card insertion slot 1706 is provided on the side of the LCD 1719 (on the right side in this embodiment). Accordingly, the IC card is inserted into the card insertion slot 1706 with one hand (in the present embodiment, the right hand) without changing the posture while looking at the LCD 1719, or the IC card ejected from the card insertion slot 1706. Can receive.
- an IC card R / W (reading / writing device) that reads data from the IC card and writes data to the IC card (an antenna 1701, a modulation / demodulation unit described later in FIG. 16). 1721), a card stacker (FIGS. 8 and 9) for stocking a plurality of IC cards, and a card insertion slot 1706, an IC card R / W, and a card stacker 1714 for transferring IC cards.
- IC card transport module 1253 (FIG.
- speakers 1707 and 1708 for outputting sound and sound effects to the front surface of the PTS terminal 1700 via the ducts 1707A and 1708A, and the above-described each provided in the PTS terminal 1700
- a controller (such as CPU 1731 shown in FIG. 16) for controlling the unit is provided. It has been.
- the IC card transport module 1253 (FIG. 14) has a rotor that is driven to rotate by a motor, and the IC card inserted into the card insertion slot 1706 is pulled into a predetermined position by rotation of the roller in the pulling direction. Further, the IC card discharged to the outside from the card insertion slot 1706 is discharged to the outside by the rotation of the roller in the discharging direction.
- IC card R / W is RFID (Radio Frequency) Identification) reads data from the IC card and writes data to the IC card.
- the IC card R / W reads the credit information stored in the IC card inserted from the card insertion slot 1706 in a non-contact manner, or the credit given to the player according to the game result in the non-contact IC manner. Write on the card.
- the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) is provided above the LCD 1719, and images the face of the player looking at the LCD 1719 from the front.
- the camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of the player is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a CCD camera and a CMOS sensor camera.
- the microphone 1704 (1705) is provided above the LCD 1719 and collects the player's voice from the front.
- the human body detection sensor 1115 is provided above the card insertion slot 1706 and detects an operation of the player inserting the IC card into the card insertion slot 1706.
- an infrared distance measuring sensor or the like can be used, but it is not particularly limited.
- the presence of the player is detected by the human body detection camera 1712 (1713), the microphone 1704 (1705), and the human body detection sensor 1115.
- the attachment positions of the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) and the microphone 1704 (1705) may be attached above the card insertion slot 1706 instead of above the LCD 1719, as indicated by a dashed line in FIG. Good. That is, instead of the human body detection camera 1712 and the microphone 1704, a camera 1713 and a microphone 1705 may be provided. In this way, it is possible to cope with the case where another unit is attached to the position of the LCD 1719 without providing the LCD 1719.
- a human body detection camera 1713 provided above the card insertion slot 1706 has a configuration similar to that of the human body detection camera 1712, and images the player from an oblique direction.
- a microphone 1705 provided above the card insertion slot 1706 has the same configuration as the microphone 1704 and collects the player's voice in an oblique direction.
- the LCD 1719, the card insertion slot 1706, the player identification unit, the speakers and ducts 1707A and 1708A are integrally provided on the PTS panel 1105.
- the PTS panel 1105 is fixed to the cabinet 1011 via a bracket. That is, in the slot machine 1010, in the PTS terminal arrangement area between the lower image display panel 1141 and the control panel 1030, the LCD 1719, the card insertion slot 1706, the player identification unit, the speaker 1704 (1705), the ducts 1707A, 1708A, etc.
- a PTS panel 1105 in which the units constituting the PTS terminal 1700 are integrally provided is fixed by a bracket.
- the LCD 1719, the human body detection camera 1712 (1713), the microphone 1704 (1705), and the ducts 1707A and 1708A are integrally provided on the bezel.
- the PTS terminal 1700 includes an LCD 1719, a card insertion slot 1706, a human body detection camera 1712 (1713), and a microphone 1704 (1705) which are integrally provided on the PTS panel 1105 (FIG. 11). As shown in FIG. 11, the mounting positions of these units constituting the PTS terminal 1700 are determined by mounting holes formed in the PTS panel 1105.
- FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the PTS panel 1105.
- the PTS panel 1105 has a mounting hole 1105A for mounting the LCD 1719, a mounting hole 1105B for mounting the card insertion slot 1706, and a mounting hole 1105C for mounting the human body detection camera 1712 and the microphone 1704.
- a mounting hole 1105D for mounting the human body detection sensor 1115 and a mounting hole 1105E for mounting the ducts 1707A and 1708A for speakers are formed.
- the unit By attaching corresponding units (LCD 1719, card insertion slot 1706, human body detection camera 1712, microphone 1704, human body detection sensor 1115, and speaker ducts 1707A and 1708A) to these mounting holes 1105A to 1105E, The unit is positioned and attached at a predetermined position.
- corresponding units LCD 1719, card insertion slot 1706, human body detection camera 1712, microphone 1704, human body detection sensor 1115, and speaker ducts 1707A and 1708A
- the mounting hole 1105D has an opening for mounting only the human body detection sensor 1115 when the human body detection camera 1713 and the microphone 1705 are mounted above the LCD 1719 (ie, the mounting hole 1105C).
- the region indicated by the alternate long and short dash line does not need to be open. However, in consideration of the case where the human body detection camera 1713 and the microphone 1705 are attached above the card insertion slot 1706, a region indicated by the fixed chain line may be opened in advance and a decorative plate may be fitted.
- the PTS panel 1105 is attached to a plate-like bracket 1107, and the bracket 1107 is fixed to the cabinet 1011 of the slot machine 1010.
- the human body detection camera 1713 and the microphone 1705 that can be attached in place of the human body detection camera 1712 and the microphone 1704 are indicated by alternate long and short dash lines.
- FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the back side of the PTS terminal 1700.
- units such as an IC card transport module 1253, a card stocker 1121, speakers 1707 and 1708, and an LCD 1719 are attached to the back side of the PTS panel 1105. These units are integrated by a PTS panel 1105 and fixed to a cabinet 1011 of the slot machine 1010 via a bracket 1107.
- the card stacker 1121 is configured such that a plurality of IC cards 1500 are stacked and housed in a case having an open bottom surface.
- the IC card in the case is biased downward by a coil spring 1121A, and the IC card 1500 inserted through the card insertion slot 1706 is placed in the lower part of the case by an IC card transport module 1253 configured by a motor and a rotor. It is conveyed to a predetermined position, information is written and read out, and when it becomes unnecessary, it is kept in the case.
- the gaming board 1050 includes a CPU 1051, a ROM 1052, and a boot ROM 1053 connected to each other via an internal bus, a card slot 1055 corresponding to the memory card 1054, and an IC socket 1057 corresponding to a GAL (Generic Array Logic) 1056. .
- GAL Generic Array Logic
- the memory card 1054 includes a nonvolatile memory and stores a game program and a game system program.
- the game program includes a program related to game progress and a program for executing effects by images and sounds.
- the game program includes a symbol determination program.
- the symbol determination program is a program for determining symbols to be rearranged in the display block 1028.
- the game program includes each symbol in each symbol row of the display block and a code No. And the base game symbol table data indicating the base game symbol table (see FIG. 35) indicating the correspondence relationship between the random number values, the symbols of each symbol column of the display block, and the code No. And bonus game symbol table data indicating a bonus game symbol table (see FIG. 36), a symbol number determination table data indicating a symbol string determination table (see FIG. 37), a code No. Code No. indicating the determination table (see FIG. 38).
- the determination table data, the wild symbol increase number determination table data indicating the wild symbol increase number determination table (see FIG. 39), the trigger symbol increase number determination table data indicating the trigger symbol increase number determination table (see FIG. 40), and the payline L This includes odds data indicating the correspondence (see FIG. 41) between the type and number of symbols rearranged and the payout amount.
- the card slot 1055 is configured so that the memory card 1054 can be inserted and removed, and is connected to the motherboard 1070 by an IDE bus. Accordingly, by removing the memory card 1054 from the card slot 1053S, writing another game program in the memory card 1054, and inserting the memory card 1054 into the card slot 1053S, the type and contents of the game played in the slot machine 1010 are changed. be able to.
- GAL1056 is a kind of PLD (Programmable Logic Device) having an OR fixed type array structure.
- the GAL 1056 includes a plurality of input ports and output ports. When a predetermined input is input to the input port, the corresponding data is output from the output port.
- the IC socket 1057 is configured so that the GAL 1056 can be attached and detached, and is connected to the motherboard 1070 by a PCI bus.
- the contents of games played in the slot machine 1010 can be changed by replacing the memory card 1054 with one written with another program or rewriting the program written on the memory card 1054 with another one. .
- the CPU 1051, the ROM 1052, and the boot ROM 1053 connected to each other by an internal bus are connected to the motherboard 1070 by a PCI bus.
- the PCI bus transmits signals between the motherboard 1070 and the gaming board 1050 and supplies power from the motherboard 1070 to the gaming board 1050.
- the ROM 1052 stores an authentication program.
- the boot ROM 1053 stores a preliminary authentication program and a program (boot code) for the CPU 1051 to start the preliminary authentication program.
- the authentication program is a program (tamper check program) for authenticating the game program and the game system program.
- the preliminary authentication program is a program for authenticating the authentication program.
- the authentication program and the preliminary authentication program are described in accordance with a procedure (authentication procedure) for authenticating that the target program has not been tampered with.
- the motherboard 1070 is configured by using a commercially available general-purpose motherboard (printed wiring board on which basic components of a personal computer are mounted), a main CPU 1071, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 1072, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 1073, and a communication. And an interface 1082.
- the motherboard 1070 corresponds to the game controller 1100 in the present embodiment.
- the ROM 1072 includes a memory device such as a flash memory, and stores a program such as BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) executed by the main CPU 1071 and permanent data.
- BIOS Basic Input / Output System
- BIOS Basic Input / Output System
- initialization processing of a predetermined peripheral device is performed.
- game program and the game system program stored in the memory card 1054 are started via the gaming board 1050.
- the ROM 1072 may be rewritable or impossible.
- the RAM 1073 stores programs such as data used when the main CPU 1071 operates and a symbol determination program. For example, when the above-described game program, game system program, and authentication program are loaded, these can be stored. Further, the RAM 1073 is provided with a work area for executing the program. For example, an area for storing a counter for managing the number of games, the number of BETs, the number of payouts, the number of credits, etc., an area for storing a symbol (code number) determined by lottery, and the like are provided.
- the communication interface 1082 is for communicating with an external control device 1621 such as a server via the communication line 1301. Also, a door PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 1090 and a main body PCB 1110, which will be described later, are connected to the motherboard 1070 by USB. Further, a power supply unit 1081 is connected to the motherboard 1070. Further, a PTS terminal 1700 is connected to the motherboard 1070 by USB.
- an external control device 1621 such as a server via the communication line 1301.
- a door PCB (Printed Circuit Board) 1090 and a main body PCB 1110 which will be described later, are connected to the motherboard 1070 by USB. Further, a power supply unit 1081 is connected to the motherboard 1070. Further, a PTS terminal 1700 is connected to the motherboard 1070 by USB.
- the main CPU 1071 of the motherboard 1070 When power is supplied from the power supply unit 1081 to the motherboard 1070, the main CPU 1071 of the motherboard 1070 is activated, and power is supplied to the gaming board 1050 via the PCI bus to activate the CPU 1051.
- the door PCB 1090 and the main body PCB 1110 are connected to input devices such as switches and sensors and peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the main CPU 1071.
- the door PCB 1090 is connected to a control panel 1030, a reverter 1091, a coin counter 1092C, and a cold cathode tube 1093.
- the control panel 1030 has a reserve switch 1031S, a collect switch 1032S, a game rule switch 1033S, a 1-BET switch 1034S, a 2-BET switch 1035S, and a 3-BET switch 1037S corresponding to the above-described buttons.
- a start switch 1046S is provided. Each switch detects that the corresponding button has been pressed by the player, and outputs a signal to the main CPU 1071.
- a reverter 1091 and a coin counter 1092C are provided in the coin entry 1036. Then, the reverter 1091 identifies the suitability of the coins inserted into the coin entry 1036, and the coins other than the regular coins are discharged from the coin payout exit. Also, the coin counter 1092C detects accepted regular coins and counts the number of coins.
- the reverter 1091 operates based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071, and distributes appropriate coins selected by the coin counter 1092C to a hopper 1113 or a cash box (not shown). When the hopper 1113 is not filled with coins, the hopper 1113 is sorted. When the hopper 1113 is filled with coins, the hopper 1113 is sorted to a cash box.
- the cold cathode tube 1093 functions as a backlight installed on the back side of the upper image display panel 1131 and the lower image display panel 1141, and lights up based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071.
- the main body PCB 1110 Connected to the main body PCB 1110 are a lamp 1111, a speaker 1112, a hopper 1113, a coin detector 1113 ⁇ / b> S, a touch panel 1069, a bill entry (banknote identifier) 1022, a graphic board 1130, a key switch 1173 ⁇ / b> S, and a data display 1174.
- the bill entry (banknote identifier) 1022 may have a configuration provided in the PTS terminal 1700 in addition to the configuration provided directly in the slot machine 1010.
- the lamp 1111 is lit based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071.
- the speaker 1112 outputs sound such as BGM based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071.
- the hopper 1113 operates based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071, and pays out a designated number of payout coins from a coin payout exit to a coin tray (not shown).
- the coin detection unit 1113S detects the coins paid out by the hopper 1113 and outputs a signal to the main CPU 1071.
- the touch panel 1069 detects a position touched by a player's finger or the like on the lower image display panel 1141, and outputs a signal corresponding to the detected position to the main CPU 1071.
- the bill entry (banknote discriminator) 1022 recognizes whether or not a banknote is appropriate and accepts a regular banknote in the cabinet 1011.
- the bills inserted into the cabinet 1011 are converted into coins, and credits corresponding to the converted coins are added as player-owned credits.
- the graphic board 1130 controls display of images performed by the upper image display panel 1131 and the lower image display panel 1141 based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071.
- the graphic board 1130 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that generates image data, a video RAM that stores image data generated by the VDP, and the like. Note that image data used when generating image data by VDP is included in the game program read from the memory card 1054 and stored in the RAM 1073.
- VDP Video Display Processor
- the graphic board 1130 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) that generates image data based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data generated by the VDP, and the like. ing. Note that image data used when generating image data by VDP is included in the game program read from the memory card 1054 and stored in the RAM 1073.
- VDP Video Display Processor
- the key switch 1173S is provided on the keypad 1173, and outputs a predetermined signal to the main CPU 1071 when the keypad 1173 is operated by the player.
- the data display 1174 displays data read by the card reader 1172 and data input via the keypad 1173 by the player based on a control signal output from the main CPU 1071. (Electrical configuration of PTS terminal)
- the PTS controller 1720 that controls the PTS terminal 1700 is connected to various functional units around a unit controller 1730, and includes a CPU 1731, a communication unit 1734, a ROM 1733, and a RAM 1732.
- the CPU 1731 executes and calculates various programs stored in a ROM 1733 described later.
- the CPU 1731 executes the credit update program, converts the credit data acquired from the game controller 1100 into cash data, adds the fractional cash data in the management server block 2820, and transmits the cash data to the IC card 1500.
- the CPU 1731 uses the human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713 to send the IC card to the card stacker 1714. It is determined whether or not 1500 is captured.
- the CPU 1731 executes an authentication program and collates the identification code in the IC card 1500 with the identification code in the management server block 2820.
- the CPU 1731 executes a voice control program and controls a voice control circuit unit 1724 described later based on the authentication result.
- the voice control here refers to control in which the CPU 1731 controls a voice control circuit unit 1724 described later to notify the authentication failure from the speakers 1707 and 1708 in the case of authentication failure.
- the communication unit 1734 enables communication with the game controller 1100.
- the CPU 1731 executes the device program and controls the operation of the LCD 1719, the microphones 1704 and 1705, and the speakers 1707 and 1708. Further, the CPU 1731 executes an LED control program and controls the lighting of the LEDs 1709 according to the remaining number of IC cards 1500.
- the ROM 1733 includes a memory device such as a flash memory, and stores permanent data executed by the CPU 1731.
- the ROM 1733 has a credit update program for rewriting credit data stored in the IC card 1500 according to a command from the game controller 1100, a human body detection operation program, an authentication program, a voice control program, a device program, an LED, A control program.
- the RAM 1732 temporarily stores data necessary for executing various programs stored in the ROM 1733. For example, the RAM 1732 stores credit data to be updated based on a signal from the game controller 1100. The RAM 1732 stores the time when the player is detected by the human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713 and the time counted from that time.
- the unit controller 1730 includes a human body detection camera control unit 1722, an LCD drive unit 1723, a voice control circuit unit 724, a remaining card recognition input unit 1727, a card suction / discharge drive unit 1726, and a card detection input unit 1725. And an LED driving unit 1728 and a modem unit 1721.
- the human body detection camera control unit 1722 controls the operation of the human body detection cameras 1712 and 1713 based on a command from the unit controller 1730.
- the LCD drive unit 1723 controls the operation of the LCD 1719 based on a command from the unit controller 1730.
- the voice control circuit unit 1724 controls the operation of the microphones 1704 and 1705 and the speakers 1707 and 1708 based on a command from the unit controller 1730.
- the remaining card recognition input unit 1727 inputs a signal for determining the remaining number of IC cards 1500 accumulated in the card stacker 1714 by the remaining card recognition sensor 1717 to the unit controller 1730.
- the remaining card recognition sensor 1717 has a function of determining the remaining number of IC cards 1500 accumulated in the card stacker 1714 using, for example, an infrared detection mechanism (not shown).
- the card suction / discharge driving unit 1726 drives and controls the card suction / discharge mechanism 1716 based on a command from the unit controller 1730.
- the card suction / discharge mechanism 1716 has a mechanism for taking the IC card 1500 into the inside and a mechanism for discharging the IC card 1500 to the outside.
- the card detection input unit 1725 inputs a signal from the card detection sensor 1715 to the unit controller 1730.
- the card detection sensor 1715 acquires various data such as cash data and an identification code from the inserted IC card 1500.
- the LED drive unit 1728 performs drive control to turn on the LED 1709 based on a command from the unit controller 1730.
- the modem unit 1721 converts the high-frequency signal from the antenna 1701 into a signal that can be controlled by the unit controller 1730, while converting the signal from the unit controller 1730 into a signal that can be transmitted to the IC card 1500 via the antenna 1701.
- the unit controller 1730, the card suction / discharge drive unit 1726, the card detection input unit 1725, and the modem unit 1721 are also collectively referred to as a card unit control controller.
- a card unit control controller Electronic configuration of IC card
- the PTS terminal 1700 has a configuration shown in FIG. 17 in addition to the configuration shown in FIG. In FIG. 17, there are some parts that are the same as those shown in FIG. 16, and in this case, the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 16 are given.
- the PTS terminal 1700 includes a connection unit 1750 and a hard disk drive 1751 in addition to the configuration shown in FIG.
- the communication unit 1734 is connected to the communication interface of the slot machine 1010 on which the PTS terminal 1700 is mounted via a communication line, and is connected to the management server block 2820 via the communication line.
- the ROM 1733 stores a system program for controlling the operation of the PTS terminal 1700, exchange fee calculation value data, permanent data, and the like.
- the exchange fee calculation value data is data indicating the exchange fee calculation value P / 1-P (P is the exchange fee rate).
- the RAM 1732 temporarily stores exchange rate data indicating the exchange rate determined for each type other than the basic currency, in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency (US currency) and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency. To remember.
- the hard disk drive 1751 is an image of an image captured by a human body detection camera 1712 (1713) controlled by a player identification unit (human body detection camera 1712 (1713), microphone 1704 (1705), human body detection sensor 1115 (FIG. 4)). It is for storing data.
- the hard disk drive 1751 corresponds to the memory in the present invention.
- the CPU 1731 After the power is turned on and a predetermined activation process is performed, the CPU 1731 stores image data obtained by being imaged by the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) in the hard disk drive 1751. Image data is stored at predetermined time intervals (for example, at intervals of 0.5 seconds). Each image data is given a time (time stamp) stored in the hard disk drive 1751.
- the PTS terminal 1700 has a clock function, and performs time adjustment every time a predetermined period elapses. Time adjustment is performed by acquiring time data from a clock provided in the management server block 2820 or from the outside via the Internet.
- a predetermined amount for example, 100 MB
- the CPU 1731 erases the image data with the old time stamp in order. However, image data that is not set to be erasable is not erased.
- an IC card transport module 1253 and the like are connected to the connection unit 1750.
- the banknote discriminator 1022 may be provided in the PTS terminal 1700. In this case, as shown in FIG. 17, the bill validator 1022 is connected to the connecting portion 1750.
- the bill discriminator 1022 recognizes the suitability of bills (base currency) and accepts regular bills.
- the bill validator 1022 accepts a regular bill, it outputs an input signal to the CPU 1731 based on the amount of the bill. That is, the input signal includes information about the denomination data, money amount data, error data, and the like of the accepted banknote.
- the IC card transport module 1253 includes a sensor (such as an optical sensor) that detects the IC card 1500 inserted from the card insertion slot 1706 and a motor that transports the IC card to a predetermined position. When is inserted, the inserted state is detected by a sensor, the motor is driven, and the inserted IC card is pulled to a predetermined position. Further, the IC card transport module 1253 writes the credit information by rotating the motor in the reverse direction when the TAKE ⁇ WIN / COLLECT button 1032 (FIG. 9) is preliminarily operated by the player and the credit information is written to the IC card. The IC card is discharged from the card slot to the outside.
- a sensor such as an optical sensor
- the eject position sensor 1752 detects an IC card ejected from the IC card insertion slot 1706, and an optical sensor or the like is used.
- the load position sensor 1753 detects when an IC card is inserted from the IC card insertion slot 1706 to a predetermined position, and an optical sensor or the like is used.
- the IC card 1500 includes an antenna 1507, a power supply control circuit 1504, a modem circuit 1508, a display writing IC 1505, a display driver 1506, and a display unit 1510.
- the antenna 1507 transmits and receives various signals via the antenna 1701 included in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the power supply control circuit 1504 has a second booster circuit 1531 and a third booster circuit 1532 as shown in FIG.
- the second booster circuit 1531 boosts the signal from the antenna 1507 to a voltage that can be processed by a modem circuit 1508 described later.
- the third booster circuit 1532 boosts the voltage from the power source to a voltage for driving a display driver 1506 to be described later.
- the modulation / demodulation circuit 1508 includes a transmitter 1521 and a detection circuit 1522 as shown in FIG.
- the transmitter 1521 outputs a signal having a specific frequency and mixes it with a signal received from the antenna 1507, thereby converting the signal into a signal that can be processed by a display writing IC 1505 described later.
- the detection circuit 1522 detects the signal received from the antenna 1507.
- the display writing IC 1505 includes a CPU 1553, a credit data memory 1552, and a display controller 1551 as shown in FIG.
- the CPU 1553 executes a cash data rewrite update program to rewrite and update the cash data stored in the credit data memory 1552 based on the cash data acquired from the PTS terminal 1700.
- the CPU 1553 controls the display controller 1551 to use the cash data stored in the credit data memory 1552 as display data, and displays it on the display unit 1510 via the display driver 1506 described later.
- the credit data memory 1552 stores the above-described cash data rewrite update program, cash data, identification code, credit related data such as display cash data, and the like. Note that the credit-related data stored in the credit data memory 1552 is used for both calculation and display.
- the display controller 1551 acquires the display credit data stored in the credit data memory 1552 based on the CPU 1553 control signal, and displays it on the display unit 1510 via the display driver 1506.
- the IC card 1500 has a communication IC 1509.
- the communication IC 1509 includes a first booster circuit 1543, a transmitter 1546, a detection circuit 1545, a transmission control unit 1544, a CPU 1542, and an authentication memory 1541.
- the first booster circuit 1543 boosts the terminal-side authentication data acquired from the PTS terminal 1700 to a voltage that can be processed by a CPU 1542 described later.
- the transmitter 1546 outputs a signal having a specific frequency and mixes it with the signal received from the antenna 1507, thereby converting the signal into a signal that can be processed by the CPU 1542.
- the detection circuit 1522 detects the signal received from the antenna 1507.
- the CPU 1542 executes an authentication routine program, and when there is an authentication request from the PTS terminal 1700, transmits an identification code stored in an authentication memory 1541 described later to the PTS terminal 1700.
- the authentication memory 1541 stores an authentication routine program used by the CPU 1542 and an identification code.
- the IC card 1500 includes a credit data memory 1552 that stores various data in a rewritable manner, an antenna 1507 that performs data communication with the PTS terminal 1700, and a CPU 1542 that performs authentication by data communication with the PTS terminal 1700. If the authentication is appropriate, the CPU 1542 makes the credit related data stored in the credit data memory 1552 accessible by the PTS terminal 1700, and at least a part of the credit related data stored in the credit data memory 1552 is displayed. Display unit 1510.
- At least a part of the credit related data in the credit data memory 1552 is displayed on the display unit 1510, so that at least a part of the credit related data stored in the credit data memory 1552 is visually recognized from the outside. be able to. Therefore, when the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 is rewritten by the PTS terminal 1700, if the rewritten credit-related data is credit-related data displayed on the display unit 1510, the rewritten result is displayed. This can be confirmed by display on the display portion 1510.
- the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 rewritten by the PTS terminal 1700 is used for display on the display unit 1510, so that the credit-related data stored in the same credit data memory 1552 can be updated by the PTS terminal 1700. It is shared for display. As a result, the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 is transferred as display data to another storage unit, or the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 is updated and stored in the other storage unit as display data. Compared to the case where the data is displayed after the processing is executed, the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like at the time of data transfer is prevented. Therefore, the credit related data in the credit data memory 1552 is displayed with high reliability. Can be displayed.
- the credit data memory 1552 and the authentication memory 1541 store card-side authentication data and credit-related data as various data
- the CPU 1542 authenticates with the card-side authentication data
- the CPU 1542 The credit data can be accessed by the PTS terminal 1700, and the display unit 1510 displays the credit related data.
- the credit-related data stored in the credit data memory 1552 can be viewed from the outside by displaying the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 on the display unit 1510. Therefore, when the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 is rewritten by the PTS terminal 1700, if the rewritten credit-related data is credit-related data displayed on the display unit 1510, the rewritten result is displayed. This can be confirmed by display on the display portion 1510. Further, the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 rewritten by the PTS terminal 1700 is used for display on the display unit 1510, so that the credit-related data stored in the same credit data memory 1552 can be updated by the PTS terminal 1700. It is shared for display.
- the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 is transferred as display data to another storage unit, or the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 is updated and stored in the other storage unit as display data.
- the credit related data in the credit data memory 1552 is displayed with high reliability. Can be displayed.
- the display unit 1510 may be visible from the outside even when data communication is performed with the PTS terminal 1700.
- the updated data can be confirmed by the display of the display unit 1510. Therefore, the data of the IC card 1500 can always be confirmed during the game. You can get a sense of security. (Symbols, combinations, etc.)
- the symbols 1501 displayed on the pseudo reels 1151 to 1155 of the slot machine 1010 form a symbol row with a plurality of symbols 1501. As shown in FIG. 35, any symbol number from 0 to 19 or more is assigned to the symbol 1501 constituting each symbol column.
- Each symbol string is “WILD”, “FEATURE”, “A”, “Q”, “J”, “K”, “BAT”, “HAMMER”, “SWORD”, “RHINOCEROS”, “BUFFALO”, and A “DEER” symbol 1501 is combined.
- three consecutive symbols 1501 in the symbol row are displayed (arranged) in the uppermost, upper, lower and lowermost display areas of the pseudo reels 1151 to 1155, respectively.
- a symbol matrix of 5 columns and 4 rows is formed in the display window 1150.
- the symbols 1501 constituting the symbol matrix start scrolling when at least the start button 1046 is pressed and the game is started.
- the scrolling of each symbol 1501 is stopped (rearrangement).
- the winning combination means that a prize is established.
- the winning combination is a combination in which the combination of symbols 1501 stopped on the payline L is in an advantageous state for the player.
- the advantageous state includes a state in which coins corresponding to the winning combination are paid out, a state in which the number of coins to be paid out is added to credits, a state in which a bonus game is started, and the like.
- the winning combinations in the present embodiment are “WILD”, “FEATURE”, “A”, “Q”, “J”, “K”, “BAT”, “HAMMER”, “SWORD”, “RHINOCEROS”, “BUFFALO”. ”And“ DEER ”, at least one type of symbol 1501 is rearranged on the activated payline L by a predetermined number or more.
- a predetermined type of symbol 1501 is set as a scatter symbol, a winning combination is obtained when a predetermined number of symbols 1501 are rearranged regardless of whether the payline L is valid or invalid.
- FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the exchange server constituting the casino system according to the present embodiment.
- the exchange server 2862 includes a CPU 1901, a ROM 1902, a RAM 1903, a communication interface 1904, and a communication interface 1905.
- the communication interface 1904 is connected to the communication unit 1734 of the PTS terminal 1700 via a communication line.
- the communication interface 1905 is connected to the Internet 1015 via the communication line 1823.
- the ROM 1902 includes a system program for controlling the operation of the exchange server 2862, an exchange information acquisition program for acquiring the latest exchange information via the Internet 1015, permanent data, fee data indicating the exchange fee rate P, and the like. It is remembered.
- the RAM 1903 temporarily stores exchange information, exchange information after subtraction of fees, and the like.
- FIG. 20 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the megabucks server that configures the gaming system according to the present embodiment.
- the Megabucks server 1866 includes a CPU 1911, a ROM 1912, a RAM 1913, a communication interface 1914, an LED drive circuit 1917, a random number generator 1916, and a hard disk drive 1915 as a memory.
- the random number generator 1916 generates a random number at a predetermined timing.
- the communication interface 1914 is connected to the communication unit 1734 of the PTS terminal 1700 via a communication line, and is connected to a large common display 1921A, a large common display 1921B, a small common display installed in a casino store or the like via the communication line. 1922A and a small common display 1922B.
- the ROM 1912 stores a system program for controlling the operation of the progressive server 1866, permanent data, and the like.
- the RAM 1913 includes an EVENT TIME storage value data indicating an EVENT TIME storage value, a bonus storage value data indicating a bonus storage value, and an LED 1920 included in a connected light emission band provided for each slot machine 1010.
- the lighting number data indicating the number of lit LEDs 1920, data received from each slot machine 1010, and the like are temporarily stored.
- the hard disk drive 1915 stores light emission number determination table data indicating a plurality of types of light emission number determination tables (bending portion light emission number determination table and linear portion light emission number determination table).
- the hard disk drive 1915 stores point number determination table data that is referred to when determining the number of points in the common game.
- the hard disk drive 1915 stores data indicating a predetermined value and data indicating a specific value.
- a plurality of LEDs 1920 are connected to the LED drive circuit 1917.
- Each LED 1920 is assigned an identification number, and the LED drive circuit 1917 turns on and off the LED 1920 based on a signal received from the CPU 1911.
- FIG. 21 is a conceptual diagram showing a configuration example when a PTS terminal 1700 and a unit for exchange (IC card R / W 1931, LCD display unit 1932, controller 1933) are separately added to the slot machine 1010.
- IC card R / W 1931, LCD display unit 1932, controller 1933 IC card R / W 1931, LCD display unit 1932, controller 1933
- the exchange function can be used. Is.
- the bill validator line of the slot machine 1010 is bypassed, and the controller 1933 communicates with the bill validator and the management server block 2820 (FIG. 1) regarding the exchange.
- the controller 1933 transfers the exchange result to the motherboard 1070 (FIG. 15) of the slot machine 1010.
- FIG. 2 described as a configuration of the present embodiment is a conceptual diagram showing a configuration in which the exchange function is integrated with the PTS terminal 1700.
- a player identification unit human body detection camera 1712 (1713), microphone 1704 (1705), human body detection sensor 1115 (FIG. 12)
- the PTS terminal 1700 can add information related to authentication and information related to exchange using a dedicated line by using a communication line as an additional function while maintaining compatibility with the existing system.
- various information can be downloaded from the management server block 2820 (FIG. 1), and megabacks can be obtained through communication with the management server block 2820.
- services such as image recording and personal rescue for individual players in games can be provided.
- player identification information such as images and sounds in a player identification unit (human body detection camera 1712 (1713), microphone 1704 (1705), human body detection sensor 1115 (FIG. 12)). Is acquired (step S1111), and this information is transmitted to the member management server 1864 of the management server block 2820 (step S1112).
- the member management server 1864 identifies the player based on the received player identification information, and performs authentication based on the identification result (step S1113). If the authentication result indicates that the member is registered in advance, a download request is transmitted from the member management server 1864 to the download server 1863, for example, together with information specifying the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1114).
- unique service information is downloaded from the download server 1863 to the PTS terminal 1700 of the slot machine 1010 where the player plays (step S1115).
- the member management server 1864 sends information related to the player to the PTS terminal 1700 that has transmitted the information.
- useful information information on merchandise sales, information on theater performances, etc. is downloaded. This information is displayed on the LCD 1719 of the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1116).
- the PTS terminal 1700 is integrally provided, and the PTS terminal 1700 is provided with the LCD 1719 in front of the player in the posture of playing in the slot machine 1010.
- a human body detection camera 1712 (1713) that captures an image of the front and oblique faces of the player in the state where the player's posture is maintained is provided in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is provided with a microphone 1704 (1705) that collects sound, and a human body detection sensor 1115 that detects the player in the posture of the player is provided as a player identification unit.
- the player identification unit, the LCD 1719, and the card insertion slot 1706 are positioned at specific positions by the PTS panel 1105 (FIG. 11) in the PTS terminal 1700. As described above, this position corresponds to a natural posture when the player plays in the slot machine 1010. By integrating the PTS terminal 1700 having such a fixed positional relationship into the slot machine 1010, the player can be reliably recognized.
- the speakers 1707 and 1708 (FIG. 13) of the PTS terminal 1700 are provided on the back side of the LCD 1719. Sound effects and the like from the speakers 1707 and 1708 are output from the ducts 1707A and 1708A opened to the front side of the LCD 1719 to the front side.
- the PTS terminal 1700 can be further reduced in size because the speakers 1707 and 1708 can be provided on the back side, and the PTS terminal 1700 can be arranged in a limited PTS terminal arrangement area.
- FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure by the controller of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the controller of the PTS terminal 1700 executes information request processing in step S1122.
- player identification information human body detection camera 1712 (1713), microphone 1704 (1705), human body detection sensor 1115 provided in the PTS terminal 1700 is acquired, and based on this identification information.
- the management server block 2820 provides specific service information for the player.
- the controller acquires a face image for identifying the player by capturing the face of the player from the front (oblique) with the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) in the player identifying unit.
- the face image data is stored in the hard disk drive 1751 of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the controller collects the player's voice from the front (oblique) with the microphone 1704 (1705) of the player identification unit. In this case, the controller can reliably acquire the player's voice by performing a display for prompting the generation of the voice on the LCD 1719.
- This audio data is stored in the hard disk drive 1751 of the PTS terminal 1700.
- step S1122 is a process corresponding to the player identification information acquisition process (step S1111) shown in FIG.
- the controller transmits the acquired information to the management server block 2820 (FIG. 1), thereby authenticating with the member management server 1864 of the management server block 2820 and properly registering the player. If it is determined that there is, information significant to the player is downloaded to the PTS terminal 1700 from the download server 1863 or the like. This information is displayed on the LCD 1719.
- the controller moves the process to step S1123, and determines whether or not an IC card has been inserted into the card insertion slot 1706 (FIG. 12) of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the insertion of the IC card is detected by a sensor provided at the card insertion slot 1706.
- this sensor for example, it can be detected that the shutter has been moved by the IC card, or an optical sensor or the like can be used.
- step S1123 If an affirmative result is obtained in step S1123, this means that an IC card has been inserted, and the controller moves the process from step S1123 to step S1124, and the credit information written in the card Is used for games. That is, this credit information is stored in the RAM 1073 of the slot machine 1010 so that it can be used for a game, and a message to that effect is displayed on the credit number display section 1400 of the lower image display panel 1141 of the slot machine 1010.
- the controller moves to step S1125 after the process of step S1124 or when a negative result is obtained in step S1123, and checks the number of IC cards stocked in the stocker 1121 (FIG. 14).
- the number of IC cards stocked is the identification information unique to each IC card stocked by the IC card R / W (antenna 1701, modem unit 1721, etc. shown in FIG. 16) connected to the PTS terminal 1700. Can be realized by reading.
- the detection method of the number of stocks is not restricted to this, For example, it can also detect using an optical sensor etc.
- step S1125 When the check in step S1125 is completed, the controller moves the process to step S1126 and determines whether or not the number of stocks detected in step S1125 is zero. If the remaining number is 0, the controller moves the process from step S1126 to step S1133 and stops the game. Thereby, the situation where the game result which should be written in the said IC card in the state without an IC card is obtained can be avoided.
- step S1126 if a negative result is obtained in step S1126, this means that the number of stocks is one or more, and the controller moves the process from step S1126 to step S1127, and the remaining number of stocks is one. Judge whether or not there are 5 sheets. If an affirmative result is obtained here, this means that the remaining number of stocks is 1 to 5, and the controller shifts the processing from step S1127 to step S1128 to cause the LED to emit yellow light. . Thereby, it is possible to appeal to the staff of the casino store that the remaining number of IC card stocks is low. Note that the mode for emitting light according to the remaining number of IC cards is stored in the RAM 1732 (FIGS. 16 and 17) as a table as shown in FIG.
- step S1127 if a negative result is obtained in step S1127, this means that the remaining number of stocks is not less than 5, and the controller moves the process from step S1127 to step S1129, and stores the stock number. It is determined whether the remaining number is 6 to 24. If a positive result is obtained here, this means that the remaining number is 6 to 24, and the controller shifts the processing from step S1129 to step S1130 to cause the LED to emit blue light. . Thereby, it is possible to appeal to the staff of the casino store that the stock number of IC cards remains in a sufficient range.
- step S1129 if a negative result is obtained in step S1129, this means that the remaining number of stocks is not 6 to 24 (that is, not less than 24), and the controller The processing moves from S1129 to step S1131, and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of stocks is 25 to 29. If a positive result is obtained here, this means that the remaining number is 25 to 29, and the controller shifts the processing from step S1131 to step S1132, and causes the LED to emit green light. . Thereby, it is possible to appeal to the staff of the casino store that the number of stocked IC cards is almost full.
- step S1131 if a negative result is obtained in step S1131, this means that the number of stocks is 30 (full state), and the controller moves the process from step S1131 to step S1133. Stop the game. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the IC card is inserted into the card insertion slot 1706 by a new player when the IC card is full.
- step S1128 After the process of step S1128, step S1130, step S1132, or step S1133, the controller moves the process to step S1134, determines whether or not the game of the slot machine 1010 has ended, and if the game has not ended. Returns the process to step S21 described above and repeats the same process.
- the controller moves the process from step S1134 to step S1135, and at this time, the IC card or IC card inserted from the card insertion slot 1706 by the player is inserted. If not, the payout generated as a result of the game is written as credit information to the IC card stocked in the card stocker 1121.
- step S1136 the controller controls the IC card transport module 1253 (FIG. 17) to discharge the IC card on which the credit information is written from the card insertion slot 1706.
- the controller controls the IC card transport module 1253 (FIG. 17) to discharge the IC card on which the credit information is written from the card insertion slot 1706.
- the player can be alerted by emitting light according to the light emission mode (flashing or the like).
- the LED may always emit light in a specific manner.
- the IC card is stopped (pulled back) to prevent a person other than the player from taking away the IC card. be able to.
- the management server block 2820 (FIG. 1) can provide meaningful information for the player playing in the slot machine 1010 at this time, and the IC card card stocker 1121 ( From the outside of the PTS terminal 1700 (slot machine 1010) by causing the LED 1709 provided in the vicinity of the card insertion slot 1706 (FIG. 12) to emit light according to the remaining number of IC cards stocked in FIG. 8).
- the remaining number of stocked IC cards can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.
- the staff of the casino store can easily and reliably grasp the number of IC cards remaining in the card stocker 1121 without opening the slot machine 1010 and confirming it.
- the human body detection camera 1712 (1713), the microphone 1704 (1705), and the human body detection sensor that acquire information for identifying the player.
- 1115, LCD 1719, card insertion slot 1706, and other units are integrally provided at predetermined positions, so that the player can be identified with sufficient accuracy by the positional relationship of these integrated units. .
- the player when the player sits in front of the slot machine 1010, the player faces the PTS terminal 1700 provided below the lower image display panel 1141 of the slot machine 1010. In this state, the LCD 1719 provided in the center of the front surface of the PTS terminal 1700 is located in front of the player. Thus, the player can view the LCD 1719 without changing the attitude of playing the slot machine 1010.
- a human body detection camera 1712 (1713) and a microphone 1704 (1705) are provided above the LCD 1719.
- the face of the player playing in the slot machine 1010 is imaged from the front, and the sound of the player is collected from the front. can do.
- a card insertion slot 1706 is provided on the right side of the LCD 1719.
- the player can insert and remove the IC card with respect to the card insertion slot 1706 with the right hand without changing the posture of playing the slot machine 1010.
- the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) and the microphone 1704 (1705) are provided above the card insertion slot 1706, the player's face playing on the slot machine 1010 is imaged obliquely and the player's voice is recorded. Can be collected from an angle.
- Pieces of information are compared with player data registered in advance in the member management server 1864 of the management server block 2820.
- each unit of the PTS terminal 1700 installed at a predetermined angle is securely attached at a predetermined position by the PTS panel 1105 (FIG. 11), so that the camera or the An authentication error resulting from an error in the mounting position of a unit for identifying a player such as a microphone can be prevented in advance.
- the speakers 1707 and 1708 are arranged on the back side of the LCD 1719, and the output sound from the speakers 1707 and 1708 is output from the ducts 1707A and 1708A provided on both sides of the LCD 1719. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the mounting area of the speakers 1707 and 1708, which require a relatively large area, in the front part of the PTS terminal 1700, and the area of the front part of the PTS terminal 1700 can be reduced accordingly. Further, since the mounting area of the speakers 1707 and 1708 is not necessary on the front portion of the PTS terminal 1700, the area can be used for mounting other units.
- the number of IC cards remaining in the card stocker 1121 can be grasped from the outside by the light emission mode of the LED 1709 provided in front of the PTS terminal 1700. Can do. As a result, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the absence of the IC card of the card stocker 1121 during the game.
- FIG. 25 is a subroutine for executing processing related to the IC card.
- the IC card is inserted from the card insertion slot 1706 by the player's operation.
- the IC card inserted into the card insertion slot 1706 is a position where the IC card can be read and written by driving the IC card transport motor of the IC card transport module 1253 (FIG. 14) (hereinafter referred to as a load position). Loaded up to. Further, the IC card can be conveyed to the position of the stacker 1121 by driving the motor.
- the normal stacker is for accommodating the initialized IC card.
- the PTS terminal 1700 is electrically connected to the slot machine 1010.
- a signal indicating that the PTS terminal 1700 has been operated is supplied to the PTS terminal 1700.
- the PTS terminal 1700 receives this signal, the IC card is transported from the normal stacker to the load position by the retracting motor.
- the player stores amount information indicating the amount corresponding to the number of credits remaining as a result of playing the game so far, and transports it to the eject position.
- the eject position is a position where a part of the IC card is exposed or protrudes from the card insertion slot 1706. By doing so, the player can pick up the IC card by pinching the portion exposed or protruded from the card insertion slot 1706.
- the alert stacker is for accommodating the IC card that is the target of the alert when a predetermined alert condition is satisfied.
- the alert condition is that the player has not taken out the IC card from the card insertion slot 1706 even after a predetermined time has passed since the IC card was transported to the eject position.
- this alert condition is satisfied, the IC card is transported from the eject position to the alert stacker by driving the motor, and is accommodated in the alert stacker.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the IC card is present at the load position (step S1511). This determination process is performed based on whether or not a detection signal is issued from a sensor provided at the load position of the IC card.
- the sensor may be any sensor that can detect the presence of an IC card and output a detection signal, such as an optical sensor or a mechanical sensor. It can be determined whether or not the IC card is set at the load position in a readable / writable state based on the presence or absence of the detection signal.
- an IC card R / W reader / writer
- an IC card an antenna 1701, a modem unit 1721, etc., which will be described later in FIG. 16
- information can be written to the IC card or read from the IC card via the reader / writer.
- this subroutine is immediately terminated.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the authentication is successful (step S1513).
- the authentication is a process for reading out unique information of the IC card and determining whether the card can be processed by the PTS terminal 1700. By doing so, it is possible to confirm that a card unrelated to the PTS terminal 1700 is not set. Further, when the user ID is stored in the IC card, it is possible to determine whether or not the IC card is a legitimate IC card issued at the store by determining the contents of the user ID. If it is determined that authentication has failed (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.
- the CPU 1731 determines that the authentication has been successful, it reads the card ID stored in the IC card (step S1515).
- the card ID is information for identifying the IC card, and a serial number or the like can be used.
- the CPU 1731 calls and executes a credit conversion processing subroutine shown in FIG. 31 described later (step S1517).
- the CPU 1731 allows the player to take TAKE of the slot machine 1010. It is determined whether or not the WIN / COLLECT button 1032 has been operated (step S1525). When it is determined that the player has not operated the TAKE WIN / COLLECT button 1032 of the slot machine 1010 (NO), the process returns to step S1525. As described above, when the determination process in step S1525 is repeatedly performed, the game is advanced in the slot machine 1010 according to the operation of the player. During this time, in the slot machine 1010, the number of credits is changed according to the progress of the game.
- step S1525 the CPU 1731 determines that the TAKE of the slot machine 1010
- a timer (not shown) of the PTS terminal 1700 is started (step S1527). This timer may be configured by hardware or may be configured by software.
- the CPU 1731 takes a human image of the player with the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) provided in the PTS terminal 1700 and stores the data image data in the hard disk drive 1751 of the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1529). . By doing so, it is possible to record the person image of the player.
- the CPU 1731 receives the number of credits transmitted from the slot machine 1010 (step S1533), converts the received number of credits into amount information (step S1535), and converts the converted amount information together with the card ID of the IC card. It transmits to the external control device 1621 (step S1537). In the external control device 1621, the transmitted amount information is stored in the storage device of the external control device 1621 in association with the card ID.
- the number of credits stored in the RAM 1073 of the slot machine 1010 at that time is It is transmitted to the PTS terminal 1700, and money amount information corresponding to the number of credits can be stored in the storage device of the external control device 1621. In this way, the amount information managed by the external control device 1621 can be updated to the latest one. Note that each time the game of the slot machine 1010 progresses, the number of credits may be transmitted from the slot machine 1010 to the PTS terminal 1700.
- step S1535 the CPU 1731 stores the converted amount information in the IC card (step S1539), and prints the amount information on the surface of the IC card (step S1541).
- character information can be printed in a changeable manner by using E-INK, memory-type liquid crystal, or electronic paper.
- a reader / writer with a storage area inside the IC card but also a printing mechanism for printing on the surface of the IC card is provided.
- the CPU 1731 reads out and executes a subroutine for executing the mini game 1 shown in FIG. 27, which will be described later, or a subroutine for executing the mini game 2 shown in FIG. 33 (step S1543). Is read out and executed (step S1545), and this subroutine is terminated.
- step S1543 it may be determined that only one of the mini game 1 and the mini game 2 is always executed, or one can be selectively executed. In the case of selective execution, it may be determined that one game is called by lottery processing.
- FIG. 26 is a subroutine for executing processing when the IC card is conveyed from the load position to the eject position and ejected.
- the CPU 1731 drives a motor for transporting the IC card (step S1561).
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not an IC card is present in the card insertion slot 1706, that is, whether or not an IC card is present at the eject position (step S1563).
- the card insertion slot 1706 is provided with a sensor for detecting an IC card.
- the determination processing in step S1563 is determined based on whether a detection signal is issued from this sensor.
- the sensor may be any sensor that can detect the presence of an IC card and output a detection signal, such as an optical sensor or a mechanical sensor. Whether or not the IC card is set in the card insertion slot 1706 (eject position) can be determined based on the presence or absence of the detection signal.
- step S1527 determines whether or not an IC card is present in the card insertion slot 1706 (YES).
- a predetermined time for example, 5 seconds or longer? It is determined whether or not (step S1565).
- the predetermined time may be determined based on the time required for the player to take out the IC card after the IC card is conveyed to the card insertion slot 1706. If it is determined that the timer value is less than the predetermined time (YES), the process returns to step S1563.
- step S1565 when it is determined in step S1565 that the timer value is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the CPU 1731 stops the timer (step S1567) and transmits an alert signal to the external control device 1621 (so-called hall server) ( Step S1569).
- the external control device 1621 so-called hall server
- Step S1569 it is possible to notify the external control device 1621 that the slot machine 1010 may have forgotten to take the IC card.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not an output signal is issued from the human body detection sensor (step S1571).
- the human body detection sensor is used to determine whether or not a player is present in front of the slot machine 1010.
- the human body detection sensor generally includes a human body detection sensor 1115, a reflection type photo interrupter using an optical sensor, or the like, and whether or not a person is generally present in front of the slot machine 1010. Any device can be used as long as it can be detected.
- the human body detection sensor emits a detection signal when it detects that a human body is present.
- step S1571 When the CPU 1731 determines in the determination process of step S1571 that an output signal is issued from the human body detection sensor (YES), that is, when it is determined that a player exists before the slot machine 1010, the PTS terminal An alert is displayed on the LCD 1719 of 1700 (step S1573), and an alert sound is output from the speakers 1707 and 1708 of the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1575).
- This alert display and alert sound output are performed for a player who has played a game in the slot machine 1010, and the player recognizes that the IC card may be forgotten, and the IC card. This is for urging the player to take out.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not an IC card is present at the card insertion slot 1706, that is, whether or not an IC card is present at the eject position (step S1577). This determination is similar to the determination processing in step S1563 described above. Judgment is made based on whether or not a detection signal is issued from a sensor provided in the card insertion slot 1706.
- step S1579 determines whether or not a detection signal is issued from the human body detection sensor.
- the determination process in step S1579 is the same process as in step S1571 described above. If it is determined that a detection signal is issued from the human body detection sensor (YES), the process returns to step S1577. That is, since there is a player in front of the slot machine 1010, an IC card may be forgotten by displaying an alert or outputting an alert sound to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the IC card should be taken out.
- the CPU 1731 determines that the IC card is not present in the card insertion slot 1706, that is, the IC card is not present at the eject position (NO) in the determination processing in step S1577 described above, it is confirmed that the alert has been resolved.
- the alert cancellation signal shown is transmitted to the external control device 1621 (step S1585).
- the alert condition Can be notified to the external control device 1621 by transmitting an alert solution signal to the external control device 1621.
- step S1585 After executing the process of step S1585, the CPU 1731 deletes the alert display displayed in the process of step S1585 (step S1587) and stops the alert sound generated in the process of step S1575 (step S1589). Next, the CPU 1731 ends the recording of the person image of the player started in step S1529 of FIG. 25 (step S1591), and ends this subroutine.
- the CPU 1731 determines that the IC card is not present in the card insertion slot 1706 in the determination processing in step S1563 described above (NO), that is, the player does not output an alert display or alert sound, Is taken out from the card insertion slot 1706, the timer activated in step S1527 is stopped (step S1593), and the process proceeds to step S1591 described above.
- step S1579 determines in the determination process of step S1579 that the detection signal is not issued from the human body detection sensor (NO)
- the alert display displayed in the process of step S1573 is erased (step S1581).
- the alert sound generated in the process of step S1575 is stopped (step S1583).
- the alert display is stopped and the alert is displayed. Stop sound output.
- step S1571 When the CPU 1731 determines that the output signal is not issued from the human body detection sensor in the determination process of step S1571 described above (NO), that is, when it is determined that there is no player before the slot machine 1010, Alternatively, when the process of step S1583 described above is executed, an alert is displayed on the LCD 1719 of the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1595), an alert sound is output from the speakers 1707 and 1708 of the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1597), and an alert signal is output. It transmits to the external control device 1621 (so-called hall server) (step S1599).
- the external control device 1621 so-called hall server
- steps S1595, S1597, and S1599 are processes executed when it is determined in the determination processes in steps S1571 and S1579 that there is no player in front of the slot machine 1010. That is, the processes in steps S1595, S1597, and S1599 are not for the player to recognize that they have forgotten to take the IC card, but for the store where the slot machine 1010 is installed. Therefore, it is preferable that the alert display, the alert sound, and the like are different from those in the processes in steps S1573 and S1575. By doing so, it is possible to accurately notify the store clerk that there is a slot machine 1010 in which the IC card has been forgotten to be removed. With these alert displays and alert sounds, the store clerk can immediately rush to the slot machine 1010. It can respond quickly.
- the fact that the IC card has been forgotten can be managed by storing in the external control device 1621 the date and time when the alert signal for the processing in step S1599 was issued and the identification information of the slot machine 1010. When the player contacts the store at a later date, it is possible to respond accurately.
- the CPU 1731 drives the motor for retracting the IC card to store the IC card from the eject position into the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1601).
- the IC card in an alert stacker.
- the alert stacker is for accommodating the IC card that is the target of the alert when a predetermined alert condition is satisfied. This alert condition is that the player did not remove the IC card from the card insertion slot 1706 (step S1571 or step S1561) even after a predetermined time has passed since the IC card was transported to the eject position (step S1561) (step S1565). S1575).
- the IC card is transported from the eject position to the alert stacker by being driven by the processing of step S1601, and accommodated in the alert stacker.
- the IC card is once transported to the loading position before being stored in the alert stacker in order to execute processing for writing alert occurrence information to the IC card and reading the card ID of the IC card. And after performing these processes, it is preferable to accommodate an IC card in the alert stacker.
- step S1601 After executing the process of step S1601, the CPU 1731 ends the recording of the player's person image started in the process of step S1529 in FIG. 25 (step S1603), once transports the IC card to the load position, and alert conditions The alert occurrence information indicating that the above is satisfied is written in the IC card (step S1605). In this way, it is possible to identify that the IC card has been forgotten.
- the CPU 1731 reads the card ID of the IC card (step S1607), associates the read card ID with the recorded data of the recorded person image, and stores it in the hard disk drive 1751 of the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1609). ), This subroutine is terminated.
- FIG. 28 shows a table of card IDs and person image recording data stored in the hard disk drive 1751 of the PTS terminal 1700 by the processing of step S1609.
- the table shown in FIG. 28 conceptually shows data stored in the hard disk drive 1751 of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the card ID is “001245”, and any information that can identify the card ID may be used. For example, a serial number of the card ID or an identification number assigned at the store may be used.
- the recorded data is, for example, moving image data, and various formats for moving image data that can be stored in the hard disk drive 1751 can be used. In the example shown in FIG. 28, the recorded data is “090715-131213-0012.avi”, which is a file name to be stored in the hard disk drive 1751.
- the card ID and the person are inquired when the player later asks the store about forgetting to take the IC card.
- the IC card can be returned to the original player quickly and accurately.
- step S1571 in FIG. 26 if a player is present by the human body detection sensor, first, as a first-stage alert, an alert display for the player or an alert sound is generated. Even when such an alert display or alert sound is used, if the player does not recognize that the IC card has been forgotten and leaves the slot machine 1010 without removing the IC card, a store alert is provided as a second stage alert. Display and alert sound.
- the player is made to actively recognize that the IC card has been forgotten, and when the player does not recognize it, the player switches to an alert for the store so that the other player can receive the credit. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities such as obtaining.
- an alert determination table in which the type of alert is predetermined according to the amount indicated by the amount information is stored in the ROM 1733 of the PTS terminal 1700.
- the type of alert includes the content of the message, the size, color, and blinking of the message as the type of alert displayed on the LCD 1719.
- the types of audio alerts output from the speakers 1707 and 1708 there are music, warning sounds, loudness and height of sounds, and the like.
- the alert determination table is searched using the amount indicated by the amount information stored in the IC card, and the type of alert is determined according to the amount indicated by the amount information. If the IC card is left in the card insertion slot 1706 even though the amount indicated by the amount information is large, the IC card may simply be misplaced, so it is desirable that the alert be easily recognized by the player. . Note that this processing may be performed using the number of credits instead of the amount indicated by the amount information.
- the determination as to whether or not the player is present by the human body detection sensor may be performed not only once but multiple times or over a predetermined time. Since the player is preparing for the return trip and preparing to move the slot machine 1010, there is a possibility that the player is crouching or changing his / her posture. By going over time, it is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a player.
- FIG. 27 is a subroutine for executing the mini game 1 that is called and executed in the process of step S1543 of FIG. 25 described above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the mini game 1 is executed in the PTS terminal 1700.
- banknotes of different denominations can be exchanged for game credits. That is, by inserting a bill into the bill validator 1022 of the slot machine 1010, the amount indicated by the bill can be exchanged for the number of credits at the PTS terminal 1700.
- the number of credits is exchanged by the following processing.
- the denomination of the bill is determined. For example, it is determined whether or not the inserted bill is Hong Kong dollar.
- the bill validator 1022 of the slot machine 1010 is configured so that bills of different denominations can be inserted.
- the denomination of the inserted banknote is a specific type, it is immediately exchanged for the number of credits corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote based on a predetermined conversion standard (using a conversion formula or the like). For example, when the inserted banknote is Hong Kong dollar, it is exchanged as it is for the number of credits corresponding to the amount determined for the banknote.
- the amount of the inserted banknote is temporarily converted into a specific denomination according to the rate at that time. For example, US dollars and yen are converted to Hong Kong dollars. By storing the rate at that time in the RAM 1732 of the PTS terminal 1700 for each denomination, it is possible to convert the rate to a specific denomination.
- the amount converted into a specific denomination is exchanged for the number of credits according to the above-mentioned predetermined conversion standard (using a conversion formula or the like). For example, when the denomination of the inserted banknote is US dollar or yen, first, the amount determined for the banknote is converted into Hong Kong dollar. Next, the converted amount is exchanged for the number of credits.
- the converted amount when the amount is converted to a different denomination, the converted amount may be rounded depending on the rate. In this way, even if a fraction occurs in the converted amount, the converted amount is stored in the IC card so that the player is not disadvantaged by the conversion.
- FIG. 31 is a process executed by the PTS terminal 1700, and a subroutine for converting the money amount and the number of credits into different denominations according to the denomination of the bill inserted into the bill validator 1022 of the slot machine 1010. It is a flowchart to show. This subroutine is called and executed when it is detected that a bill is inserted into the bill validator 1022.
- the CPU 1731 determines the denomination of the bill inserted into the bill validator 1022 of the slot machine 1010 (step S1671). This determination process is performed based on denomination data representing a denomination output from the bill validator 1022.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the inserted banknote is a specific denomination (step S1673). When determining that the inserted banknote is not a specific denomination (NO), the CPU 1731 reads the rate stored in the RAM 1732 of the PTS terminal 1700 according to the denomination (step S1675). Next, the CPU 1731 converts the amount of the inserted bill into the amount of a specific denomination using the read rate (step S ⁇ b> 1677).
- the CPU 1731 When determining that the inserted banknote is not a specific denomination (NO) or executing the process of step S1677 in the determination process of step S1673 described above, the CPU 1731 causes the LCD 1719 to display the language according to the denomination. In addition to displaying, audio is output from the speakers 1707 and 1708 in a language corresponding to the denomination. Display data and audio data corresponding to the denomination are stored in advance in the ROM 1733 (FIG. 16) of the PTS terminal 1700. Thereby, display and audio
- the CPU 1731 determines the number of credits from the amount indicated by the inserted banknote or the amount converted by the processing in step S1677 and the rate according to the denomination (step S1679). Finally, the CPU 1731 writes the amount of money on the IC card (step S1681), and ends this subroutine.
- the rate is stored in the RAM 1732 of the PTS terminal 1700 so that it can be updated to the latest one at regular intervals or regular intervals, for example.
- the latest rate value is preferably transmitted from the external control device 1621 to the PTS terminal 1700.
- FIG. 32 shows an example of a screen displayed on the LCD 1719 of the PTS terminal 1700 when a bill is inserted into the bill validator 1022 of the slot machine 1010.
- FIG. 32A shows a screen displayed before the banknote is inserted, and a Chinese message is displayed on the upper side of the screen. Also, at the bottom of the screen, the rate of each denomination when exchanged for Hong Kong dollars is displayed. In this way, each rate is set to 4 digits after the decimal point so as not to be detrimental to the player by denomination conversion.
- FIG. 32B is a screen displayed when a US banknote is inserted. It is determined that a US bill has been inserted into the bill validator 1022, and an English message is displayed on the upper side of the screen.
- each rate corresponding to the denomination is defined to 4 digits after the decimal point. For this reason, if conversion is performed by the arithmetic processing of the CPU 1731 of the PTS terminal 1700, it can be exchanged accurately, so there is no disadvantage or give to the player.
- what is displayed on the LCD 1719 including the generated fraction is preferable. In particular, it is preferable to display on the LCD 1719 when the mini game is executed by the process of step S1625 described later. By doing so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the mini game is to be executed when the fraction occurs.
- the CPU 1731 reads money amount information from the IC card set at the load position (step S1621).
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the amount indicated by the read amount information is equal to or less than a predetermined number, for example, equal to or less than a number corresponding to the minimum settlement unit of 1 dollar (step S1623). When it is determined that the amount indicated by the read amount information is greater than the predetermined number (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.
- the CPU 1731 executes a mini game on the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1625).
- the mini game preferably uses the LCD 1719 of the PTS terminal 1700.
- a mini game is executed in which one card is selected from two cards. When the player selects a card with a large number of the two cards, it is determined that the player has won, and the amount indicated by the read amount information ⁇ 120% is set as new amount information, as will be described later. However, if you select a card with a small number, you lose.
- the IC card is accommodated in the PTS terminal 1700 without being ejected from the card insertion slot 1706.
- the card selection can be processed using a signal issued from the touch panel 1719A when the player pushes the touch panel 1719A.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the mini game executed in step S1625 has been won (step S1627). When it is determined that the CPU 1731 has lost the mini game (NO), as described above, the IC card is accommodated in the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1639), and this subroutine is terminated. In this way, when the amount indicated by the amount information is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the card is not discharged from the card insertion slot 1706.
- step S1627 when the CPU 1731 determines that the mini game has been won in the determination process of step S1627 (YES), the CPU 1731 performs an arithmetic process of (amount indicated by the read amount information) ⁇ 120% to increase the amount (step S1629).
- the CPU 1731 writes the amount information corresponding to the increased amount to the IC card (step S1631), and transmits the amount information corresponding to the increased amount to the external control device 1621 together with the card ID of the IC card (step S1633). ).
- the transmitted amount information is stored in the storage device of the external control device 1621 in association with the card ID.
- the CPU 1731 converts the amount information into the number of credits (step S1635), transmits the converted number of credits to the slot machine 1010 (step S1637), and ends this subroutine. In this way, a player who has been able to increase the number of credits by playing a mini game can continue to play the game. If the game is not continued even if the number of credits is increased by playing a mini game, the game can be ended by operating the TAKE WIN / COLLECT button 1032 of the slot machine 1010.
- the IC card is allowed to be accommodated inside the PTS terminal 1700. By doing so, the IC card is not left in the card insertion slot 1706, and the labor and labor of the store clerk can be reduced. Further, since the IC card is accommodated in the PTS terminal 1700, the next player can immediately start a game in the slot machine 1010 without waiting, and the operating rate of the slot machine 1010 can be increased. it can.
- the IC card when the IC card is ejected from the PTS terminal 1700 even though only a small amount remains on the IC card, and the player removes the IC card, only a small amount remains, so the player , The IC card does not feel value and may be discarded. Thus, when the IC card is discarded by the player, the number of IC cards that can be used in the store is reduced. For this reason, the store has to purchase a new IC card in order to replenish the IC card. However, when the mini game is executed and the game is lost, the IC card is accommodated in the PTS terminal 1700, so that the store can accurately collect the usable IC card. Thus, by using the collected IC card again in the store, the cost required for the IC card can be reduced.
- the value of the IC card can be increased, and the player can be positively recognized for the presence of the IC card to prevent forgetting to remove it.
- FIG. 29 is a subroutine for initializing the IC card that is the target of the alert and newly replenishing the normal stacker. This process is called and executed in the slot machine 1010 when the game has not been played for a predetermined time or longer, for example, 10 minutes or longer. In this way, it is possible to execute the IC card initialization and replenishment processing without interfering with the game played in the slot machine 1010.
- the CPU 1731 transports the IC card accommodated in the alert stacker to the loading position, and reads the type of alert and the date and time when the alert was issued from the IC card (step S1651). As described above, the IC card accommodated in the alert stacker is the target of the alert.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the type of alert for which the IC card has been alerted is due to forgetting to remove the IC card (step S1653). If the type of alert is not due to forgetting to remove the IC card (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.
- the alert regarding the IC card may be due to other reasons, but in this IC card initialization / replenishment process, only the player left the IC card in the card insertion slot 1706 is targeted. This is because other alerts may be inappropriate for initializing and reusing IC cards. For example, this is to eliminate a case where there is a possibility that the IC card has a hardware failure.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not a predetermined period, for example, one month has passed, from the date and time when the alert is targeted. (Step S1655). When it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed from the date and time when the alert is issued (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated. If the predetermined period has not elapsed, the player may make an inquiry about the IC card that has been forgotten. Therefore, the IC card may be initialized after the predetermined period elapses. preferable.
- FIG. 30 is a table showing an example of information stored in the predetermined storage area of the IC card in the predetermined storage area of the IC card.
- the IC card stores a card ID (identification information described above), money amount information, alert type, alert date and time, gaming machine identification number, and the like.
- the IC card can be initialized by deleting information other than the card ID. Thus, by initializing the IC card, the IC card can be reused in the store.
- the CPU 1731 transports the IC card from the load position to the normal stacker, and replenishes the normal stacker as a new IC card (step S1659).
- the store can replenish the IC card without purchasing a new IC card, so that the cost required for the IC card can also be reduced.
- the IC card can be replenished without opening the slot machine 1010, safety can be improved and the IC card replenishment work can be prevented from becoming complicated.
- FIG. 33 is a subroutine for executing the mini game 2 that is called and executed in the process of step S1543 of FIG. 25 described above. Similar to the mini game 2 and the mini game 1, it is executed in the PTS terminal 1700. Note that the same reference numerals are assigned to the steps for performing the same processing as in the mini game 1 shown in FIG.
- the CPU 1731 determines that the player takes TAKE of the slot machine 1010. It is determined whether or not the WIN / COLLECT button 1032 has been operated (step S1691). When it is determined that the player has not operated the TAKE WIN / COLLECT button 1032 of the slot machine 1010 (NO), this subroutine is immediately terminated.
- step S1525 the CPU 1731 determines that the TAKE of the slot machine 1010 When it is determined that the WIN / COLLECT button 1032 has been operated (YES), the number of credits transmitted from the slot machine 1010 is received (step S1693). Next, the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the received credit number is less than a predetermined value (step S1695). When the CPU 1731 determines that the received credit number is equal to or greater than the predetermined value (NO), the CPU 1731 immediately ends this subroutine.
- step S1697 the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the player has selected a mini game. If the CPU 1731 determines that the player has selected the mini game (YES), it moves the process to step S1625.
- the processing from step S1625 to step S1709 shown in FIG. 33 is the same processing as the mini game 1 shown in FIG. Note that the determination processing in step S1699 can be performed using a signal emitted from the touch panel 1719A when the player pushes the touch panel 1719A.
- the CPU 1731 converts the number of credits transmitted from the slot machine 1010 into an amount in step S1693 and generates amount information (step S1701). ).
- the CPU 1731 writes money amount information to the IC card (step S1703), transmits the money amount information together with the card ID to the external control device 1621 (step S1705), and drives the IC card transport motor to perform the IC card.
- the card is conveyed to the eject position (step S1707), and this subroutine is terminated.
- the money amount information is stored in the IC card and returned to the player. By doing so, cash is returned to the player even if it is a small amount, so there is no disadvantage to the player.
- the predetermined value used in the determination process in step S1695 described above is preferably set for each slot machine 1010.
- a configuration in which a predetermined value setting change switch is connected to the connection unit 1750 of the PTS terminal 1700 is preferable. By doing so, the predetermined value can be changed and determined by operating the predetermined value setting change switch.
- this predetermined value is set high. By doing so, the remaining amount of the IC card can be increased to some extent, so even a high-roller gaming machine player can reduce the possibility of discarding the IC card.
- FIG. 34 is a credit conversion processing subroutine that is called and executed in the processing of step S1517 of FIG. 25 described above.
- the CPU 1731 transmits the card ID read from the IC card to the external control device 1621 (step S1721).
- the external control device 1621 receives the card ID, reads the amount information corresponding to the card ID, and transmits it to the PTS terminal 1700 that transmitted the card ID.
- the external control device 1621 searches the amount information associated with the card ID using the card ID, and the amount information associated with the card ID is stored in the storage device of the external control device 1621. It is determined whether or not it is stored. When the amount information associated with the card ID is stored, the amount information is transmitted to the PTS terminal 1700. On the other hand, when the amount information is not stored, information indicating that the amount information is not stored is transmitted to the PTS terminal 1700.
- a plurality of slot machines 1010 are installed in the store.
- a player often plays a game while changing the slot machine 1010 and searches for a slot machine 1010 that he / she likes. For this reason, when a game is played on another slot machine 1010 after a game is played on one slot machine 1010, when the game is played on one slot machine 1010, the amount information at that time is externally controlled. It is already stored in the storage device of the device 1621. For this reason, when a game is played in another slot machine 1010, the amount information stored in the storage device of the external control device 1621 is called by the other slot machine 1010, so that the amount information is displayed by the external control device 1621. It can be managed accurately and fraud can be prevented.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not there is money amount information in the external control device 1621 (step S1723).
- the CPU 1731 determines that the amount information exists in the external control device 1621 (YES)
- the CPU 1731 receives the amount information transmitted from the external control device 1621 (step S1725).
- the CPU 1731 determines that the amount information does not exist in the external control device 1621 (NO)
- the CPU 1731 reads the amount information stored in the IC card (step S2917).
- Denomination means the minimum unit of betting for one game.
- the denomination in the present embodiment is preferably a denomination of currency value.
- denomination of the currency value for example, one credit in the gaming machine can be 0.001 Hong Kong dollar, 0.01 Hong Kong dollar, 0.1 Hong Kong dollar, etc.
- denomination for each gaming machine a different minimum wager and game unit price can be set for each gaming machine.
- the player can select a gaming machine according to the player's amount of money, etc. so that the player can enjoy the game for a long time with a small wager, or aim for a thousand dollars with a large amount of wager. I can enjoy it.
- the denomination is determined by the external control device 1621, and the determined denomination is preferably transmitted from the external control device 1621 to the slot machine 1010 and stored in the RAM 1073 of the slot machine 1010.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not all the amount indicated by the amount information received in the process of step S1725 or all the amount indicated by the amount information read from the card ID in the process of step S1727 can be converted into credits. Judgment is made (step S1731). When an amount that cannot be converted into credit is included (NO), that is, when a fraction occurs in credit units, the maximum amount that can be converted into credit is determined (step S1733).
- step S1733 when the amount of money that cannot be converted into credit is not included (YES), or when the processing of step S1733 is executed, the CPU 1731 credits the amount of money that can be converted into credit according to the denomination read out in the processing of step S1729. (Step S1735), and the converted number of credits is transmitted to the slot machine 1010 (step S1737). Further, the CPU 1731 writes the amount that could not be converted into credit, that is, the remaining amount of the amount converted into credit into the IC card (step S1739), and ends this subroutine.
- FIG. 35 is a table used when determining the symbols 1501 to be rearranged used in the normal game.
- a numerical value range obtained by dividing the range from 0 to 65535 into 20 is associated with each code number.
- the aspect of the division may be equal or may be unequal.
- the range corresponding to “FEATURE” corresponding to the trigger symbol 1503 b of the specific symbol 1503 and “WILD” corresponding to the wild symbol 1503 a may be set to a range narrower than that of the other types of symbols 1501. In this case, according to the situation of the game, winning and losing can be easily adjusted by making it difficult to win a valuable kind of symbol 1501.
- the reel 1151 is a target for rearrangement.
- the randomly selected random number value is “40000”, “FEATURE” of code No. 12 associated with the random number range including this random number value is displayed in the fourth column. This pseudo reel 1154 is to be rearranged. (Symbol table for bonus game)
- FIG. 36 is a table used when determining symbols 1501 to be rearranged used in the bonus game.
- This bonus game symbol table is similar to the normal game symbol table in that each symbol 1501 of the display block 1028 in each symbol column and the code No. Are associated with each other, and a numerical range obtained by dividing the range from 0 to 65535 is associated with each code number.
- the classification mode is the same as that of the normal game symbol table.
- the special symbol 1503 is added or replaced in the bonus game symbol table.
- replacement means that new symbol data is overwritten on existing symbol data.
- the number or symbol sequence to be added or replaced may be selected at random or may be determined in advance.
- the increase number is randomly selected by the wild symbol increase number determination table of FIG. 39 and the trigger symbol increase number determination table of FIG.
- an image of the overwritten (replaced) symbol data may be displayed instead of the stopped symbol 1501.
- FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a symbol string determination table used when determining symbol strings (L1) to (L5) to which the specific symbol 1503 is added or replaced.
- the symbol column determination table includes symbol column No. And the correspondence between random numbers.
- Symbol column No. 1 is a symbol column No. 1 in the first column of the display block 1028.
- 2 is a symbol column No. 2 in the second column of the display block 1028.
- 3 represents the third column of the display block 1028
- the symbol column No. 4 shows the fourth column of the display block 1028
- the symbol column No. Reference numeral 5 denotes the fifth column of the display block 1028.
- the increase number or replacement number of the specific symbol 1503 for each symbol sequence is determined based on the acquired random number value and the symbol sequence determination table.
- the increase number or replacement number of the specific symbol 1503 may be determined in advance for each symbol column. Further, the increase number or replacement number may be determined according to the type of the specific symbol 1503. (Code No. decision table)
- FIG. 38 shows the code No. It is a figure which shows a determination table.
- Code No. The determination table includes a code No. And the correspondence between random numbers. For example, the first symbol column No. When the random numbers for (first column) are 40567, 63535, 65323, the code No. 12 and the end and end are determined.
- the code No. the code number of the specific symbol 1503 to be increased is described. May be determined in advance for each symbol column. (Wild symbol increase count determination table)
- FIG. 39 shows a wild symbol increase count determination table.
- the wild symbol increase count determination table shows the correspondence between the wild symbol increase count and the random number value.
- the wild symbol increase number has five types of numerical values of “10”, “30”, “50”, “70”, and “90”. For example, when the random value is 17235, “30” is selected as the wild symbol increase number.
- the wild symbol increase number should just have the numerical value of the increase number of 1 or more in multiple types. Further, the increase number may be changeable at a predetermined timing such as for each unit game. (Trigger symbol increase count determination table)
- FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a trigger symbol increase number determination table.
- the trigger symbol increase count determination table indicates the correspondence between the trigger symbol increase count and the random number value.
- the number of trigger symbol increases is set to five types of values “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “10”. For example, when the random value is 17235, “4” is selected as the trigger symbol increase number.
- the trigger symbol increase number only needs to have a plurality of types of increase numbers of 1 or more. Further, the increase number in the table may be changeable at a predetermined timing such as for each unit game. (Dividend table)
- FIG. 41 is a payout table for managing payouts to be awarded based on winning combinations.
- This payout table is stored in the ROM 1072 of the motherboard 1070, and payout information (payout rate) is associated with the type of winning combination.
- payout rate corresponding to the winning combination in which three “A” are rearranged is four times. Accordingly, in this case, a payout in which 4 is added to the BET amount is awarded to the player.
- the payout rate corresponding to the winning combination in which five “BUFFALO” are rearranged is 100 times.
- the payout rate in the base game and the free game is set to the same rate, but is not limited to this. That is, the payout rates in the base game and the free game may be different.
- FIG. 42 shows an example of a normal game screen that is a display screen of a normal game in the symbol display device 1016.
- the base game screen is arranged in the center, a display window 1150 having five rows of pseudo reels 1151 to 1155, and a payline generator 1065L, which is arranged symmetrically about the display window 1150. 1065R.
- the pseudo reels 1151, 1152, and 1153 in the first to third rows are stopped, while the pseudo reels 1154 and 1155 in the fourth and fifth rows are rotated. It is in.
- a credit number display unit 1400 Above the display window 1150, a credit number display unit 1400, a fractional cash display unit 1403, a BET number display unit 1401, a wild symbol number display unit 1415, a trigger symbol number display unit 1416, and a payout display unit 1402 , Is arranged. These units 1400, 1401, 1415, 1416, and 1402 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end when viewed from the player.
- the credit amount display unit 1400 displays the credit amount.
- the fractional cash display unit 1403 displays fractional cash.
- the BET number display unit 1401 displays the BET amount in the current unit game.
- the wild symbol number display unit 1415 displays the number of wild symbols 1503a in the current unit game. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there are five wild symbols 1503a in the base game.
- the trigger symbol number display unit 1416 displays the number of trigger symbols 1503b in the current unit game. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there are five trigger symbols 1503b in the base game.
- the payout display unit 1402 displays the number of coins paid out when the winning combination is reached.
- a help button 1410 a pay table button 1411, a BET unit display unit 1412, a stock display unit 1413, and a free game number display unit 1414 are arranged below the display window 1150.
- These units 1410, 1411, 1412, 1413, and 1414 are sequentially arranged from the left end to the right end as viewed from the player.
- the help button 1410 enables a help mode to be executed by a player's pressing operation.
- the help mode is a mode for providing information for solving questions related to the game to the player.
- the paytable button 1411 enables execution of a payout display mode in which payout contents are displayed by a player's pressing operation.
- the payout display mode is a mode for displaying an explanation screen showing the relationship between the winning combination and the payout rate for the player.
- the BET unit display unit 1412 displays the BET unit (payment unit) at the current time.
- the BET unit display unit 1412 makes it possible for the player to recognize that the player can participate in the game in units of 1 cent, for example.
- the stock display unit 1413 displays the number of bonus game carry-overs.
- the “number of carry-overs” means the remaining number of times that the bonus game can be subsequently executed when the bonus game is completed. That is, if “3” is displayed on the stock display portion 1413, the bonus game can be repeated three times in succession after the current bonus game is completed. In the normal game, “0” is displayed.
- the free game number display unit 1414 displays the number of repetitions and the total number of bonus games. That is, if “0 of 0” is displayed in the free game number display portion 1414, it indicates that the total number of free games is 0, that is, it is not a bonus game. Further, if “5 of 8” is displayed, it indicates that the total number of free games is the fifth free game in the bonus game of eight times. (Bonus winning screen in normal game)
- FIG. 43 shows a state within a certain period after the bonus is won. Specifically, a state after winning the bonus by rearranging three trigger symbols 1503b is shown.
- the trigger symbol 1503b preferably has a character readable as “FEATURE” so that the player can clearly recognize that the symbol is related to the bonus winning.
- a bonus winning screen 420 for notifying that a bonus has been won by a symbol image and a character image of “FEATURE IN” is pop-up displayed.
- the total number of the free game number display portion 1414 is switched from “0” to “7”.
- the player can recognize that the player has won a bonus and is transferred to a bonus game including seven free games.
- FIG. 44 shows an example of a bonus game screen that is a display screen of a bonus game in the symbol display device 1016.
- the total number of free games is displayed in the free game number display portion 1414, and the current number of games is displayed. For example, it is displayed that the first free game of the seven free games is being executed. Other operations are the same as those in the normal game. (Slot machine processing: normal game execution processing)
- the normal game execution process in FIG. 45 is executed by the main CPU 1071 of the slot machine 1010.
- the slot machine 1010 is activated in advance.
- the main CPU 1071 executes credit request processing (S1210).
- the player determines whether to use some credits from the credits stored in the IC card 1500.
- the credit request process will be described in detail later.
- the main CPU 1071 receives an input signal output from the 1-BET switch 1034S when the 1-BET button 1034 is operated, or from the 10-BET switch 1039S when the 10-BET button 1039 is operated. It is determined whether an input signal to be output has been received. If it is determined that no coin has been BET, the process returns to S1210.
- the main CPU 1071 performs a process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 1073 according to the number of coins bet (S1212). If the number of coins bet is larger than the number of credits stored in the RAM 1073, the process returns to S1211 without performing the process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 1073. If the number of coins bet exceeds the upper limit (500 in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game, a process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 1073 is performed. Without proceeding, the process proceeds to S13.
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not the start button 1046 is turned on (S13). In this process, the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not an input signal output from the start switch 1046S is received when the start button 1046 is pressed. If it is determined that the start button 1046 has not been turned ON, the process returns to S1211. When the start button 1046 is not turned on (for example, when an instruction to end the game is input without the start button 1045 being turned on), the main CPU 1071 cancels the subtraction result in S1212.
- the wild game symbol table includes 14 wild symbols (also referred to as specific symbols 1503) 1503a.
- the wild symbol 1503a is a symbol that can be substituted for other symbols.
- This process is a process for controlling the display so that the symbols 1501 are rearranged after the start of scrolling of the symbols 1501 in S1214.
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not a prize has been established (S1216). In the processing of S1216, the main CPU 1071 counts the number of symbols 1501 rearranged on the payline L for each type of symbol 1501 for each payline L with respect to the symbols 1501 rearranged in S1215. Then, it is determined whether or not the counted number is 2 or more.
- the main CPU 1071 When it is determined that a prize has been established, the main CPU 1071 performs processing related to coin payout (S1217). In this processing, the main CPU 1071 refers to the odds data stored in the RAM 1073 and determines the payout rate based on the number of symbols 1501 rearranged on the payline L.
- the odds data is data indicating the correspondence between the number of symbols 1501 rearranged on the payline L and the payout rate (see FIG. 18).
- the payout Each time one “WILD” is displayed on the payline L where the winning is established, the payout is doubled. That is, when three “WILD” are displayed on the payline L where the winning is achieved, the payout is 8 times.
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not three or more trigger symbols 1503b have been rearranged (S1218). In this process, it is determined whether or not three or more trigger symbols 1503b are rearranged in the display block 1028 without considering the payline L. If it is determined in S1218 that three or more trigger symbols 1503b have been rearranged as shown in FIG. 20, the main CPU 1071 executes bonus game execution processing (S1219). In the bonus game execution process, a free game in which the number of wild symbols 1503a is increased is executed. The bonus game execution process will be described in detail later.
- FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of the base game symbol determination process. This processing is performed by the main CPU 1071 executing the symbol determination program stored in the RAM 1073.
- the main CPU 1071 acquires a random value from the random number generator 2063 (step S1220). In this process, the main CPU 1071 obtains five random number values corresponding to each symbol string of the display block 1028.
- the main CPU 1071 determines the code No. at the time of symbol stop of each symbol column of the display block 1028 based on the acquired five random number values and the normal game symbol table (see FIG. 35). Is determined (step S1221). For example, when the random number value for the first column is 23035, the code No. 07 is determined. It should be noted that the code number of the symbol string. Indicates the code number of the symbol rearranged in the display block 1028 in the first row among the display blocks 1028 arranged in four rows. It corresponds to. After executing the process of step S21, the main CPU 1071 ends this subroutine. (Slot machine processing: Bonus game execution processing)
- the player can play a game without betting coins.
- main CPU 1071 causes the symbol display device 1016 to pop up a bonus winning screen 1420 as shown in FIG.
- the main CPU 1071 executes a wild symbol increase number determination process (S1231). Specifically, when three or more trigger symbols 1503b are rearranged, first, a random value is acquired. Based on this random number value and the wild symbol increase count determination table, the total number of wild symbols increased is determined. Thereafter, the number of wild symbols is increased stepwise or collectively.
- the main CPU 1071 executes bonus game symbol table update processing (S1232).
- the main CPU 1071 updates the bonus game symbol table based on the increased number of wild symbols 1503a determined by the wild symbol increase number determination process.
- step S1233 the main CPU 1071 executes symbol addition effect processing.
- the main CPU 1071 executes bonus game symbol determination processing (S1234).
- the main CPU 1071 executes the symbol determination program stored in the RAM 1073 to thereby execute the code No. To decide. Specifically, the random number value is acquired, and based on the acquired field value and the bonus game symbol table, the code No. at the time of the symbol stop of each symbol column of the display block 1028 is displayed. To decide.
- This process is a process of controlling the display so that the symbols 1501 determined in S1234 are rearranged after the symbol scrolling is started.
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not a prize has been established (S1236).
- the establishment of a prize in the present embodiment refers to a case where two or more symbols 1501 are rearranged on the payline L as described above.
- the “WILD” that is the wild symbol 1503 a is a symbol 1501 that can be substituted for another symbol 1501. In the bonus game, since the number of wild symbols 1503a is increased as compared with the normal game, it is easier to win a prize than in the normal game.
- the main CPU 1071 counts, for each payline L, the number of symbols 1501 rearranged on S1235 for each type of symbol 1501. Then, it is determined whether or not the counted number is 2 or more.
- the main CPU 1071 performs processing related to coin payout (S1237).
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not three or more trigger symbols 1503b have been rearranged (S1238). In this process, it is determined whether or not three or more trigger symbols 1503b are rearranged in the display block 1028 without considering the payline L.
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not credit data has been acquired from the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1250). If the main CPU 1071 determines that no credit data has been acquired, the main CPU 1071 stands by.
- the main CPU 1071 determines that the credit data has been acquired, the main CPU 1071 updates the display of the credit amount display unit 1400 and the fractional cash display unit 1403 on the lower image display panel 1141 (step S1251). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- Slot machine processing Settlement process
- the main CPU 1071 determines whether or not there is a payment from the player (step S1260). When the main CPU 1071 determines that there is no payment, the main CPU 1071 waits.
- step S1260 determines in step S1260 that there is a payment from the player
- the main CPU 1071 updates the display of the credit number display unit 1400 and the fractional cash display unit 1403 (step S1261). Thereafter, the adjustment credit data is output to the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1262), and this subroutine is terminated.
- PTS terminal processing operation credit conversion processing
- FIG. 50 is a flowchart of credit conversion processing in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not cash has been inserted (step S1301). If the CPU 1731 determines that no cash has been inserted, the CPU 1731 waits.
- the CPU 1731 acquires exchange rate data and denomination data from the management server block 2820 (step S1302).
- the CPU 1731 converts the inserted cash into credits based on the acquired exchange rate data and denomination data (step S1303).
- the CPU 1731 outputs credit data based on the converted credit to the game controller 1100 (step S1304).
- the CPU 1731 outputs the fractional cash data based on the fractional cash generated when the credit is converted to the management server block 2820 (step S1305).
- the CPU 1731 outputs cash data based on the inserted cash to the IC card 1500. Thereby, every time cash is inserted, the IC card 1500 updates the cash data (step S1306). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated. (Processing operation of PTS terminal: settlement processing)
- FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the settlement process in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not payment credit data has been acquired from the game controller 1100 of the slot machine 1010 (step S1310). If the CPU 1731 determines that the payment credit data has not been acquired, the CPU 1731 waits.
- the CPU 1731 acquires exchange rate data, denomination data, and identification code data from the management server block 2820 (step S1311).
- the CPU 1731 converts the payment credit data into cash data based on the denomination data (step S1312).
- the CPU 1731 acquires the stored fractional cash data from the management server block 2820 (step S1313).
- the CPU 1731 adds the converted cash data and the acquired fractional cash data (step S1314).
- the CPU 1731 converts the combined cash data into local currency cash data based on the exchange rate data (step S1315).
- the CPU 1731 outputs the local currency cash data and the identification code to the IC card 1500 (step S1316).
- FIG. 52 is a flowchart of authentication processing in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the IC card 1500 is inserted (step S1340).
- the CPU 1731 acquires the identification code data of the inserted IC card 1500 from the management server block 2820 (step S1341).
- the CPU 1731 acquires identification code data and cash data from the IC card 1500 (step S1342).
- the CPU 1731 collates the acquired identification code in the management server block 2820 with the identification code in the IC card 1500 (step S1343).
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the collation result is correct (step S1344). If the CPU 1731 determines that the collation result is not correct, the CPU 1731 causes the speakers 1707 and 1708 to output an authentication failure notification sound (step S1345). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- step S1344 if it is determined in step S1344 that the collation result is correct, the CPU 1731 acquires exchange rate data, denomination data, and fractional cash data from the management server block 2820 (step S1346).
- the CPU 1731 adds the acquired cash data in the IC card 1500 and the fractional cash data in the management server block 2820 (step S1347).
- the CPU 1731 performs credit conversion on the combined cash data (step S1348).
- the CPU 1731 outputs credit data based on the converted credit to the game controller 1100 (step S1349).
- the CPU 1731 outputs the fractional cash data based on the fractional cash generated when the credit is converted to the management server block 2820 (step S1350). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated. (Processing operation of PTS terminal: human body detection processing)
- FIG. 54 is a flowchart of human body detection processing in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the CPU 1731 drives the human body detection camera 1712 (1713) (step S1370).
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not a human body has been detected (step S1371). If the CPU 1731 determines that the human body has been detected, the CPU 1731 ejects the IC card 1500 and outputs a notification sound from the speakers 1707 and 1708 to notify that the user has forgotten to take it (step S1372). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- step S1371 if it is determined in step S1371 that the human body has not been detected, the CPU 1731 stores the time at the time of detection in the RAM 1732 and determines whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from that time (step S1373).
- step S1373 determines in step S1373 that the predetermined time has not elapsed. If the CPU 1731 determines in step S1373 that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S1371. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1373 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the CPU 1731 takes the IC card 1500 into the card stacker 1121 (step S1374). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated. (Processing operation of PTS terminal: remaining card determination processing)
- FIG. 54 is a flowchart of remaining card determination processing in the PTS terminal 1700.
- the CPU 1731 determines whether or not the IC card 1500 has been inserted or removed (step S1400).
- the CPU 1731 determines that the IC card 1500 is not inserted or removed, the CPU 1731 ends this subroutine.
- step S1400 determines whether the number of remaining IC cards 1500 accumulated in the card stacker 1121 is 0 or 30. Is determined (step S1400). If it is determined that the remaining number of IC cards 1500 accumulated in the card stacker 1121 is 0 or 30, the CPU 1731 stops the game being executed (step S1402). At this time, the CPU 1731 lights the LED 1709 in gray. Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- step S1401 determines whether the number of remaining cards is 0 or 30. If it is determined in step S1401 that the number of remaining cards is not 0 or 30, the CPU 1731 executes a remaining card number determination process (step S1403).
- step S1404 the CPU 1731 executes an LED drive control process.
- the CPU 1731 lights up the LED 1709 with a lighting color corresponding to the number of remaining cards determined in step S1403. Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- IC card processing display update processing
- FIG. 55 is a flowchart of display update processing in the IC card 1500.
- the CPU 1542 determines whether cash data and identification code data have been received from the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1420).
- the CPU 1542 determines that the cash data and the identification code data are not received, the CPU 1542 waits. On the other hand, when it is determined that the cash data and the identification code data are received, the CPU 1542 stores the acquired cash data and the identification code data in the credit data memory 1552 (step S1421).
- the CPU 1542 outputs the stored cash data to the display controller 1551 (step S1422). Thereafter, the display driver 1506 is driven to change and update the screen display of the display unit 1510 (step S1423). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- Management server processing operation storage processing
- the management server block 2820 determines whether or not fractional cash data has been acquired from the PTS terminal 1700 (step S1450).
- the management server block 2820 determines that fractional cash data has not been acquired, it waits. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fractional cash data has been acquired, the management server block 2820 creates an identification code (step S1451).
- the management server block 2820 associates and stores the created identification code and fractional cash data (step S1452). Thereafter, this subroutine is terminated.
- the IC card 1500 can view the credit-related data stored in the credit data memory 1552 from the outside by displaying the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 on the display unit 1510. Therefore, when the credit-related data of the display writing IC 1505 is rewritten by the slot machine 1010, the rewritten credit-related data can be confirmed by the display on the display unit 1510. Further, the credit-related data in the credit data memory 1552 rewritten by the slot machine 1010 is used for display on the display unit 1510, so that the credit-related data stored in the same storage unit can be updated and displayed by the slot machine 1010. It becomes a state shared with.
- the credit-related data in the storage unit is transferred as display data to another storage unit, or the credit-related data in the storage unit is updated and simultaneously stored as display data in another storage unit.
- the occurrence of data mismatch due to noise or the like during data transfer is prevented, so that the credit data can be displayed on the display portion 1510 with high reliability.
- the updated data can be confirmed by the display of the display unit 1510. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a sense of security that the data of the IC card 1500 can always be confirmed during the game. Can do.
- the player may be able to play a game while confirming the process of using the credit in the IC card 1500.
- the example shown in FIG. 57 shows that the display unit 1510 is updated immediately after 2000 yen is used in the game.
- the display unit 1510 of the IC card 1500 may display cash data before and after 2000 credits are subtracted.
- the display unit 1510 may display the cash data immediately before being rewritten by the PTS terminal 1700 and the cash data immediately after.
- the number of paylines L is 25 has been described.
- the number of paylines L is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, 30.
- the bonus winning is that three or more trigger symbols 1503b are rearranged has been described, but there is no particular limitation.
- the bonus winning may be that a predetermined time has elapsed since the last bonus game ended.
- the slot machine 1010 is described.
- the present invention is also applicable to other game machines such as a so-called pachinko game machine.
- the IC card authentication is executed by the PTS terminal 1700.
- the management server block 2820 or the IC card 1500 may be executed.
- the credit conversion of cash data is executed by the PTS terminal 1700, but the management server block 2820 or the IC card 1500 may be executed.
- the game content of the free game is displayed in a stopped state after a plurality of symbols 1501 are variably displayed in the display block 1028, and the payout amount is determined according to the symbols 1501 that are stopped and displayed, or a combination thereof.
- the game to be determined (a game normally played in the slot machine 1010).
- the free game in the present invention is not limited to this example, and a game different from the slot machine 1010 may be played.
- a card game such as poker, a game such as a shooting game, or a martial art game may be played.
- the free game may be a game in which a game medium is paid or may be a game in which a game medium is not paid.
- the free game in the present invention is not particularly limited as long as it is a game that is played even if the game medium is not bet, and can be designed as appropriate.
- each step used to derive one result should be understood as a self-consistent process.
- transmission / reception and recording of electrical or magnetic signals are performed.
- such a signal is expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but these are used for convenience of explanation only.
- the processing in each step may be described in an expression common to human behavior, but the processing described in this specification is executed by various devices in principle. Further, other configurations required for performing each step will be apparent from the above description.
- FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing another embodiment of the timing chart shown in FIG.
- the PTS terminal 1700 transmits a data request to the exchange server 2862, and the latest data updated from the exchange server 2862 is transferred to the PTS.
- update data related to exchange is periodically downloaded from the exchange server 2862 to the PTS terminal 1700 in the example shown in FIG.
- the PTS terminal 1700 updates the exchange data stored in the RAM 1732 based on the data downloaded from the exchange server 2862 (step S1025).
- the PTS terminal 1700 receives the identification result from the banknote discriminator (step S1013), it can immediately calculate the rate using the latest exchange data (step S1016).
- FIG. 59 is a view showing a block image of a game system including a slot machine 1010 according to another embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 58, the game system is roughly divided into a management server block, a customer terminal block, and a staff terminal block.
- the management server block includes a casino hall server 1861, a currency exchange server 2862, a casino / hotel staff management server 1860, and a download server 1863.
- the casino hall server 1861 is a server that manages the entire casino hall in which the slot machine 1010 is installed.
- the exchange server 2862 is a server that creates exchange rate data based on exchange information and the like.
- the casino / hotel staff management server 1860 is a server for managing a casino hall or a hotel staff related to the casino hall.
- the download server 1863 is a server that, for example, downloads the latest information such as game information and news and notifies the player through the PTS terminal 1700 of the various slot machines 1010.
- the management server block 2820 includes a member management server 1864, an IC card & money management server 1865, a megabucks server 1866, and an image server 1867.
- the member management server 1864 is a server that manages member information of players who play the slot machine 1010.
- the IC card & money management server 1865 is a server that manages the IC card 1500 used in the slot machine 1010.
- the IC card & money management server 1865 is a server that stores fractional cash data in association with an identification code and outputs fractional cash data to the PTS terminal 1700.
- the IC card & money management server 1865 also creates and manages denomination data and the like.
- the Megabucks server 1866 is a server that manages Megabucks, for example, a game in which the total sum of the premiums of a plurality of slot machines 1010 installed in a plurality of casino halls is a payout.
- the image server 1867 is a server that downloads the latest image such as an image or news related to a game and notifies the player through the PTS terminal 1700 of various slot machines 1010, for example.
- the customer terminal block has a slot machine 1010, a PTS terminal 1700, and a settlement machine 1868.
- the PTS terminal 1700 can be attached to the slot machine 1010 and can communicate with the management server block 2820.
- the settlement machine 1868 is a machine that cashes the cash data stored in the IC card 1500 owned by the player and settles it, or stores coins, bills, etc. in the IC card 1500 as cash data.
- the staff terminal block has a staff management terminal 1869 and a membership card ticketing terminal 1870.
- the staff management terminal 1869 is a terminal where the casino hall staff manages the various slot machines 1010. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the staff of the casino hall manages whether the number of IC cards 1500 stocked in the PTS terminal 1700 is excessive or insufficient.
- the membership card issuing terminal 1870 is a terminal used when a player playing a game in the casino hall issues a membership card.
- FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing another embodiment of the credit conversion process in the PTS terminal 1700 shown in FIG.
- cash data (amount data) is not transmitted to the IC card shown in FIG.
- the data based on the inserted cash is transmitted to the game controller, and after the game is executed, the amount data given to the player according to the game result is written to the IC card.
- FIG. 61 is a view illustrating a function flow for describing basic functions of the gaming machine according to another embodiment.
- the gaming machine checks whether or not the BET button has been pressed by the player, and then checks whether or not the start button 1046 (FIG. 5) has been pressed by the player.
- the gaming machine extracts a random number for symbol determination and stops scrolling the symbol row in accordance with each of the plurality of video reels displayed on the display. The symbol to be displayed to the player is determined.
- the gaming machine gives the player a privilege (payout) according to the type of the combination of symbols. For example, when a combination of symbols related to coin payout is displayed, the gaming machine pays out a number of coins corresponding to the combination of symbols to the player. In this payout, instead of paying out actual coins, credit information corresponding to the number of coins to be paid out can be written in the IC card.
- the gaming machine starts a free game when a combination of symbols related to the free game trigger (trigger symbol) is displayed.
- the gaming machine pays out the jackpot amount to the player when the symbol combination related to the jackpot trigger is displayed.
- the jackpot accumulates a part of the coins consumed by the player in each gaming machine as a jackpot amount, and when there is a gaming machine for which the jackpot trigger is established, A function that pays out the pot amount.
- the gaming machine calculates the amount (accumulated amount) accumulated in the jackpot amount for each game and transmits it to the external control device.
- the external control device accumulates the accumulated amount transmitted from each gaming machine into the jackpot amount.
- the gaming machine has benefits such as a mystery bonus and insurance.
- the mystery bonus is a payout of a predetermined amount by winning a dedicated lottery.
- the gaming machine extracts a random value for the mystery bonus and determines whether or not to establish the mystery bonus by lottery.
- Insurance is a function provided for the purpose of relieving a player from a situation where a free game has not been played for a long period of time.
- the player can arbitrarily select whether or not the insurance is valid.
- insurance When insurance is activated, it is exchanged for a predetermined amount of insurance.
- insurance When insurance is validated, the gaming machine starts counting the number of games. The gaming machine pays out the amount set for insurance when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number without paying out a large amount due to a free game or the like.
- the gaming machine produces effects by displaying an image on a display, outputting light from a lamp, and outputting sound from a speaker.
- the gaming machine extracts a random number for production, and determines the content of the production based on the symbol determined by lottery.
- FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing a PTS terminal (reading device for information data storage medium) according to another embodiment of the present invention.
- the PTS terminal includes a player detection device, a transport device, a recording medium detection device, and a controller.
- a PTS terminal 1700 described later corresponds to an “information data storage medium reading device” or a “player tracking system”, and a human body detection camera 1712 (1713) or a human body detection sensor 1115 corresponds to a “player detection device”.
- the IC card transport motor corresponds to the “transport device”
- the IC card ejection position sensor corresponds to the “recording medium detection device”
- the CPU 1731, ROM 1733, and RAM 1732 correspond to the “controller”.
- the player detection device is a device for detecting the presence of a player playing on the gaming machine.
- the player image may be detected optically, or the player may be detected thermally or mechanically.
- the player detection device may be any device that can detect whether a person is present in front of the gaming machine.
- the transport device transports the information data recording medium.
- the conveying device is preferably driven by being supplied with power.
- the information data recording medium is transported to the storage position or the eject position by the transport device and positioned.
- the ejecting position is such that the information data recording medium is conveyed by the conveying device, and a part of the information data recording medium is exposed or protrudes, and the player holds the information data recording medium and removes it from the player tracking system. It is a position that can be done.
- the storage position is a predetermined position inside the player tracking system.
- the storage position is not limited to one position and can be a plurality of positions.
- the load position is a position at which predetermined information and data can be written to and read from the information data recording medium by communicating with the player tracking system by a reader / writer described later.
- the storage position includes a stacker position for transporting to a stacker for storing the information data recording medium.
- a stacker position for transporting to a stacker for storing the information data recording medium.
- the normal stacker is for accommodating an initialized IC card. In addition, it is for accommodating an IC card that satisfies a predetermined alert condition and is an alert target.
- the storage position includes the load position, the normal stacker storage position, and the alert stacker storage position.
- the information data recording medium is detachable from the player tracking system. As described above, when the information data recording medium is positioned at the eject position, the player can take out the information data recording medium from the player tracking system. Furthermore, the player can position the information data recording medium at the eject position by inserting the information data recording medium into the player tracking system from the outside of the player tracking system. When the information data recording medium is positioned at the eject position, the information data recording medium is transported to any one of the storage positions by the transport device.
- the information data recording medium may be a contact type or a non-contact type.
- the information data recording medium includes an IC card.
- a recording medium detection device is provided at the above-described eject position.
- the recording medium detection device detects that the information data recording medium exists at the ejection position when the information data recording medium is positioned at the ejection position.
- the recording medium detection device preferably emits a detection signal when it is detected that the information data recording medium is present at the eject position.
- the player places the information data recording medium inside the player tracking system from the outside of the player tracking system as well as when it is transported to the eject position by the transport device. By inserting, it may be positioned at the ejection position.
- the controller is preferably composed of a central processing unit (CPU), a read only memory (ROM), and a random access memory (RAM). This controller can execute the following processes (A) to (C).
- the process (A) is a process for determining whether or not the information data recording medium is present at the ejection position by the recording medium detection device. This determination process (A) is preferably performed based on a detection signal emitted from the recording medium detection apparatus.
- the process of step S1563 in FIG. 26 described later corresponds to the process (A).
- Process (B) is a process for determining whether or not a player exists by the player detection device. This (B) determination process is preferably performed based on a detection signal emitted from the player detection device. The process of step S1571 in FIG. 26 corresponds to the process of (B).
- the process of (C) is a process of determining that the information data recording medium is present at the eject position and transporting the information data recording medium from the eject position to the storage position by the transport device when it is determined that the player is not present. is there.
- the transport device is driven by issuing a drive control signal to the transport device.
- the information data recording medium is preferably transported from the eject position to the storage position.
- the information data recording medium when the information data recording medium is present at the eject position and the player is not present in the gaming machine, the information data recording medium is transported to the storage position. That is, when the information data recording medium is present at the eject position and no player is present, the information data recording medium can be removed from the eject position. Further, the information data recording medium removed from the eject position is accommodated in the player tracking system.
- the player tracking system (PTS) according to the embodiment of the present invention preferably has an alert output device that outputs alert information.
- the controller described above executes the following process (D).
- the process of (D) is a process of executing a process of outputting hole alert information from the alert output device when it is determined that the information data recording medium exists at the eject position and it is determined that no player exists. .
- hole alert information for indicating an alert is supplied to the alert output device. It is preferable to output hall alert information from the alert output device.
- the process of step S1595, S1597, or S1599 of FIG. 26 described later corresponds to the process (D).
- the output of the hall alert information is preferably one that can be recognized by the player or store clerk.
- information and data can be identified not only by the player and the clerk but also by a control device such as a hall computer in the hall alert information. It can be recorded by a control device such as a hall computer, so that what has happened in the store can be managed accurately.
- the player tracking system preferably has a reader / writer.
- This reader / writer writes predetermined information on an information data recording medium or reads it from the information data recording medium.
- This predetermined information includes money amount information related to cash for playing the game on the gaming machine.
- the money amount information is obtained by converting the cash that the player has owned or managed into the gaming machine into information indicating the amount of the inserted cash when the player plays the game on the gaming machine. .
- the amount information (for example, a numerical value) of the amount information changes as the player plays a game on the gaming machine. As will be described later, when the player plays a game on the gaming machine, the number of credits in which the amount information is converted is used.
- the amount of credit may be changed by converting the number of credits into amount information at a predetermined timing, such as when play is finished.
- Credits can be used as stakes in games by putting them into gaming machines, or virtual games that can be used as stakes until they are stored and cashed in gaming machines. It is a medium.
- controller can execute the following processes (E) to (G).
- Process (E) is a process of writing money amount information related to cash for playing a game on a gaming machine to an information data recording medium. As described above, the amount information is converted into the number of credits. The credit is used as a wager for the game, and the number of credits changes as the game progresses. Note that the timing of writing the money amount information to the information data recording medium may be when the game is played on the gaming machine or when the game machine is finished playing. In any case, the credit amount is transmitted from the gaming machine to the player tracking system, the credit amount is converted into money amount information, and the converted money amount information is written in the information data recording medium.
- the process of step S1539 in FIG. 25 described later corresponds to the process (E).
- the process (F) is a process of executing the mini game when the amount information written in the information data recording medium is less than a predetermined number, and changing the amount indicated by the amount information according to the result of the mini game.
- the mini game is preferably completed in a shorter time than a game played on a gaming machine.
- the mini game is executed to adjust the amount indicated by the amount information of the information data recording medium after the game on the gaming machine is finished. By making the game that can be completed in a short time, the next player can immediately play with the gaming machine, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be maintained.
- the processing of steps S1623 to S1631 in FIG. 27 described later corresponds to the processing (F).
- the process (G) is a process of conveying the information data recording medium to the eject position by the conveying device when the amount indicated by the amount information written on the information data recording medium is equal to or greater than a predetermined number.
- the amount indicated by the amount information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the value of the information data recording medium is still high, and the player is unlikely to forget to remove the information data recording medium so that the player can remove the information data recording medium. It is preferable to convey the information data recording medium.
- the processing in step S1629 in FIG. 27 and step S1561 in FIG. 26 described later corresponds to the processing in (G).
- controller can execute the following process (H).
- the process (H) is a process of converting the cash thrown into the gaming machine into the amount indicated by the amount information according to the rate corresponding to the denomination.
- the processing of the subroutine in FIG. 31 corresponds to the processing (G).
- cash owned by the player is converted into money amount information at a rate corresponding to a predetermined denomination. Therefore, even if the amount indicated by the money amount information is fractional, cash including the fraction is included. The amount of money can be accurately converted, and the amount information can be converted without penalizing the player.
- controller can execute the following process (I).
- the process (I) is a process for conveying the information data recording medium to the storage position by the conveying device when the amount indicated by the amount information written on the information data recording medium is less than a predetermined number.
- a predetermined number In other words, if the mini game is executed and the mini game is lost, the information data recording medium is confiscated and the information data recording medium is transported to the storage position. Even in this case, since the amount indicated by the amount information written on the information data recording medium is less than the predetermined number, the value of the information data recording medium is not high and the player is not dissatisfied.
- the processes in steps S1627 and S1639 in FIG. 27 described later correspond to the process (I).
- the information data recording medium Since the information data recording medium is housed in the player tracking system in this way, the information data recording medium is not left in the player tracking system, and the labor and labor of the store clerk can be reduced. Further, since the information data recording medium is accommodated in the player tracking system, the next player can immediately start a game on the gaming machine without waiting, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. it can. Furthermore, since the information data recording medium is accommodated in the player tracking system, the information data recording medium can be accurately collected by the store, and the collected information data recording medium can be used again in the store. The cost required for the information data recording medium can also be reduced.
- controller can execute the following process (J).
- the process (J) is a process for outputting player alert information from the alert output device when it is determined that the information data recording medium is present at the eject position and a player is present.
- the process of step S1573 or S1575 of FIG. 26 described later corresponds to the process (J).
- hole alert information is output from the alert output device.
- the hole alert information is output when it is determined that there is no player. Therefore, even if the hole alert information is output, a player who quickly leaves the gaming machine may not be able to recognize the hole alert information. For this reason, it is preferable that the player alert information is output to the player when the player exists by first executing the process (J). By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the information data recording medium may be forgotten.
- controller can execute the following process (K).
- the process (K) is a process for outputting hole alert information from the alert output device when it is determined that there is no player after the player alert information is output from the alert output device.
- the process of step S1573 or S1575 and step S1595, S1597, or S1599 of FIG. 26 described later corresponds to the process (K).
- the hall alert information is switched to the hall alert information.
- the alert information is output in two stages, so that the notification target is changed from the player to the store (the store clerk or the hall computer), so that the work when the information data recording medium is forgotten to be taken can be accurately performed. And can be done quickly.
- controller can execute the following process (L).
- the information data recording medium transported to the storage position by the processes (C) and (I) described above is initialized after a predetermined period and transported to the normal stacker. Thus, the information data recording medium is replenished.
- the processes of steps S1655, S1657, and S1659 of FIG. 29 described later correspond to the process (L).
- the store can replenish the information data recording medium without purchasing a new information data recording medium, so that the cost required for the information data recording medium can be reduced. Further, since the information data recording medium can be replenished without opening the gaming machine, the fairness and safety of the game can be maintained, and the replenishment work of the information data recording medium can be complicated. Can be prevented.
- FIG. 63 is a schematic view schematically showing the overall image of the casino system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
- the casino system 2002 includes a management server block 2820, a customer terminal block 2221, and a staff terminal block 2222.
- the management server block 2820 includes a casino hall server 2261, an exchange server 2262, a staff management server 2263, a member management server 2264, an IC card / money management server 2265, a progressive server 2266, and an image server 2267. Yes.
- the casino hall server 2261 is a server for collecting money flows in the casino, creating a renting table, and managing each server in the management server block 2820.
- the exchange server 2262 is a server for acquiring exchange information from the outside (Internet 2015) via the communication line 2223.
- the staff management server 2263 is a server for managing attendance of staff working in the casino, grasping the current position of the staff in the casino, and the like.
- the member management server 2264 is a server for managing member information such as personal information of members and past game results.
- the IC card / money management server 2265 is a server for totaling sales by cashless IC cards.
- the progressive server 2266 is a server for managing accumulated values for progressive provision and determining progressive provision.
- the image server 2267 is a server for storing and managing the images of the faces of staff members and players taken by a camera provided in the casino.
- the staff management server 2263 corresponds to the server of the present invention.
- the customer terminal block 2221 includes a player tracking system (PTS) terminal 2064, a gaming machine, and a checkout machine 2268.
- the gaming machine is connected to the management server block 2820 via the PTS terminal 2064 via a network.
- PTS terminal 2064 is provided for one gaming machine.
- the PTS terminal 2064 corresponds to the personal tracking device of the present invention.
- the staff terminal block 2222 includes a staff management terminal 2269 and a membership card ticketing terminal 2270.
- the staff management terminal 2269 is controlled by the staff management server 2263. Based on the signal received from the staff management server 2263, the staff management terminal 2269 transmits information to a personal digital assistant (PDA) (not shown) carried by the staff, or communicates with a mobile phone carried by the staff. Or start it.
- PDA personal digital assistant
- the membership card ticketing terminal 2270 includes a camera, and when the membership card (IC card) is issued, the face of the player who receives the IC card is photographed. The captured image is stored in the image server 2267 in association with the customer ID. The personal information of the member input when the IC card is issued is stored in the member management server 2264 in association with the customer ID.
- the PTS terminal 2064 is connected to the currency bill discriminator 2065 via a communication line. (See FIG. 72).
- the currency bill discriminator 2065 can accept banknotes from a plurality of countries. For example, when a Japanese banknote is inserted into the exchange bill discriminator 2065, the PTS terminal 2064 performs conversion (exchange) to US currency based on the exchange rate. Then, the converted currency amount data indicating the currency amount after conversion (exchange) is transmitted from the PTS terminal 2064 to the gaming machine. Therefore, the player can play a game on the gaming machine using a currency other than the US currency.
- the currency amount after conversion (exchange) is equivalent to a currency amount obtained by subtracting a currency amount corresponding to a predetermined fee (hereinafter, also referred to as exchange fee) from the currency amount before conversion (exchange).
- exchange fee data indicating a currency amount corresponding to the exchange fee is transmitted from the PTS terminal 2064 to the progressive server 2266.
- the progressive server 2266 updates the bonus accumulation value based on the currency amount indicated by the received exchange fee data.
- the bonus accumulation value reaches a specific value, coins are paid out as jackpots to any gaming machine.
- a bonus using the exchange fee as a source is provided.
- the gaming machine of the present invention is the slot machine 2010 will be described.
- FIG. 64 is a front view schematically showing the gaming system according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
- 65A to 65B are diagrams illustrating an example of an image displayed on the upper image display panel included in the slot machine included in the gaming system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
- the gaming system 2001 includes a plurality of (in this embodiment, ten) slot machines 2010 (slot machine 2010A, slot machine 2010B, slot machine 2010C, slot machine 2010D, slot machine 2010E, slot machine 2010F).
- PTS terminal 2064 exchange server 2262, progressive server 2266
- a plurality of large common displays 2300 large common display 2300A, large common display 2300B.
- a connected light emitting band 2310 (a connected light emitting band 2310A, a connected light emitting band 2310B, a connected light emitting band 2310C, a connected light emitting band 2310D, a connected light emitting band 2310E, and a plurality of LEDs 2351 arranged from the large common display 2300 to the slot machine 2010.
- a connected light emitting band 2310F, a connected light emitting band 2310G, a connected light emitting band 2310H, a connected light emitting band 2310I, and a connected light emitting band 2310J) are provided for each slot machine.
- the connected light emission band 2310 includes a straight line portion from the large common display 2300 to the boundary plate 2302 (boundary plate 2302A and boundary plate 2302B) and a bent portion from the boundary plate 2302 to the slot machine 2010.
- the slot machine 2010 corresponds to the gaming machine in the present invention.
- a part of coins bet on each slot machine 2010 is cumulatively counted as an accumulated value for EVENT TIME. Then, an image indicating the counted accumulated value for EVENT TIME is displayed on the large common display 2300B. In FIG. 64, 123456 is displayed on the large common display 2300B, and EVENT It shows that the accumulated value for TIME is 123456.
- an EVENT TIME common game
- the exchange fee related to the exchange of the banknote is cumulatively counted as the accumulated value for bonus. .
- an image indicating the counted bonus accumulation value is displayed on the large common display 2300A.
- 850 is displayed on the large common display 2300A, and the accumulated value for bonus is 850.
- the upper image display panel 2033 displays a character image indicating notes regarding jackpot acquisition.
- the character image 2601 indicates that an EVENT TIME (common game) is generated when the accumulated value for the EVENT TIME reaches a predetermined value.
- a character image 2602 indicates that a bonus is generated for any of the slot machines 2010 when the bonus accumulation value reaches a specific value.
- FIG. 65B further shows EVENT TIME (common game).
- EVENT TIME common game
- a character image 2604 indicates that the LED 2351 is turned on in accordance with the number of points acquired in each slot machine 2010 during the EVENT TIME (common game).
- EVENT TIME common game
- the number of points is determined based on the type and number of rearranged symbols.
- the character image 2605 shows an EVENT for the slot machine 2010 provided with the connected light emission band 2310 in which all the LEDs 2351 are already lit. This indicates that the number of coins corresponding to the TIME accumulation value is paid out as a jackpot.
- the LEDs 2351 that are close to the slot machine 2010 are turned on in order according to the acquired number of points. As a result, the row of LEDs 2351 that are lit appears to extend toward the large common display 2300.
- a character image 2606 indicates that the number of LEDs 2351 included in the connected light emission band 2310 can vary depending on the connection light emission band 2310. In the present embodiment, the number of LEDs 2351 provided in the two connected light emission bands 2310 listed in the following (I) to (V) is the same.
- FIG. 64 is a view schematically showing the gaming system 2001 according to this embodiment, and the number of LEDs 2351 depicted in FIG. 64 is irrelevant to the number of LEDs 2351 in this embodiment.
- the character image 2607 indicates that the correspondence between the acquired number of points and the number of LEDs 2351 that are lit can also vary depending on the connected light emission band 2310. Specifically, in each of (I) to (V), the correspondence between the acquired number of points and the number of LEDs 2351 to be lit is different (see FIG. @ 24A).
- FIG. 66 is a bird's-eye view schematically showing a personal tracking system included in the casino system shown in FIG.
- the personal tracking system 2800 is a system for managing staff 2802 (in FIG. 66, staff 2802A, staff 2802B, and staff 2802C) in the casino store 2801. In FIG. 66, only the staff 2802 exists in the casino store 2801.
- the casino store 2801 corresponds to the facility of the present invention.
- the personal tracking system 2800 includes a plurality of PTS terminals 2064, a staff management server 2263, and a plurality of RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) readers 2255 (hereinafter also referred to as RFID-R 2255) (see FIG. @ 10).
- One PTS terminal 2064 is provided in each cabinet 2011 of each slot machine 2010 installed in the casino store 2801.
- One RFID-R 2255 is provided in each cabinet 2011 of each slot machine 2010 installed in the casino store 2801.
- the RFID-R 2255 provided in each slot machine 2010 reads the staff ID wirelessly from the staff ID card 2803 possessed by the staff 2802.
- the staff ID is read when the staff ID card 2803 is in the radio wave reachable range of each RFID-R 2255.
- an active type tag capable of communication at a distance of about 10 m is used as the RFID tag provided in the staff ID card 2803.
- the staff ID read from each RFID-R 2255 is added with information for identifying the RFID-R 2255 and the reception intensity, and is transmitted to the staff management server 2263.
- the staff management server 2263 detects the position of each RFID tag (staff) based on the transmitted staff ID.
- the position of the RFID tag is detected by using the reception intensity of the radio wave transmitted by the RFID tag provided in the staff ID card 2803 at the RFID-R 2255.
- a conventionally known method such as a triangulation method can be adopted. It will be omitted.
- an abnormality signal is transmitted to the management server 2200.
- the management server 2200 identifies the staff closest to the slot machine 2010 from which the abnormality signal is output, and starts communication with the staff by the mobile terminal. As a result, it is possible to instruct the staff 2802 that is closest to the slot machine 2010 that detected the abnormality to promptly go to the slot machine 2010.
- an entrance card reader 2807 is installed in the entrance gate 2806 of the casino store 2801.
- the entrance card reader 2807 The staff ID is read from the staff ID card 2803.
- the staff ID is stored in the RAM of the staff management server 2263 when it is read at the time of entry, and is deleted from the RAM of the staff management server 2263 when it is read at the time of exit. Thereby, the number of staff 2802 in the casino store 2801, which staff 2802 is in the casino store 2801, and the like can be managed.
- a casino camera 2808 is provided in the casino store 2801, and the state in the casino store 2801 is imaged.
- Image data of an image captured by the monitoring camera 2808 is transmitted to the staff management server 2263.
- the staff management server 2263 stores staff IDs of all staffs in advance.
- the staff management server 2263 stores face image data indicating the face of the staff assigned with the staff ID in association with each staff ID.
- the staff management server 2263 constantly compares the image data transmitted from the monitoring camera 2808 with each of the face image data stored in advance in the staff management server 2263, and the person indicated by the face image data and the image It is determined whether a criterion for determining that the person indicated by the data matches is satisfied.
- the surveillance camera 2808 corresponds to a camera installed so as to be able to image the inside of the facility of the present invention.
- a gaming machine 2805 that provides other types of games different from the gaming system 2001 is also installed.
- FIG. 67 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a staff management server provided in the personal tracking system.
- the staff management server 2263 includes a CPU 2501 as a processor, a ROM 2502, a RAM 2503, a communication interface 2504, a hard disk drive 2505 as a memory, a display 2506 as an output device, and a touch panel 2507 provided on the front surface of the display 2506. It has.
- the communication interface 2504 is connected to the communication interface 2245 of the PTS terminal 2064 via a communication line.
- the ROM 2502 stores a system program for controlling the operation of the staff management server 2263, permanent data, and the like.
- the RAM 2503 stores data and programs used when the CPU 2501 operates.
- the hard disk drive 2505 stores a staff management table in which staff IDs, face image data, and telephone numbers to portable terminals are associated with each other.
- the staff is given a staff ID in advance and the face is imaged by the camera.
- the face image data indicating the captured face is stored in the hard disk drive 2505 in association with the staff ID.
- the staff lends a portable terminal associated with the staff ID from the manager.
- staff ID “001” is assigned to staff 2802A (see FIG. 66), and staff ID “001” is stored in association with face image data A.
- the telephone number A is stored in association with the staff ID “001”.
- the staff 2802B (see FIG. 66) is assigned a staff ID “002”, and the staff ID “002” is stored in association with the face image data B. Further, the telephone number B is stored in association with the staff ID “002”.
- FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a staff management process executed in the staff management server according to an embodiment of the present invention.
- the CPU 2501 provided in the staff management server 2263 stores the staff ID data read from the staff ID card 2803 by the entrance card reader 2807 in the RAM 2503 (step S2651).
- the CPU 2501 compares the image data transmitted from the monitoring camera 2808 with the face image data corresponding to the staff ID data stored in the RAM 2503 in step S2651 and compares the person indicated by the face image data with the image data. It is determined whether or not a criterion for determining that the person indicated by is satisfied is satisfied (step S2652).
- step S2653: YES If the CPU 2501 determines that the criterion for determining that the person indicated by the face image data matches the person indicated by the image data (step S2653: YES), the CPU 2501 counts 1 as the number of staff members. Note that the face image data that is the target of counting the number of staff members is excluded from the comparison target in step S2652. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of staff members from being counted twice based on the same face image data. On the other hand, when it is determined that the criterion for determining that the person indicated by the face image data and the person indicated by the image data match is not satisfied (step S2653: NO), the CPU 2501 determines the face image data determined not to match. The base image and the staff ID associated with the face image data are displayed on the display 2506 (step S2654). After the process of step S2654 or step S2655, this subroutine is terminated.
- FIG. 70 is a perspective view showing an appearance of the slot machine constituting the gaming system of the first embodiment.
- the slot machine 2010 coins, bills (basic currency and currency other than the basic currency), or electronic valuable information corresponding to these are used as game media.
- the game medium is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include medals, tokens, electronic money, and tickets.
- the ticket is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a ticket with a barcode as described later.
- the slot machine 2010 includes a cabinet 2011, a top box 2012 installed on the upper side of the cabinet 2011, and a main door 2013 provided on the front surface of the cabinet 2011.
- the main door 2013 is provided with a lower image display panel 2016.
- the lower image display panel 2016 includes a transparent liquid crystal panel, and displays nine display blocks 2028 in three columns and three rows. Each display block 2028 displays one symbol. Although not shown, the lower image display panel 2016 displays various images related to effects in addition to the above-described images.
- a credit number display unit 2031 and a payout number display unit 32 are set on the lower image display panel 2016.
- the number of credited coins is displayed as an image.
- the payout display unit 2032 displays the number of coins to be paid out as an image.
- a touch panel 2069 is provided on the front surface of the lower image display panel 2016, and the player can input various instructions by operating the touch panel 2069.
- a control panel 2020 composed of a plurality of buttons 2023 to 2027 for inputting instructions relating to game progress by the player, a coin receiving slot 21 for receiving coins into the cabinet 2011, and bill recognition
- a device 2022, a currency bill discriminator 2065, and a camera 2254C are provided below the lower image display panel 2016, a control panel 2020 composed of a plurality of buttons 2023 to 2027 for inputting instructions relating to game progress by the player, a coin receiving slot 21 for receiving coins into the cabinet 2011, and bill recognition
- a device 2022, a currency bill discriminator 2065, and a camera 2254C are provided below the lower image display panel 2016, a control panel 2020 composed of a plurality of buttons 2023 to 2027 for inputting instructions relating to game progress by the player, a coin receiving slot 21 for receiving coins into the cabinet 2011, and bill recognition
- a device 2022, a currency bill discriminator 2065, and a camera 2254C are provided below the lower image display panel 2016, a control panel 2020 composed of a plurality of buttons 2023 to 20
- the control panel 2020 is provided with a start button 2023, a change button 2024, a cashout button 2025, a 1-BET button 2026, and a maximum BET button 2027.
- the start button 2023 is used to input an instruction to start scrolling the symbols.
- the change button 2024 is used when requesting a change of money from an attendant at the game facility.
- the cashout button 2025 is used to input an instruction to pay out a credited coin to the coin tray 2018.
- the 1-BET button 2026 is used to input an instruction to bet one coin among the credited coins on the game.
- the maximum BET button 2027 is used to input an instruction to bet a maximum number of coins (three in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game among credited coins.
- the banknote discriminator 2022 recognizes the suitability of banknotes (base currency) and accepts regular banknotes in the cabinet 2011. Note that the bill validator 2022 may be configured to be able to read a barcoded ticket 2039 described later.
- a berry glass 2034 on which a character or the like of the slot machine 2010 is drawn is provided on the lower front surface of the main door 2013, that is, below the control panel 2020.
- the exchange bill discriminator 2065 accepts bills from a plurality of countries other than the base currency, and can read the suitability, type, and number of received bills.
- the camera 2254C is for capturing an image of the player's face.
- the camera 2254C corresponds to the camera installed in the present invention so as to be able to capture the face of the player.
- the camera installed so as to be able to capture the face of the player is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a CCD camera and a CMOS sensor camera.
- An upper image display panel 2033 is provided on the front surface of the top box 2012.
- the upper image display panel 2033 includes a liquid crystal panel, and displays, for example, an image representing introduction of game content and explanation of game rules as shown in FIG. 67A.
- the top box 2012 is provided with a speaker 2029.
- a ticket printer 2035 Below the upper image display panel 2033, a ticket printer 2035, an IC card reader / writer 2253 (hereinafter also referred to as an IC card R / W 2253), a data display 2037, and a keypad 2038 are provided.
- the ticket printer 2035 prints a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date and time, and an identification number of the slot machine 2010 are encoded on a ticket, and outputs the ticket 2039 with a bar code.
- the player causes the slot machine 2039 to read the barcode-added ticket 2039 to play a game with the slot machine, or exchanges the barcode-added ticket 2039 with a bill or the like at a predetermined place in the gaming facility (for example, a cashier in a casino) Can be.
- a predetermined place in the gaming facility for example, a cashier in a casino
- the IC card R / W 2253 reads data from the IC card and writes data to the IC card.
- the IC card is a card possessed by the player, and stores, for example, data for identifying the player and data regarding the history of games played by the player.
- the IC card may store data corresponding to coins, bills or credits.
- the data display 2037 is formed of a fluorescent display or the like, and displays data read by the IC card R / W 2253 or data input through the keypad 2038 by the player, for example.
- the keypad 2038 is used to input instructions and data related to ticket issuance and the like.
- FIG. 69 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the slot machine shown in FIG.
- the gaming board 2050 includes CPUs (Central Processing Unit) 2051, ROM 2055 and boot ROM 2052, a card slot 2053S corresponding to the memory card 2053, and an IC socket 2054S corresponding to GAL (Generic Array Logic) 2054 are provided.
- CPUs Central Processing Unit
- ROM 2055 and boot ROM 2052 read-only memory
- a card slot 2053S corresponding to the memory card 2053
- an IC socket 2054S corresponding to GAL (Generic Array Logic) 2054 are provided.
- GAL Generic Array Logic
- the memory card 2053 includes a non-volatile memory such as a compact flash (registered trademark) and stores a game program.
- the game program includes a symbol determination program.
- the symbol determination program is a program for determining symbols to be rearranged in the display block 2028. Symbols determined by the symbol determination program include “3 bar”, “2 bar”, “1 bar”, “blue 7”, “red 7”, “white 7”, “RIBBON”, “HEART”, “START”, “MOON”. , “SUN”, “JEWEL”, “CROWN”, and “SMILE”.
- the card slot 2053S is configured so that the memory card 2053 can be inserted and removed, and is connected to the motherboard 2040 by an IDE bus. Accordingly, by removing the memory card 2053 from the card slot 2053S, writing another game program in the memory card 2053, and inserting the memory card 2053 into the card slot 2053S, the type and contents of the game played in the slot machine 2010 are changed. be able to.
- the game program includes a program related to game progress.
- the game program includes image data and sound data output during the game.
- the CPU 2051, the ROM 2055, and the boot ROM 2052 connected to each other by an internal bus are connected to the motherboard 2040 by a PCI bus.
- the PCI bus transmits signals between the motherboard 2040 and the gaming board 2050 and supplies power from the motherboard 2040 to the gaming board 2050.
- the motherboard 2040 is configured using a commercially available general-purpose motherboard (printed wiring board on which basic components of a personal computer are mounted), and includes a main CPU 2041, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 2042, and a RAM (Random Access). Memory) 2043 and a communication interface 2044.
- the motherboard corresponds to the controller in the present invention.
- the ROM 2042 is composed of a memory device such as a flash memory, and stores a program such as BIOS (Basic Input / Output System) executed by the main CPU 2041 and permanent data.
- BIOS Basic Input / Output System
- the BIOS is executed by the main CPU 2041, initialization processing of a predetermined peripheral device is performed, and processing for taking in a game program stored in the memory card 2053 via the gaming board 2050 is started.
- the ROM 2042 may be rewritable or impossible.
- the ROM 2042 shows data indicating a predetermined time T, odds data indicating the correspondence between the combination of symbols rearranged on the winning line and the number of payouts (see FIGS. 82A to 82C), and a first constant number. Data, data indicating the second fixed number, and the like are included.
- the RAM 2043 stores data and programs used when the main CPU 2041 operates.
- the RAM 2043 can store a game program.
- the RAM 2043 stores data such as the number of credits, the number of insertions and the number of payouts in one game.
- the motherboard 2040 has a main body PCB (Printed Circuit) which will be described later. Board) 2060 and door PCB 2080 are connected to each other by USB. Further, a power supply unit 2045 and a communication interface 22044 are connected to the motherboard 2040. Communication interface 22044 is connected to communication interface 2245 of PTS terminal 2064 via a communication line.
- PCB Print Circuit
- the main body PCB 2060 and the door PCB 2080 are connected to a device or device that generates an input signal input to the main CPU 2041 and a device or device whose operation is controlled by a control signal output from the main CPU 2041.
- the main CPU 2041 executes a game program stored in the RAM 2043 based on an input signal input to the main CPU 2041, thereby performing a predetermined arithmetic process and storing the result in the RAM 2043, or for each device or apparatus.
- a control process a control signal is transmitted to each device or apparatus.
- the main body PCB 2060 is connected with a lamp 2030, a hopper 2066, a coin detection unit 2067, a graphic board 2068, a speaker 2029, a touch panel 2069, a ticket printer 2035, a key switch 1038S, a data display 2037, and a timer 2061.
- the hopper 2066 is installed in the cabinet 2011 and pays out a predetermined number of coins from the coin payout outlet 2019 to the coin tray 2018 based on a control signal output from the main CPU 2041.
- the coin detection unit 2067 is provided inside the coin payout exit 2019, and outputs an input signal to the main CPU 2041 when it detects that a predetermined number of coins have been paid out from the coin payout exit 2019. .
- Timer 2037 is used for measuring time.
- the graphic board 2068 controls image display on the upper image display panel 2033 and the lower image display panel 2016 based on a control signal output from the main CPU 2041. In each display block 2028 of the lower image display panel 2016, a symbol that scrolls or stops is displayed.
- the credit amount display section 2031 of the lower image display panel 2016 displays the credit amount stored in the RAM 2043. Further, the payout number display portion 32 of the lower image display panel 2016 displays the number of coins paid out.
- the graphic board 2068 includes a video display processor (VDP) that generates image data based on a control signal output from the main CPU 2041, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data generated by the VDP, and the like. Note that image data used when generating image data by VDP is included in a game program read from the memory card 2053 and stored in the RAM 2043.
- VDP video display processor
- the ticket printer 2035 Based on the control signal output from the main CPU 2041, the ticket printer 2035 prints a bar code in which data such as the number of credits, date and time, and identification number of the slot machine 2010 stored in the RAM 2043 are encoded on the ticket. It is output as a ticket 2039 with code.
- the key switch 2038S is provided on the keypad 2038, and outputs a predetermined input signal to the main CPU 2041 when the keypad 2038 is operated by the player.
- the data display 2037 displays data input through the keypad 2038 by the player.
- a control panel 2020, a reverter 1021S, and a cold cathode tube 2081 are connected to the door PCB 2080.
- the control panel 2020 includes a start switch 2023S corresponding to the start button 2023, a change switch 2024S corresponding to the change button 2024, a CASHOUT switch 2025S corresponding to the CASHOUT button 2025, a 1-BET switch 2026S corresponding to the 1-BET button 2026, In addition, a maximum BET switch 2027S corresponding to the maximum BET button 2027 is provided.
- Each of the switches 2023S to 2027S outputs an input signal to the main CPU 2041 when the corresponding button 2023 to 2027 is operated by the player.
- the reverter 2021S operates based on a control signal output from the main CPU 2041, and distributes coins to a cash box (not shown) or a hopper 2066 installed in the slot machine 2010. That is, when the hopper 2066 is filled with coins, regular coins are distributed to the cash box by the reverter 1021S. On the other hand, when the hopper 2066 is not filled with coins, regular coins are distributed to the hopper 2066.
- the cold cathode fluorescent lamp 2081 functions as a backlight installed on the back side of the lower image display panel 2016 and the upper image display panel 2033, and lights up based on a control signal output from the main CPU 2041.
- FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing an internal structure of the PTS terminal constituting the gaming system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
- the PTS terminal 2064 includes a CPU 2241, a CPU 2241, a RAM 2243, a connection unit 2244, a communication interface 2245, and a hard disk drive 2246.
- a controller including the CPU 2241, the CPU 2241, and the RAM 2243 corresponds to the controller in the present invention.
- the communication interface 2245 is connected to the communication interface 22044 of one slot machine 2010 having a corresponding relationship with the PTS terminal 2064 via a communication line, and is connected to the management server block 2820 via the communication line. .
- the CPU 2241 stores a system program for controlling the operation of the PTS terminal 2064, exchange fee calculation value data, permanent data, and the like.
- the exchange fee calculation value data is data indicating the exchange fee calculation value P / 1-P (P is the exchange fee rate).
- the RAM 2243 temporarily stores exchange rate data indicating the exchange rate determined for each type other than the basic currency, in which the correspondence between the amount of the basic currency (US currency) and the amount of a currency other than the basic currency. To remember.
- the hard disk drive 2246 is for storing image data of an image captured by the camera 2254C.
- the hard disk drive 2246 corresponds to the memory in the present invention.
- the CPU 2241 stores image data obtained by being imaged by the camera 2254C in the hard disk drive 2246.
- Image data is stored at predetermined time intervals (for example, at intervals of 0.5 seconds).
- Each image data is given a time (time stamp) stored in the hard disk drive 2246.
- the PTS terminal 2064 has a clock function, and performs time adjustment every time a predetermined period elapses. Time adjustment is performed by acquiring time data from a clock provided in the management server 2200 or from the outside via the Internet.
- the CPU 2241 deletes the image data with the old time stamp in order. However, image data that is not set to be erasable is not erased.
- the connection unit 2244 is connected to a bill validator 2022, a currency bill validator 2065, a coin counter 2021C, a camera module 2254, and an RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) reader 2255 (hereinafter also referred to as RFID-R 2255) via a communication line. And the IC card R / W 2253 are connected.
- RFID-R 2255 Radio Frequency Identification
- the bill discriminator 2022 recognizes the suitability of bills (base currency) and accepts regular bills.
- bill validator 2022 accepts a regular bill, it outputs an input signal to CPU 2241 based on the amount of the bill. That is, the input signal includes information about the amount of the accepted banknote.
- a bill processing device 3001 described later with reference to FIG. 101 can be used as the currency bill discriminator 2065.
- the exchange bill discriminator 2065 identifies the types and suitability of bills in a plurality of countries other than the base currency and accepts regular bills.
- the exchange bill discriminator 2065 outputs an input signal to the CPU 2241 based on the type and amount of the bill when accepting a regular bill.
- the input signal includes currency type data indicating the identified currency type and currency amount data indicating the amount of the currency. That is, the input signal includes information about the type and amount of the accepted banknote.
- a bill processing device 3001 described later in FIG. 101 can be used as the currency bill discriminator 2065.
- the banknote discriminator 2022 and the exchange bill discriminator 2065 one banknote discriminating apparatus 3001 can be used as the banknote discriminator 2022 and the exchange bill discriminator 2065.
- the coin counter 2021C is provided inside the coin receiving slot 21 and identifies whether or not the coin inserted into the coin receiving slot 21 by the player is appropriate. Coins other than regular coins are discharged from the coin payout exit 2019. Further, the coin counter 2021C outputs an input signal to the CPU 2241 when detecting a regular coin.
- the camera module 2254 controls the operation of the camera 2254C connected to the camera module 2254. Note that image data obtained by imaging is stored in the hard disk drive 2246 of the PTS terminal 2064.
- RFID-R 2255 receives radio waves emitted from RFID tags carried by casino staff.
- the RFID-R 2255 outputs a reception signal to the CPU 2241 based on the received radio wave.
- the received signal includes information (staff ID) that identifies the RFID tag that is the source of the received radio wave.
- the CPU 2241 transmits the received signal to the staff management server 2263.
- the staff management server 2263 that has received the received signal transmitted by the CPU 2241 grasps the current position of each staff in the casino based on the received signal.
- the IC card R / W 2253 reads data from the IC card and transmits the data to the CPU 2241 or writes data to the IC card based on a control signal from the CPU 2241.
- FIG. 73 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the exchange server constituting the gaming system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
- the exchange server 2262 includes a CPU 2341, a ROM 2342, a RAM 2343, a communication interface 2344, and a communication interface 2345.
- Communication interface 2344 is connected to communication interface 2245 of PTS terminal 2064 via a communication line.
- the communication interface 2345 is connected to the Internet 2015 via the communication line 2223.
- the ROM 2342 includes a system program for controlling the operation of the exchange server 2262, an exchange information acquisition program for obtaining the latest exchange information via the Internet 2015, permanent data, fee data indicating the exchange fee rate P, and the like. It is remembered.
- the RAM 2343 temporarily stores exchange information, exchange information after subtraction of fees, and the like.
- FIG. 74 is a block diagram illustrating an internal configuration of the progressive server included in the gaming system according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
- the progressive server 2266 includes a CPU 2201, a ROM 2202, a RAM 2203, a communication interface 2204, an LED drive circuit 2350, a random number generator 2063, and a hard disk drive 2205 as a memory.
- the random number generator 2063 generates a random number at a predetermined timing.
- the communication interface 2204 is connected to the communication interface 2245 of the PTS terminal 2064 via a communication line, and the large common display 2300A, the large common display 2300B, the small common display 2301A, and the small common display 2301B via the communication line. It is connected.
- the ROM 2202 stores a system program for controlling the operation of the progressive server 2266, permanent data, and the like. Further, the RAM 2203 includes an EVENT TIME storage value data indicating an EVENT TIME storage value, a bonus storage value data indicating a bonus storage value, and an LED 2351 included in a connected light emission band 2310 provided for each slot machine 2010. The lighting number data indicating the number of lit LEDs 2351, the data received from each slot machine 2010, and the like are temporarily stored.
- the hard disk drive 2205 stores light emission number determination table data indicating a plurality of types of light emission number determination tables (bending portion light emission number determination table and linear portion light emission number determination table).
- the hard disk drive 2205 stores point number determination table data that is referred to when determining the number of points in the common game.
- the hard disk drive 2205 stores data indicating a predetermined value and data indicating a specific value.
- a plurality of LEDs 2351 are connected to the LED drive circuit 2350. Each LED 2351 is given an identification number, and the LED drive circuit 2350 turns on and off the LED 2351 based on a signal received from the CPU 2201.
- FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing exchange information acquisition processing performed in the exchange server.
- the exchange information acquisition process is a process executed at a predetermined timing.
- the CPU 2341 acquires the latest exchange information via the Internet 2015 by executing the exchange information acquisition program stored in the ROM 2342 (step S22001).
- M N that the currency amount M of the United States is associated with the currency amount N of another country.
- exchange information after subtracting the commission is determined (step S22022).
- the amount of money in a country other than the US is multiplied by a value obtained by subtracting the exchange fee rate indicated by the fee data (0.02 in this embodiment) from 1 Determine exchange information after subtraction. For example, if the acquired exchange information shows that 1 dollar is equivalent to 100 yen, $ 0.98 obtained by multiplying 1 dollar by (1-0.02) should be equivalent to 100 yen Is determined as exchange information after subtracting the fee.
- step S22022 The fee-subtracted exchange information determined in step S22022 is transmitted to each PTS terminal 2064 (step S3). After executing the process of step S22023, the CPU 2341 ends the exchange information acquisition process.
- FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing a deposit acceptance process performed in the PTS terminal shown in FIG.
- the CPU 2241 determines whether or not an input signal has been received from the bill validator 2022 or the coin counter 2021C at a predetermined timing (step S2051).
- step S2051 If it is determined in step S2051 that an input signal has been received, the CPU 2241 identifies a deposit amount based on the received input signal (step S2052). Then, the CPU 2241 transmits deposit currency amount data indicating the specified deposit amount to the slot machine 2010 having a correspondence relationship (step S2053).
- step S2051 determines whether or not an input signal has been received from the currency exchange bill discriminator 2065 (step S2054).
- step S2054 If it is determined in step S2054 that the input signal has been received, the CPU 2241, based on the currency type data and the currency amount data included in the received input signal, the amount of money received and the bill received by the exchange bill discriminator 2065.
- the type is specified (step S2055).
- the CPU 2241 calculates the exchange fee based on the converted currency amount data indicating the converted currency amount calculated in step S2056 and the exchange fee calculated value data indicating the exchange fee calculated value stored in the CPU 2241 (step S2058). ).
- the exchange fee is the converted currency amount calculated in step S2056 (for example, $ 98), the exchange fee calculation value P / 1 ⁇ P (P is the exchange fee rate (0.02 in this example)) (this In the embodiment, the exchange fee calculation value corresponds to an amount (for example, 2 dollars) multiplied by 2/98).
- the CPU 2241 transmits exchange fee data indicating the exchange fee to the progressive server 2266 (step S2059).
- step S2053 or step S2059 When the process of step S2053 or step S2059 is executed, or when it is determined that the input signal is not received in step S2054, the CPU 2241 determines whether or not the exchange information after subtracting the fee has been received from the exchange server 2262. Judgment is made (step S2060).
- the exchange server 2262 that has received the exchange information determines the exchange information after the fee subtraction based on the received exchange information, and the determined exchange information after the fee subtraction is transmitted to the PTS terminal 2064. is doing. In other words, the exchange server 2262 performs processing related to the collection of the exchange fee.
- the process related to the collection of the exchange fee may be performed by the PTS terminal.
- the following configuration can be employed. That is, fee data indicating the exchange fee rate P is stored in the ROM of the PTS terminal.
- the CPU of the PTS terminal receives exchange information from the exchange server. Then, the CPU of the PTS terminal determines the exchange information after subtracting the fee based on the fee data stored in the ROM. Then, the CPU of the PTS terminal updates the exchange rate data based on the determined fee-subtracted exchange information.
- the exchange rate data is stored in the exchange server RAM, and the exchange server CPU updates the exchange rate data based on the exchange information after the fee is subtracted. It may be transmitted to the PTS terminal.
- the exchange server may receive exchange rate data from the outside.
- step S2061 If the process of step S2061 is executed, or if it is determined in step S2060 that the exchange information after subtraction of the fee has not been received, the CPU 2241 ends the deposit acceptance process.
- FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of image storage processing performed in the PTS terminal shown in FIG.
- the image data obtained by imaging with the camera 2254C is continuously stored in the hard disk drive 2246 at intervals of 0.5 seconds.
- step S2101 the CPU 2241 included in the PTS terminal 2064 determines whether an ID read signal is received from the IC card R / W 2253. When determining that the ID read signal has been received, the CPU 2241 stores the reception time T1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 2243 (step S2102).
- step S2101 If it is determined in step S2101 that an ID read signal has not been received, or after the processing in step S2102, the CPU 2241 determines whether or not a card normal removal signal has been received from the IC card R / W 2253 (step S2103). ). When determining that the card normal takeout signal has been received from the IC card R / W 2253, the CPU 2241 stores the reception time T2 in a predetermined area of the RAM 2243 (step S2104).
- step S2105 the CPU 2241 sets the area of the hard disk drive 2246 that stores the image data from the reception time T1 to the reception time T2 as an erasable area.
- the CPU 2241 sets the image data to which the time stamp from the reception time T1 to the reception time T2 is given to an erasable state. If it is determined in step S2103 that a normal card removal signal has not been received from the IC card R / W 2253, or after the processing in step S2105, this subroutine is terminated. Note that the image data stored in the area set as the erasable area of the hard disk drive 2246 is erased when the storable area is less than 100 MB.
- FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of card entry / exit processing executed in the IC card reader / writer.
- the IC card R / W 2253 determines whether or not an IC card is inserted (step S2111). When determining that the IC card is inserted, the IC card R / W 2253 reads the customer ID from the IC card. Next, in step S2113, the IC card R / W 2253 transmits an ID read signal indicating that the customer ID has been read to the PTS terminal 2064. If it is determined in step S2111 that an IC card has been inserted and the customer ID has already been read, the process moves to step S2114 without performing the processes in steps S2112 and S2113.
- the customer ID corresponds to the identification data of the present invention.
- the ID read signal corresponds to the detection signal of the present invention.
- step S2114 the IC card R / W 2253 determines whether the IC card has been normally removed. If it is determined that the IC card has been normally removed, the IC card R / W 2253 transmits a card normal removal signal to the PTS terminal 2064 (step S2115). If it is determined in step S2111 that the IC card is not inserted, if it is determined in step S2114 that the IC card has not been normally removed, or after the processing in step S2115, this subroutine is terminated.
- the normal card removal signal corresponds to the non-detection signal of the present invention.
- FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a slot machine game execution process performed in the slot machine.
- Data transmission / reception between the slot machine 2010 and the progressive server 2266 is performed via the PTS terminal 2064.
- the slot machine 2010 and the progressive server 2266 directly transmit data, etc. It shall be described as transmitting and receiving.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not the common game flag is set (step S2200).
- FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of flag set processing.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not a common game execution signal (see FIG. 84) has been received from the progressive server 2266 via the PTS terminal 2064 at a predetermined timing (step S2250).
- the main CPU 2041 When determining that the common game execution signal has not been received, the main CPU 2041 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the common game execution signal has been received, the main CPU 2041 sets a common game flag (step S2251), and ends the present subroutine.
- the common game flag is a flag indicating that a condition for executing the common game is satisfied.
- step S2200 When it is determined in step S2200 in FIG. 79 that the common game flag is not set, the main CPU 2041 performs a normal game execution process (step S2201).
- the normal game execution process will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.
- step S2202 when determining that the common game flag is set, the main CPU 2041 performs a common game execution process (step S2202).
- the common game execution process will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not a bonus payout signal (see FIG. 86) has been received from the progressive server 2266 via the PTS terminal 2064 (step S2203).
- the main CPU 2041 pays out coins (step S2204).
- a bonus payout signal including information indicating the first winning slot machine 2010 is received, a first predetermined number of coins are paid out.
- a bonus payout signal including information indicating the second winning slot machine 2010 is received, a second predetermined number of coins are paid out.
- the first certain number is a numerical value larger than the second certain number. That is, the number of coins paid out to the first winning slot machine 2010 is larger than the number of coins paid out to the second winning slot machine 2010.
- the main CPU 2041 After performing the process of step S2204 or when determining in step S2203 that the bonus payout signal has not been received, the main CPU 2041 stores the currency amount data (payment currency amount data, converted currency amount data) at the PTS terminal 2064. It is determined whether or not it has been received from (step S2205). That is, it is determined whether or not either the deposit currency amount data transmitted in step S2053 or the converted currency amount data transmitted in step S2057 has been received.
- step S2206 When determining in step S2205 that currency amount data has been received, the main CPU 2041 updates the number of credits based on the received currency amount data (step S2206). That is, a process of adding a credit number equivalent to the currency amount indicated by the received currency amount data to the credit number stored in the RAM 2043 is performed. The number of credits equivalent to the currency amount indicated by the received currency amount data corresponds to the BET value in the present invention. After performing the process of step S2206 or when determining in step S2205 that currency amount data has not been received, the main CPU 2041 ends this subroutine.
- FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of normal game execution processing.
- FIG. 82A to FIG. 82C are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between the combination of symbols rearranged on the winning line and the number of payouts.
- FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating an example of symbols rearranged in the display block.
- step S2300 If it is determined in step S2300 that the predetermined time T is not exceeded, the main CPU 2041 shifts the processing to step S2302. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2300 that the time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time T, the main CPU 2041 transmits a game pause signal to the progressive server 2266 via the PTS terminal 2064 (step S2301).
- the game pause signal includes the identification number of the slot machine 2010.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not a coin has been bet (step S2302). In this process, the main CPU 2041 outputs an input signal output from the 1-BET switch 2026S when the 1-BET button 2026 is operated, or is output from the maximum BET switch 2027S when the maximum BET button 2027 is operated. It is determined whether an input signal is received. If it is determined that no coin has been bet, the process returns to step S2300.
- step S2302 if it is determined in step S2302 that a coin has been bet, the main CPU 2041 performs a process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 2043 according to the number of coins bet (step S2303). If the number of coins bet is larger than the number of credits stored in the RAM 2043, the process returns to step S2300 without performing the process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 2043. In addition, when the number of coins bet exceeds the upper limit (three in this embodiment) that can be bet on one game, a process of subtracting the number of credits stored in the RAM 2043 is performed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S2304.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not the start button 2023 is turned on (step S14). In this process, the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not an input signal output from the start switch 2023S when the start button 2023 is pressed is received. If it is determined that the start button 2023 is not turned on, the process returns to step S23900. When the start button 2023 is not turned on (for example, when an instruction to end the game is input without the start button 2023 being turned on), the main CPU 2041 cancels the subtraction result in step S2303. .
- step S2304 determines whether the start button 2023 has been turned ON. If it is determined in step S2304 that the start button 2023 has been turned ON, the time measured by the timer 2037 is cleared (step S2305), and the time measurement by the timer 2037 is started (step S2306).
- the main CPU 2041 transmits game medium number information indicating the number of coins bet to the progressive server 2266 via the PTS terminal 2064 (step S2307).
- the game medium number information includes the identification number of the slot machine 2010.
- step S2308 the main CPU 2041 performs symbol rearrangement processing.
- the main CPU 2041 starts scroll display of symbols in the display block 2028.
- the main CPU 2041 executes the symbol determination program described above, determines symbols to be rearranged, and rearranges symbols in the display block 2028.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not a prize has been established (step S2309). As shown in FIG. 83, a total of nine symbols of 3 rows and 3 columns can be rearranged in the display block 2328 according to this embodiment. A winning line WL is set in the middle row. When the symbols rearranged on the winning line WL are in a predetermined combination, it is determined that a prize has been established, and coins are paid out.
- the combination of symbols and the number of coins when the number of coins bet is 1, when the number is 2, and when the number is 3.
- the relationship with the number of payouts is different.
- “3 bar” is the symbol 2701 shown in FIG.
- “1 bar” is the symbol 2702 shown in FIG.
- Anybar” is a symbol of “3 bar”, “2 bar”, and “1 bar”.
- winning is defined as at least one symbol of “3 bar ⁇ 3”, “2 bar ⁇ 3”, “1 bar ⁇ 3”, and “anybar ⁇ 3”. This combination is established on the winning line WL (see FIGS. 82A and 82B).
- winning is defined as a combination of at least one of the symbols “blue7 ⁇ 3”, “red7 ⁇ 3”, and “white7 ⁇ 3” on the winning line WL. (See FIG. 82C).
- the main CPU 2041 performs processing related to coin payout (step S2310).
- the main CPU 2041 pays out the number of coins determined based on data (see FIGS. 82A to 82C) indicating the relationship between the combination of symbols and the number of coins to be paid out. For example, in a game in which one coin is bet, as shown in FIG. 83, when the symbol combination “3bar-1bar-1bar” is rearranged on the winning line WL, the combination is “anybar ⁇ Since it corresponds to “anybar-anybar”, 10 coins will be paid out.
- the main CPU 2041 performs a process of adding the number of credits corresponding to the determined payout amount in the RAM 2043.
- the main CPU 2041 sends a control signal to the hopper 2066 to pay out coins in an amount corresponding to the determined payout amount.
- step S2309 When it is determined in step S2309 that a prize has not been established, or after executing the process of step S2310, the main CPU 2041 ends this subroutine.
- FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a subroutine of common game execution processing.
- the main CPU 2041 executes the processes of steps S2350 to S2353, and these processes are substantially the same as the processes of steps S2304 and S2308 to S2310 in FIG.
- steps S2304 and S2308 to S2310 in FIG. 81 Only parts different from steps S2304 and S2308 to S2310 in FIG. 81 will be described.
- step S2352 When it is determined in step S2352 that a prize has not been established, or after executing the process of step S2353, the main CPU 2041 transmits symbol information to the progressive server 2266 via the PTS terminal 2064 (step S2352). S2354).
- the symbol information is information indicating the symbols rearranged in step S2351.
- the main CPU 2041 determines whether or not a jackpot payout signal has been received from the progressive server 2266 via the PTS terminal 2064 (step S2355).
- the jackpot payout signal is sent from the progressive server 2266 to the slot machine 2010 via the PTS terminal 2064 when all the LEDs 2351 included in the connected light emission band 2310 provided for any of the slot machines 2010 are turned on. This is a signal transmitted to the terminal (see FIG. 88).
- the jackpot payout signal includes EVENT Information indicating the accumulated value for TIME is included.
- the main CPU 2041 When determining that the jackpot payout signal has been received, the main CPU 2041 performs jackpot payout processing (step S2356). In this process, the main CPU 2041 determines that the EVENT included in the jackpot payout signal. Based on the information indicating the accumulated value for TIME, coins corresponding to the accumulated value for EVENT TIME are paid out. Examples of the processing performed by the main CPU 2041 in step S2356 include output of a notification sound from the speaker 2029, lighting of the lamp 2030, printing of a barcoded ticket 2039 on which a barcode indicating the number of payouts is printed. .
- step S2355 When it is determined in step S2355 that the jackpot payout signal has not been received, or after executing the process of step S2356, the main CPU 2041 ends this subroutine.
Abstract
Description
このようなゲーミングシステムにおいては、複数のゲーミングマシンがネットワークでリンクされている。そして、各ゲーミングマシンに投入された貨幣に応じた金額の一部がプールされ、プログレッシブジャックポットに入賞したゲーミングマシンに対して、プールされた金額に応じた貨幣が払い出される。このようなゲーミングシステムにおいてゲームを行うプレーヤは、このようなプログレッシブジャックポットに係る利益を享受することを大きな目的としてゲームを行っており、近年、このようなゲームは、プレーヤの人気を集めている。
そして、このようなゲーミングシステムにおいて、プレーヤが複数種類の通貨に対応する貨幣を投入することができるとすると、使用される通貨の種類が複数であることに起因して、金額をプールする際に弊害が生じると考えられたのである。
を備えることを特徴とする。
(A)前記紙幣識別装置により識別された紙幣の種類を示す紙幣種類データと、該紙幣の量を示す紙幣量データとを、前記通信回線を介して、前記紙幣識別装置から受信する処理、及び、
(B)前記処理(A)により受信した紙幣種類データが示す紙幣の種類が前記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、前記処理(A)により受信した紙幣量データが示す紙幣の量と、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後紙幣量データを、前記通信回線を介して、前記コントローラに送信する処理。
(A)前記入場用カードリーダにより読み取られた従業員識別データを記憶する処理、
(B)前記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に記憶する処理、
(C)前記処理(B)により記憶された夫々の画像データと、前記処理(A)により記憶された従業員識別データに対応する顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、特定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する処理、及び、
(D)前記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、前記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを前記出力装置から出力する処理を実行するようにプログラムされていることを特徴とする。
ここで、上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に従業員のみが配置されている場合に用いられるシステムである。
上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データが示す顔の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物ということになる。プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを出力装置から出力する。すなわち、出力装置には、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物、すなわち、従業員識別データの記憶された従業員用のカード(例えば、IDカード)を所持していない人物の顔画像データ、及び/又は、その人物の従業員識別データが出力される。その結果、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物(従業員識別データの記憶された従業員用のカードを所持していない人物)を特定することができる。
すなわち、上記通貨価値変換装置は、ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置との夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されている。また、上記通貨価値変換装置は、基本通貨の量と、上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備える。また、上記通貨価値変換装置は、(A)上記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、上記通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する処理、及び、(B)上記処理(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、上記通信回線を介して、上記コントローラに送信する処理を実行するようにプログラムされたプロセッサを備える。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合には、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
すなわち、上記通貨価値変換装置は、ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置と、基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係を示す為替情報を所定のタイミングで繰り返し取得する為替サーバとの夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されている。また、上記通貨価値変換装置は、上記基本通貨の量と、上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備える。また、上記通貨価値変換装置は、(A)上記為替サーバが為替情報を取得する毎に、上記為替サーバから、上記通信回線を介して、為替情報に基づいて特定される情報を受信する処理、(B)上記処理(A)により受信した情報に基づいて、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータを更新する処理、(C)上記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、上記通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する処理、及び、(D)上記処理(C)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記処理(C)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、上記通信回線を介して、上記コントローラに送信する処理を実行するようにプログラムされたプロセッサを備える。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合には、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
従って、為替サーバが為替情報を取得する毎に、為替レートデータを最新の為替レートを示すものとすることができる。その結果、基本通貨以外の通貨の量を基本通貨の量に変換する際に、その時点における各国の現実の通貨価値を、より反映させることができる。
すなわち、上記通貨価値変換装置は、ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置との夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されている。また、上記通貨価値変換装置は、基本通貨の量と、上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備える。また、上記制御方法は、(A)上記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、上記通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する段階、及び、(B)上記段階(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記段階(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、上記通信回線を介して、上記コントローラに送信する段階を含む。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合には、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
すなわち、上記通貨価値変換装置は、ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置と、基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係を示す為替情報を所定のタイミングで繰り返し取得する為替サーバとの夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されている。また、上記通貨価値変換装置は、上記基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備える。また、上記制御方法は、(A)上記為替サーバが為替情報を取得する毎に、上記為替サーバから、上記通信回線を介して、為替情報に基づいて特定される情報を受信する段階、(B)上記段階(A)により受信した情報に基づいて、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータを更新する段階、(C)上記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、上記通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する段階、及び、(D)上記段階(C)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記段階(C)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、上記通信回線を介して、上記コントローラに送信する段階を含む。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合には、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
従って、為替サーバが為替情報を取得する毎に、為替レートデータを最新の為替レートを示すものとすることができる。その結果、基本通貨以外の通貨の量を基本通貨の量に変換する際に、その時点における各国の現実の通貨価値を、より反映させることができる。
また、例えば、一定の金銭を得たプレーヤ(ゲームで賞を得たプレーヤ)の顔の画像の撮像を、賞が発生したタイミングで開始することとすると、撮影したタイミングにプレーヤ綾が入れ替わってしまっている可能性がある。
また、所定の条件を満たす画像データは、消去されないため、所定の条件を満たす画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができる。
このように、メモリに記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡装置は、カードリーダを備えたゲーミングマシンとの通信を可能とする接続部と、上記ゲーミングマシンでプレイするプレーヤの顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、下記(A)~(E)の処理を実行するようにプログラムされたコントローラとを備える。(A)上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する処理、(B)他のカードと区別するための識別データを上記カードリーダにより読み取った旨の検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する処理、(C)該識別データを上記カードリーダにより検出することができなくなった旨を示す非検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する処理、(D)上記検出信号を受信してから上記非検出信号を受信するまでに上記メモリに記憶した画像データを、消去可能な状態に設定する処理、及び、(E)上記メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量より少なくなった場合には、上記メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する処理。
その後、メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量よりも少なくなった場合には、メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する。その結果、メモリに記憶されている画像データの量を比較的少なくすることができる。カードリーダから検出信号を受信した後、非検出信号を受信した場合、カードは置き去られていない。従って、この間に記憶した画像データを消去しても問題は少ない。一方、カードリーダから検出信号を受信した後、非検出信号を受信しない場合には、カードが置き忘れとなっていることとなる。しかし、この場合、画像データは消去されない。従って、この画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができる。このように、メモリに記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡装置は、ゲーミングマシンとの通信を可能とする接続部と、上記ゲーミングマシンでプレイするプレーヤの顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、下記(A)~(D)の処理を実行するようにプログラムされたコントローラとを備える。(A)上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する処理、(B)異常を検出した旨を示す異常検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する処理、(C)上記メモリに記憶されてからの期間が、上記異常検出信号を受信することなく所定期間以上となった画像データを、消去可能な状態に設定する処理、及び、(D)上記メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量より少なくなった場合には、上記メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する処理。
その後、メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量よりも少なくなった場合には、メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する。その結果、メモリに記憶されている画像データの量を比較的少なくすることができる。一方、メモリに記憶されてからの期間が、所定期間以上となった画像データであっても、その期間中に異常検出信号を受信している場合、当該画像データは消去されない。すなわち、異常が検出される所定期間前から異常が検出されまでに撮像された画像の画像データは消去されない。この期間においては、異常が検出されるような行動(例えば、ゲーミングマシンに衝撃を加える、ゲーミングマシンに異常な電圧を加える)等を行っているプレーヤの画像が撮像されている可能性が高い。従って、このような画像データについては、消去しないこととしたため、この画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができ、異常な行動をしていたプレーヤを特定することができる。
このように、メモリに記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に設置された複数の個人追跡装置と、プロセッサを備えたサーバと、上記施設内に設置された複数のカードリーダとを備える。各上記個人追跡装置は、ゲーミングマシンとの通信を可能とする接続部と、上記ゲーミングマシンに対して作業をする従業員の顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、コントローラとを備える。上記コントローラは、(A)異常を検出した旨を示す異常検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する処理、(B)上記異常検出信号を受信した場合に、上記サーバに異常信号を送信する処理を実行するようにプログラムされている。上記プロセッサは、(a)いずれかの上記カードリーダにより上記施設内に存在する1又は複数の従業員が所有するカードから読み取られた識別データを取得する処理、(b)上記異常信号の送信元の上記個人追跡装置に一番近いカードリーダを特定する処理、(c)上記処理(b)により特定されたカードリーダから取得された識別データを特定する処理、及び、(d)上記処理(c)により特定された識別データに対応する従業員用端末との通信を開始する処理を実行するようにプログラムされている。上記コントローラは、さらに、(C)少なくとも上記異常検出信号を受信した後に上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する処理、(D)上記異常検出信号を受信してから、上記ゲーミングマシンの復旧が完了した旨を示す復旧完了信号を上記ゲーミングマシンから受信するまでの期間を計測する処理、及び、(E)上記異常検出信号を受信してから、上記復旧完了信号を受信するまでに上記メモリに記憶した画像データと、上記処理(D)により計測した期間を示す期間データとを上記サーバに送信する処理を実行するようにプログラムされている。
すなわち、サーバは、異常検出信号を出力したゲーミングマシンに一番近い位置にいる従業員が所有する従業員用端末との通信を開始する。従って、異常検出信号を出力したゲーミングマシンに一番近い位置にいる従業員に対して、そのゲーミングマシンにいち早く向かわせる指示を行うこと可能になる。
すなわち、サーバには、ゲーミングマシンの異常を検出してから復旧するまでの期間(異常検出信号を受信してから復旧完了信号を受信するまでの期間)と、その期間において作業を行った従業員の顔の画像を示す画像データとが送信される。その結果、従業員になりすました者が作業をしているといったことがないかを確認できる。また、どの従業員がゲーミングマシンを復旧させるまでの期間が短いかを評価することができる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡装置の制御方法において制御される上記個人追跡装置は、ゲーミングマシンでプレイするプレーヤの顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、コントローラとを備える。上記制御方法は、(A)上記コントローラが、上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(B)上記コントローラが、上記メモリに記憶した画像データのうち、所定の条件を満たさない画像データを、消去可能な状態に設定する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(C)上記コントローラが、上記メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量より少なくなった場合には、上記メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する段階を含む。
また、所定の条件を満たす画像データは、消去されないため、所定の条件を満たす画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができる。
このように、メモリに記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡装置の制御方法において制御される上記個人追跡装置は、カードリーダを備えたゲーミングマシンとの通信を可能とする接続部と、上記ゲーミングマシンでプレイするプレーヤの顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、コントローラとを備える。上記制御方法は、(A)上記コントローラが、上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(B)上記コントローラが、他のカードと区別するための識別データを上記カードリーダにより読み取った旨の検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(C)上記コントローラが、該識別データを上記カードリーダにより検出することができなくなった旨を示す非検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(D)上記コントローラが、上記検出信号を受信してから上記非検出信号を受信するまでに上記メモリに記憶した画像データを、消去可能な状態に設定する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(E)上記コントローラが、上記メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量より少なくなった場合には、上記メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する段階を含む。
その後、メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量よりも少なくなった場合には、メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する。その結果、メモリに記憶されている画像データの量を比較的少なくすることができる。カードリーダから検出信号を受信した後、非検出信号を受信した場合、カードは置き去られていない。従って、この間に記憶した画像データを消去しても問題は少ない。一方、カードリーダから検出信号を受信した後、非検出信号を受信しない場合には、カードが置き忘れとなっていることとなる。しかし、この場合、画像データは消去されない。従って、この画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができる。このように、メモリに記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡装置の制御方法において制御される上記個人追跡装置は、ゲーミングマシンとの通信を可能とする接続部と、上記ゲーミングマシンでプレイするプレーヤの顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、コントローラとを備える。上記制御方法は、(A)上記コントローラが、上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(B)上記コントローラが、異常を検出した旨を示す異常検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(C)上記コントローラが、上記メモリに記憶されてからの期間が、上記異常検出信号を受信することなく所定期間以上となった画像データを、消去可能な状態に設定する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(D)上記コントローラが、上記メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量より少なくなった場合には、上記メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する段階を含む。
その後、メモリの記憶可能領域が所定量よりも少なくなった場合には、メモリに記憶されている画像データのうち、消去可能な状態に設定されている画像データを消去する。その結果、メモリに記憶されている画像データの量を比較的少なくすることができる。一方、メモリに記憶されてからの期間が、所定期間以上となった画像データであっても、その期間中に異常検出信号を受信している場合、当該画像データは消去されない。すなわち、異常が検出される所定期間前から異常が検出されまでに撮像された画像の画像データは消去されない。この期間においては、異常が検出されるような行動(例えば、ゲーミングマシンに衝撃を加える、ゲーミングマシンに異常な電圧を加える)等を行っているプレーヤの画像が撮像されている可能性が高い。従って、このような画像データについては、消去しないこととしたため、この画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができ、異常な行動をしていたプレーヤを特定することができる。
このように、メモリに記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡システムの制御方法において制御される上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に設置された複数の個人追跡装置と、プロセッサを備えたサーバと、上記施設内に設置された複数のカードリーダとを備える。各上記個人追跡装置は、ゲーミングマシンとの通信を可能とする接続部と、上記ゲーミングマシンに対して作業をする従業員の顔を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、メモリと、コントローラとを備える。上記制御方法は、(A)上記コントローラが、異常を検出した旨を示す異常検出信号を、上記接続部を介して上記ゲーミングマシンから受信する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(B)上記コントローラが、上記異常検出信号を受信した場合に、上記サーバに異常信号を送信する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(a)上記プロセッサが、いずれかの上記カードリーダにより上記施設内に存在する1又は複数の従業員が所有するカードから読み取られた識別データを取得する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(b)上記プロセッサが、上記異常信号の送信元の上記個人追跡装置に一番近いカードリーダを特定する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(c)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(b)により特定されたカードリーダから取得された識別データを特定する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(d)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(c)により特定された識別データに対応する従業員用端末との通信を開始する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(C)上記コントローラが、少なくとも上記異常検出信号を受信した後に上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に上記メモリに記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(D)上記コントローラが、上記異常検出信号を受信してから、上記ゲーミングマシンの復旧が完了した旨を示す復旧完了信号を上記ゲーミングマシンから受信するまでの期間を計測する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(E)上記コントローラが、上記異常検出信号を受信してから、上記復旧完了信号を受信するまでに上記メモリに記憶した画像データと、上記段階(D)により計測した期間を示す期間データとを上記サーバに送信する段階とを含む。
すなわち、サーバは、異常検出信号を出力したゲーミングマシンに一番近い位置にいる従業員が所有する従業員用端末との通信を開始する。従って、異常検出信号を出力したゲーミングマシンに一番近い位置にいる従業員に対して、そのゲーミングマシンにいち早く向かわせる指示を行うこと可能になる。
このようなゲーミングシステムにおいては、複数のゲーミングマシンがネットワークでリンクされている。そして、各ゲーミングマシンに投入された貨幣に応じた金額の一部がプールされ、プログレッシブジャックポットに入賞したゲーミングマシンに対して、プールされた金額に応じた貨幣が払い出される。このようなゲーミングシステムにおいてゲームを行うプレーヤは、このようなプログレッシブジャックポットに係る利益を享受することを大きな目的としてゲームを行っており、近年、このようなゲームは、プレーヤの人気を集めている。
そして、このようなゲーミングシステムにおいて、プレーヤが複数種類の通貨に対応する貨幣を投入することができるとすると、使用される通貨の種類が複数であることに起因して、金額をプールする際に弊害が生じると考えられたのである。
すなわち、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置と、コントローラとを備えるゲーミングマシンと、上記通貨識別装置と上記コントローラとの夫々と通信回線を介して接続されており、基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリと、プロセッサとを備える通貨価値変換装置とを備え、上記プロセッサは、(A)上記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、上記通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する処理、及び、(B)上記処理(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、上記通信回線を介して、上記コントローラに送信する処理を実行し、上記コントローラは、(a)上記処理(B)により送信される変換後通貨量データを受信する処理、(b)上記プロセッサが上記処理(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量の全部又は一部を、蓄積値として累積的に計数する処理、(c)上記プロセッサが上記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と等価な基本通貨の量から上記所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量を減じて得られる通貨の量を、BET値として、上記BET値に基づいてゲームを実行する処理、及び、(d)所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、上記蓄積値に基づいて、上記ゲーミングマシンに対して、遊技媒体を払い出す処理を実行する。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合であっても、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
すなわち、上記ゲーミングシステムによれば、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨が使用されることにより、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量の全部又は一部が蓄積値として、当該ゲーミングマシンにプールされることになる。そして、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨を使用した際の所定の手数料を原資としたボーナスを付与する。従来とは原資が異なるボーナスが存在することにより、遊技の興趣の向上を図ることができる。
上記処理(b)は、上記プロセッサが上記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と等価な基本通貨の量のうちの、所定の割合に相当する基本通貨の量が、予め定められた基本通貨単位量の自然数倍とならないことを条件として、該所定の割合に相当する基本通貨の量を上記基本通貨単位量で除して得られる端数量を、蓄積値として累積的に計数する処理である。
すなわち、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置と、コントローラとを備える複数のゲーミングマシンと、制御部を備えるプログレッシブサーバと、上記通貨識別装置と上記コントローラと上記制御部との夫々と通信回線を介して接続されており、基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリと、プロセッサとを備える通貨価値変換装置とを備え、上記プロセッサは、(A)上記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、上記通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する処理、及び、(B)上記処理(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、上記通信回線を介して、上記コントローラに送信する処理を実行し、上記コントローラは、(a)上記処理(B)により送信される変換後通貨量データを受信する処理、及び、(b)上記プロセッサが上記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と等価な基本通貨の量から、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量を減じて得られる基本通貨の量を、BET値として、上記BET値に基づいてゲームを実行する処理を実行し、上記制御部は、(I)上記プロセッサが上記処理(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量を、蓄積値として累積的に計数する処理、及び、(II)所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、上記蓄積値に基づいて、上記複数のゲーミングマシンのうち何れかのゲーミングマシンに対して、遊技媒体を払い出す処理を実行する。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合であっても、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
すなわち、上記ゲーミングシステムによれば、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨が使用されることにより、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量が蓄積値としてプールされることになる。そして、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、複数のゲーミングマシンのうち何れかのゲーミングマシンに対して、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨を使用した際の所定の手数料を原資としたボーナスを付与する。従来とは原資が異なるボーナスが存在することにより、遊技の興趣の向上を図ることができる。
上記処理(II)は、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、上記蓄積値に基づいて、上記複数のゲーミングマシンのうち、受け入れられた通貨の種類が上記基本通貨以外の通貨である通貨識別装置を備えるゲーミングマシンに対して、遊技媒体を払い出す処理である。
すなわち、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(A)基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備える通貨価値変換装置が、通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(B)上記通貨価値変換装置が、上記段階(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記段階(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、通信回線を介して、ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラに送信する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(a)上記ゲーミングマシンが、上記段階(B)により送信される変換後通貨量データを受信する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(b)上記ゲーミングマシンが、上記通貨価値変換装置が上記段階(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量の全部又は一部を、蓄積値として累積的に計数する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(c)上記ゲーミングマシンが、上記通貨価値変換装置が上記段階(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と等価な基本通貨の量から上記所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量を減じて得られる通貨の量を、BET値として、上記BET値に基づいてゲームを実行する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(d)上記ゲーミングマシンが、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、上記蓄積値に基づいて、上記ゲーミングマシンに対して、遊技媒体を払い出す段階を含む。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合であっても、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
すなわち、上記ゲーム制御方法によれば、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨が使用されることにより、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量の全部又は一部が蓄積値として、当該ゲーミングマシンにプールされることになる。そして、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨を使用した際の所定の手数料を原資としたボーナスを付与する。従来とは原資が異なるボーナスが存在することにより、遊技の興趣の向上を図ることができる。
すなわち、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(A)基本通貨の量と上記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が上記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備える通貨価値変換装置が、通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、通信回線を介して、上記通貨識別装置から受信する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(B)上記通貨価値変換装置が、上記段階(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、上記段階(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、上記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、通信回線を介して、ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラに送信する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(a)上記ゲーミングマシンが、上記段階(B)により送信される変換後通貨量データを受信する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(b)上記ゲーミングマシンが、上記通貨価値変換装置が上記段階(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と等価な基本通貨の量から所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量を減じて得られる基本通貨の量を、BET値として、上記BET値に基づいてゲームを実行する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(I)プログレッシブサーバが、上記通貨価値変換装置が上記段階(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が上記基本通貨ではない場合、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量を、蓄積値として累積的に計数する段階を含む。また、上記ゲーム制御方法は、(II)上記プログレッシブサーバが、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、上記蓄積値に基づいて、複数の上記ゲーミングマシンのうち何れかのゲーミングマシンに対して、遊技媒体を払い出す段階を含む。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(例えば、米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステムを構築しようとする場合であっても、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
例えば、従業員の管理が行き届いておらず、ネームプレートの付け忘れが常態化しているカジノ店においては、従業員になりすます者が発生し、不正に金銭を搾取しようとする可能性があるといった問題があった。また、ネームプレートを付け忘れている従業員がいると、客は、その者を従業員と認識できなくなり、満足のいくサービスを提供できなくなる可能性があるといった問題があった。
すなわち、上記個人追跡システムは、サーバと、施設への入場ゲートに設置された入場用カードリーダと、上記施設内を撮像可能に設置されたカメラとを備える。上記サーバは、従業員を識別するための従業員識別データと従業員の顔の画像を示す顔画像データとが対応付けて記憶されているメモリと、出力装置と、プロセッサとを備える。上記プロセッサは、(A)上記入場用カードリーダにより読み取られた従業員識別データを記憶する処理、(B)上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に記憶する処理、(C)上記処理(B)により記憶された夫々の画像データと、上記処理(A)により記憶された従業員識別データに対応する顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、特定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する処理、及び、(D)上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを上記出力装置から出力する処理を実行するようにプログラムされている。
ここで、上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に従業員のみが配置されている場合に用いられるシステムである。
上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データが示す顔の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物ということになる。プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを出力装置から出力する。すなわち、出力装置には、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物、すなわち、従業員識別データの記憶された従業員用のカード(例えば、IDカード)を所持していない人物の顔画像データ、及び/又は、その人物の従業員識別データが出力される。その結果、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物(従業員識別データの記憶された従業員用のカードを所持していない人物)を特定することができる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡システムは、サーバと、施設への入場ゲートに設置された入場用カードリーダと、上記施設内を撮像可能に設置されたカメラとを備える。上記サーバは、従業員を識別するための従業員識別データと従業員の顔の画像を示す顔画像データとが対応付けて記憶されているメモリと、出力装置と、プロセッサとを備える。上記プロセッサは、(A)上記入場用カードリーダにより読み取られた従業員識別データを記憶する処理、(B)上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に記憶する処理、(C)上記処理(B)により記憶された夫々の画像データと、上記処理(A)により記憶された従業員識別データに対応する顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、特定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する処理、(D)上記処理(C)により上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データと、上記メモリに記憶されている顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、上記特定の条件を満たす否かを判断する処理、(E)上記処理(D)により上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データを客画像データとして上記メモリに記憶する、又は、消去する処理、及び、(F)上記処理(D)により上記特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、上記処理(D)により上記特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを上記出力装置から出力する処理を実行するようにプログラムされている。
ここで、上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に従業員と客とが存在する場合に用いられるシステムである。
この段階において、上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データが示す顔の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物ということになる。すなわち、上記人物は、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員であるか客であるかということになる。
次に、プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データと、メモリに記憶されている顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、上記特定の条件を満たす否かを判断する。
この段階において、上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データが示す顔の人物は、客であるということになる。プロセッサは、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データを客画像データとしてメモリに記憶する、又は、消去する。メモリに記憶することにより、どのような客が施設内にいたかを確認することが可能になる。また、消去することにより、メモリの空き容量を確保することが可能になる。
一方、この段階において、上記特定の条件を満たす場合、上記特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データが示す画像の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員であるということになる。プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを出力装置から出力する。すなわち、出力装置には、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員の顔画像データ、及び/又は、その従業員の従業員識別データが出力される。その結果、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員を特定することができる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡システムの制御方法において制御される上記個人追跡システムは、サーバと、施設への入場ゲートに設置された入場用カードリーダと、上記施設内を撮像可能に設置されたカメラとを備える。上記サーバは、従業員を識別するための従業員識別データと従業員の顔の画像を示す顔画像データとが対応付けて記憶されているメモリと、出力装置と、プロセッサとを備える。上記制御方法は、(A)上記プロセッサが、上記入場用カードリーダにより読み取られた従業員識別データを記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(B)上記プロセッサが、上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に記憶する段階含む。また、上記制御方法は、(C)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(B)により記憶された夫々の画像データと、上記段階(A)により記憶された従業員識別データに対応する顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、特定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する段階含む。また、上記制御方法は、(D)上記プロセッサが、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを上記出力装置から出力する段階を含む。
ここで、上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に従業員のみが配置されている場合に用いられるシステムである。
上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データが示す顔の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物ということになる。プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを出力装置から出力する。すなわち、出力装置には、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物、すなわち、従業員識別データの記憶された従業員用のカード(例えば、IDカード)を所持していない人物の顔画像データ、及び/又は、その人物の従業員識別データが出力される。その結果、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物(従業員識別データの記憶された従業員用のカードを所持していない人物)を特定することができる。
すなわち、上記個人追跡システムの制御方法において制御される上記個人追跡システムは、サーバと、施設への入場ゲートに設置された入場用カードリーダと、上記施設内を撮像可能に設置されたカメラとを備える。上記サーバは、従業員を識別するための従業員識別データと従業員の顔の画像を示す顔画像データとが対応付けて記憶されているメモリと、出力装置と、プロセッサとを備える。上記制御方法は、(A)上記プロセッサが、上記入場用カードリーダにより読み取られた従業員識別データを記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(B)上記プロセッサが、上記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に記憶する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(C)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(B)により記憶された夫々の画像データと、上記段階(A)により記憶された従業員識別データに対応する顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、特定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(D)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(C)により上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データと、上記メモリに記憶されている顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、上記特定の条件を満たす否かを判断する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(E)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(D)により上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データを客画像データとして上記メモリに記憶する、又は、消去する段階を含む。また、上記制御方法は、(F)上記プロセッサが、上記段階(D)により上記特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、上記段階(D)により上記特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを上記出力装置から出力する段階を含む。
ここで、上記個人追跡システムは、施設内に従業員と客とが存在する場合に用いられるシステムである。
この段階において、上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データが示す顔の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない人物ということになる。すなわち、上記人物は、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員であるか客であるかということになる。
次に、プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データと、メモリに記憶されている顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、上記特定の条件を満たす否かを判断する。
この段階において、上記特定の条件を満たさない場合、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データが示す顔の人物は、客であるということになる。プロセッサは、上記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された画像データを客画像データとしてメモリに記憶する、又は、消去する。メモリに記憶することにより、どのような客が施設内にいたかを確認することが可能になる。また、消去することにより、メモリの空き容量を確保することが可能になる。
一方、この段階において、上記特定の条件を満たす場合、上記特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データが示す画像の人物は、入場用カードリーダによる従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員であるということになる。プロセッサは、特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、特定の条件を満たすと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを出力装置から出力する。すなわち、出力装置には、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員の顔画像データ、及び/又は、その従業員の従業員識別データが出力される。その結果、従業員識別データの読み取りを行っていない従業員を特定することができる。
[第1実施形態]
まず、図1を用いて、実施形態の概要について説明する。
図1は、本発明の第1実施形態に係るカジノシステムの全体像を模式的に示す概略図である。
例えば、PTS端末1700(スロットマシン1010)が設置されている国が米国である場合、日本の紙幣を紙幣識別器1022に投入すると、PTS端末1700により、為替レートに基づいて、米国の通貨への変換(両替)が行われる。そして、変換(両替)後の通貨量を示す変換後通貨量データがPTS端末1700からゲーミングマシンに対して送信される。そのため、プレーヤは、米国の通貨以外の通貨を使用して、ゲーミングマシンで遊技を行うことができる。なお、変換(両替)後の通貨量は、変換(両替)前の通貨量から、所定の手数料(以下、両替手数料ともいう)に相当する通貨量を引いた通貨量と等価である。
ボタン1045と、BETボタン(1-BETボタン1034~10-BETボタン1039)と、ライン選択ボタン(2ライン選択ボタン1040~50ライン選択ボタン1044)と、RESERVEボタン1031と、TAKE WIN/COLLECTボタン1032と、GAME RULESボタン1033とが設けられている。
Identification)によって、ICカードからのデータの読み取り及びICカードへのデータの書き込みを行うものである。ICカードR/Wは、カード挿入口1706から挿入されたICカードに記憶されているクレジット情報を非接触で読み取り、又は、ゲームの結果に応じてプレーヤに付与されるクレジットを、非接触でICカードに書き込む。
なお、PTS端末1700においては、図16に示す構成に加えて、図17に示す構成をも備えている。なお、図17においては、図16に示す構成と同一部分を重複して示しているものもあり、この場合には、図16に付した符号と同一符号を付している。
為替サーバ2862は、CPU1901と、ROM1902と、RAM1903と、通信インターフェイス1904と、通信インターフェイス1905とを備えている。通信インターフェイス1904は、通信回線を介して、PTS端末1700の通信部1734と接続される。通信インターフェイス1905は、通信回線1823を介して、インターネット1015と接続されている。ROM1902は、為替サーバ2862の動作を制御するためのシステムプログラムやインターネット1015を介して最新の為替情報を取得するための為替情報取得プログラムや恒久的なデータや両替手数料率Pを示す手数料データ等が記憶されている。また、RAM1903は、為替情報や手数料減算後為替情報等を一時的に記憶する。
メガバックスサーバ1866は、CPU1911と、ROM1912と、RAM1913と、通信インターフェイス1914と、LED駆動回路1917と、乱数発生器1916と、メモリとしてのハードディスクドライブ1915とを備えている。乱数発生器1916は、所定のタイミングで乱数を発生させる。通信インターフェイス1914は、通信回線を介して、PTS端末1700の通信部1734と接続されるとともに、通信回線を介して、カジノ店等に設置された大型共通ディスプレイ1921A、大型共通ディスプレイ1921B、小型共通ディスプレイ1922A、小型共通ディスプレイ1922Bと接続されている。ROM1912は、プログレッシブサーバ1866の動作を制御するためのシステムプログラムや恒久的なデータ等が記憶されている。また、RAM1913は、EVENT TIME用蓄積値を示すEVENT TIME用蓄積値データ、ボーナス用蓄積値を示すボーナス用蓄積値データ、各スロットマシン1010に対して設けられた連結発光帯が備えるLED1920のうち、点灯済みのLED1920の個数を示す点灯数データ、各スロットマシン1010から受信したデータ等を一時的に記憶する。
また、ハードディスクドライブ1915には、所定値を示すデータ、特定値を示すデータ、が記憶されている。
図25は、ICカードに関する処理を実行するサブルーチンである。
ICカードは、プレーヤの操作によってカード挿入口1706から挿入される。カード挿入口1706に挿入されたICカードは、ICカード搬送モジュール1253(図14)のICカード搬送用モータが駆動されることによって、ICカードの読み書きができる位置(以下、ロード位置と称する。)にまでロードされる。また、このモータの駆動によって、ICカードをスタッカー1121の位置に搬送することもできる。スタッカーは、2種類あり、通常スタッカー(図示せず)とアラートスタッカー(図示せず)とがある。いずれのスタッカーもICカードを所定の枚数だけ収容することができる。
WIN/COLLECTボタン1032を操作したか否かを判断する(ステップS1525)。プレーヤが、スロットマシン1010のTAKE WIN/COLLECTボタン1032を操作していないと判別したとき(NO)には、ステップS1525に処理を戻す。このように、ステップS1525の判断処理が繰り返し行われているときに、スロットマシン1010では、プレーヤの操作に応じてゲームが進められる。この間に、スロットマシン1010では、ゲームの進行に応じてクレジット数が変更される。
WIN/COLLECTボタン1032を操作したと判別したとき(YES)には、PTS端末1700のタイマ(図示せず)を起動する(ステップS1527)。このタイマは、ハードウエアによって構成されたものでも、ソフトウエアによって構成されたものでもよい。
図26は、ICカードをロード位置からイジェクト位置にまで搬送して排出するときの処理を実行するためのサブルーチンである。
図27は、上述した図25のステップS1543の処理で呼び出されて実行されるミニゲーム1を実行するためのサブルーチンである。したがって、本実施の形態では、ミニゲーム1は、PTS端末1700において実行される。
まず、スロットマシン1010(又はPTS端末1700)の紙幣識別器1022に紙幣が投入されたときには、紙幣の金種を判断する。例えば、投入された紙幣が、香港ドルであるか否かを判断する。上述したように、スロットマシン1010(又はPTS端末1700)の紙幣識別器1022は、金種の異なる紙幣を投入できるように構成されている。投入された紙幣の金種が特定のものであったときには、直ちに、所定の換算基準によって(換算式などを用いて)、投入された紙幣の金額に応じたクレジット数に交換される。例えば、投入された紙幣が、香港ドルである場合には、そのまま、その紙幣に定められた金額に応じたクレジット数に交換される。
図31は、PTS端末1700で実行される処理であり、スロットマシン1010の紙幣識別器1022に投入された紙幣の金種に応じて、異なる金種の金額やクレジット数に変換するためのサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。このサブルーチンは、紙幣識別器1022に紙幣が投入されたことを検出したときに呼び出されて実行される。
図29は、アラートの対象になったICカードを初期化して、新たに通常スタッカーに補充するためのサブルーチンである。この処理は、スロットマシン1010において、所定の時間以上、例えば、10分以上ゲームがされていないときに、呼び出されて実行される。このようにすることで、スロットマシン1010において行われるゲームを妨げることなく、ICカードの初期化や補充の処理を実行することができる。
図33は、上述した図25のステップS1543の処理で呼び出されて実行されるミニゲーム2を実行するためのサブルーチンである。このミニゲーム2、ミニゲーム1と同様に、PTS端末1700において実行される。なお、図27に示したミニゲーム1と同様の処理をするステップには、同一の符号を付した。
WIN/COLLECTボタン1032を操作したか否かを判断する(ステップS1691)。プレーヤが、スロットマシン1010のTAKE WIN/COLLECTボタン1032を操作していないと判別したとき(NO)には、直ちに本サブルーチンを終了する。
WIN/COLLECTボタン1032を操作したと判別したとき(YES)には、スロットマシン1010から送信されたクレジット数を受信する(ステップS1693)。次に、CPU1731は、受信したクレジット数が所定値未満であるか否かを判断する(ステップS1695)。CPU1731は、受信したクレジット数が所定値以上であると判別したとき(NO)には、直ちに本サブルーチンを終了する。
図34は、上述した図25のステップS1517の処理で呼び出されて実行されるクレジット変換処理のサブルーチンである。
まず、ゲーミングマシンは、BETボタンが遊技者により押されたか否かをチェックし、続いて、スタートボタン1046(図5)が遊技者により押されたか否かをチェックする。
次に、ゲーミングマシンは、スピンボタンが遊技者により押されると、シンボル決定用乱数値を抽出し、ディスプレイ上に表示する複数のビデオリールのそれぞれに応じて、シンボル列のスクロールを停止させたときに遊技者に表示するシンボルを決定する。
次に、ゲーミングマシンは、各ビデオリールのシンボル列のスクロールを開始させ、決定されたシンボルが遊技者に表示されるようにスクロールを停止させる。
次に、ゲーミングマシンは、各ビデオリールのシンボル列のスクロールが停止されると、遊技者に表示されたシンボルの組合せが入賞に係るものであるか否かを判定する。
次に、ゲーミングマシンは、遊技者に表示されたシンボルの組合せが入賞に係るものであるとき、そのシンボルの組合せの種類に応じた特典(配当)を遊技者に与える。例えば、ゲーミングマシンは、コインの払い出しに係るシンボルの組合せが表示されたとき、そのシンボルの組合せに応じた数のコインを遊技者に払い出す。この払出は、実際のコインを払い出すことに代えて、払い出されるコイン数に相当するクレジット情報をICカードに書き込むこともできる。
ゲーミングマシンは、ディスプレイによる画像の表示、ランプによる光の出力、及びスピーカによる音の出力によって演出を行う。ゲーミングマシンは、演出用乱数値を抽出し、抽籤により決定されたシンボルなどに基づいて、演出の内容を決定する。
[第2実施形態]
図63を用いて、第2実施形態の概要について説明する。
図63は、本発明の第2実施形態に係るカジノシステムの全体像を模式的に示す概略図である。
カジノシステム2002は、管理サーバブロック2820と、顧客端末ブロック2221と、スタッフ端末ブロック2222とを備えている。
PTS端末2064は、本発明の個人追跡装置に相当する。
会員カード発券端末2270は、カメラを備えており、会員カード(ICカード)の発券時に、ICカードの発券を受けるプレーヤの顔の撮影を行う。撮影した画像は、顧客IDと対応付けて画像サーバ2267に保存される。また、ICカードの発券時に入力された会員の個人情報は、会員管理サーバ2264に顧客IDと対応付けて保存される。
両替紙幣識別器2065は、複数の国の紙幣を受け入れることが可能である。例えば、日本の紙幣を両替紙幣識別器2065に投入すると、PTS端末2064により、為替レートに基づいて、米国の通貨への変換(両替)が行われる。そして、変換(両替)後の通貨量を示す変換後通貨量データがPTS端末2064からゲーミングマシンに対して送信される。そのため、プレーヤは、米国の通貨以外の通貨を使用して、ゲーミングマシンで遊技を行うことができる。なお、変換(両替)後の通貨量は、変換(両替)前の通貨量から、所定の手数料(以下、両替手数料ともいう)に相当する通貨量を引いた通貨量と等価である。
以下においては、本発明のゲーミングマシンがスロットマシン2010である場合について説明する。
図65A~図65Bは、本発明の第2実施形態に係るゲーミングシステムを構成するスロットマシンが備える上側画像表示パネルに表示される画像の一例を示す図である。
図64に示すように、ゲーミングシステム2001は、複数(本実施例では、10台)のスロットマシン2010(スロットマシン2010A、スロットマシン2010B、スロットマシン2010C、スロットマシン2010D、スロットマシン2010E、スロットマシン2010F、スロットマシン2010G、スロットマシン2010H、スロットマシン2010I、スロットマシン2010J)と、PTS端末2064と、為替サーバ2262と、プログレッシブサーバ2266と、複数の大型共通ディスプレイ2300(大型共通ディスプレイ2300A、大型共通ディスプレイ2300B)と、複数の小型共通ディスプレイ2301(小型共通ディスプレイ2301A、小型共通ディスプレイ2301B)とを備え、ネットワークで接続されている。さらに、大型共通ディスプレイ2300からスロットマシン2010へと配列された複数のLED2351を備える連結発光帯2310(連結発光帯2310A、連結発光帯2310B、連結発光帯2310C、連結発光帯2310D、連結発光帯2310E、連結発光帯2310F、連結発光帯2310G、連結発光帯2310H、連結発光帯2310I、連結発光帯2310J)が、スロットマシンごとに設けられている。連結発光帯2310は、大型共通ディスプレイ2300から境界板2302(境界板2302A、境界板2302B)までにおける直線部分と、境界板2302からスロットマシン2010までにおける屈曲部分とから構成される。
スロットマシン2010は、本発明におけるゲーミングマシンに相当する。
TIME用蓄積値が123456であることを示している。EVENT TIME用蓄積値が所定値に達すると、EVENT TIME(共通ゲーム)が行われる。
図65Aに示すように、上側画像表示パネル2033には、ジャックポットの獲得についての注意事項を示す文字画像が表示されている。
文字画像2601は、EVENT TIME用蓄積値が所定値に達したことを契機として、EVENT TIME(共通ゲーム)が発生することを示している。
文字画像2602は、ボーナス用蓄積値が特定値に達したことを契機として、いずれかのスロットマシン2010に対して、ボーナスが発生することを示している。
本実施形態では、上側画像表示パネルに設けられたタッチパネル(図示せず)における所定の位置に触れられたことを契機として、図65Aに示す文字画像から図65Bに示す文字画像へと、表示される文字画像が切り替わるように構成されている。
EVENT TIME(共通ゲーム)では、再配置されたシンボルの種類及び個数に基づいて、ポイント数が決定される。
TIME用蓄積値に相当する数のコインが、ジャックポットとして払い出される旨示している。
本実施形態では、取得したポイント数に応じて、スロットマシン2010に近いLED2351から順に点灯される。これにより、点灯しているLED2351の列が、大型共通ディスプレイ2300に向かって伸びていくように見えることとなる。
本実施形態では、下記(I)~(V)の夫々に挙げる2つの連結発光帯2310が備えるLED2351の個数は同一である。
(I)連結発光帯2310Aと連結発光帯2310J
(II)連結発光帯2310Bと連結発光帯2310I
(III)連結発光帯2310Cと連結発光帯2310H
(IV)連結発光帯2310Dと連結発光帯2310G
(V)連結発光帯2310Eと連結発光帯2310F
しかし、(I)~(V)の夫々は、互いに、LED2351の個数が異なっている。
当該差異は、屈曲部分におけるLED2351の個数が異なることに起因するものである。直線部分におけるLED2351の個数は、すべての連結発光帯2310で同一である。
なお、図64は、本実施形態に係るゲーミングシステム2001を模式的に示した図であり、図64に描いたLED2351の個数は、本実施形態におけるLED2351の個数と無関係である。
個人追跡システム2800は、カジノ店2801内にいるスタッフ2802(図66では、スタッフ2802A、スタッフ2802B、スタッフ2802C)を管理するためのシステムである。図66では、カジノ店2801内に、スタッフ2802のみが存在する。
なお、カジノ店2801は、本発明の施設に相当する。
スタッフ管理サーバ2263は、プロセッサとしてのCPU2501と、ROM2502と、RAM2503と、通信インターフェイス2504と、メモリとしてのハードディスクドライブ2505と、出力装置としてのディスプレイ2506と、ディスプレイ2506の前面に設けられたタッチパネル2507とを備えている。通信インターフェイス2504は、通信回線を介して、PTS端末2064の通信インターフェイス2245と接続されている。ROM2502は、スタッフ管理サーバ2263の動作を制御するためのシステムプログラムや恒久的なデータ等が記憶されている。また、RAM2503には、CPU2501が作動する際に用いられるデータやプログラムが記憶される。
図68は、図67に示したスタッフ管理サーバに記憶されているスタッフ管理テーブルを示す図である。
図68に示すように、ハードディスクドライブ2505には、スタッフIDと顔画像データと携帯端末機への電話番号とが対応付けられたスタッフ管理テーブルが記憶されている。
スタッフは、予めスタッフIDが付与されるとともに、顔をカメラにより撮像される。撮像された顔を示す顔画像データは、スタッフIDに対応付けてハードディスクドライブ2505に記憶される。なお、スタッフは、スタッフIDと対応付けられた携帯端末機が経営者より貸し与えられる。例えば、スタッフ2802A(図66参照)には、スタッフID“001”が付与されるとともに、スタッフID“001”が顔画像データAに対応付けて記憶されている。また、スタッフID“001”には、電話番号Aが対応付けて記憶されている。また、スタッフ2802B(図66参照)には、スタッフID“002”が付与されるとともに、スタッフID“002”が顔画像データBに対応付けて記憶されている。また、スタッフID“002”には、電話番号Bが対応付けて記憶されている。
まず、スタッフ管理サーバ2263が備えるCPU2501は、入場用カードリーダ2807によりスタッフ用IDカード2803から読み取ったスタッフIDデータをRAM2503に記憶する(ステップS2651)。
一方、顔画像データが示す人物と、画像データが示す人物とが一致すると判断される基準を満たさないと判断した場合(ステップS2653:NO)、CPU2501は、一致しないと判断された顔画像データに基づく画像と、該顔画像データに対応づけられているスタッフIDとを、ディスプレイ2506に表示する(ステップS2654)。ステップS2654、又は、ステップS2655の処理の後、本サブルーチンを終了する。
図70は、第1実施形態のゲーミングシステムを構成するスロットマシンの外観を示す斜視図である。
スロットマシン2010では、遊技媒体として、コイン、紙幣(基本通貨及び基本通貨以外の通貨)又はこれらに相当する電子的な有価情報が用いられる。ただし、本発明において、遊技媒体としては、特に限定されるものではなく、例えば、メダル、トークン、電子マネー、チケットを挙げることができる。なお、上記チケットとしては、特に限定されるものではなく、例えば、後述するようなバーコード付きチケット等を挙げることができる。
また、図示しないが、下側画像表示パネル2016には、上述した画像以外にも、演出に係る様々な画像が表示される。
ゲーミングボード2050は、内部バスによって互い接続されたCPU(Central
Processing Unit)2051、ROM2055及びブートROM2052と、メモリカード2053に対応したカードスロット2053Sと、GAL(Generic Array Logic)2054に対応したICソケット2054Sとを備えている。
シンボル決定プログラムによって決定されるシンボルには、「3bar」、「2bar」、「1bar」、「blue7」、「red7」、「white7」、「RIBBON」、「HEART」、「STAR」、「MOON」、「SUN」、「JEWEL」、「CROWN」、及び、「SMILE」の14種類が存在する。
Memory)2043と、通信用インターフェイス2044とを備えている。マザーボードは、本発明におけるコントローラに相当する。
Board)2060及びドアPCB2080とが、夫々USBによって接続されている。さらに、マザーボード2040には、電源ユニット2045及び通信インターフェイス22044が接続されている。通信インターフェイス22044は、通信回線を介して、PTS端末2064の通信インターフェイス2245と接続される。
グラフィックボード2068は、メインCPU2041から出力される制御信号に基づいて画像データを生成するVDP(Video Display Processor)や、VDPによって生成される画像データを一時的に記憶するビデオRAM等を備えている。なお、VDPによって画像データを生成する際に用いられる画像データは、メモリカード2053から読み出されてRAM2043に記憶されたゲームプログラム内に含まれている。
キースイッチ2038Sは、キーパッド2038に設けられていて、キーパッド2038がプレーヤによって操作されたとき、所定の入力信号をメインCPU2041へ出力する。データ表示器2037は、プレーヤによってキーパッド2038を介して入力されたデータ等を表示する。
PTS端末2064は、CPU2241と、CPU2241と、RAM2243と、接続部2244と、通信インターフェイス2245と、ハードディスクドライブ2246とを備えている。CPU2241、CPU2241、及び、RAM2243から構成されるコントローラは、本発明におけるコントローラに相当する。通信インターフェイス2245は、通信回線を介して、当該PTS端末2064と対応関係にある1のスロットマシン2010の通信インターフェイス22044と接続されるとともに、通信回線を介して、管理サーバブロック2820と接続されている。CPU2241は、PTS端末2064の動作を制御するためのシステムプログラムや両替手数料算出値データや恒久的なデータ等が記憶されている。両替手数料算出値データは、両替手数料算出値P/1-P(Pは、両替手数料率)を示すデータである。また、RAM2243は、基本通貨(米国通貨)の量と基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータ等を一時的に記憶する。
CPU2241は、ハードディスクドライブ2246の記憶可能領域が所定量(例えば、100MB)より少なくなると、古いタイムスタンプが付与されている画像データから順に消去する。ただし、消去可能な状態に設定されていない画像データについては消去しない。
為替サーバ2262は、CPU2341と、ROM2342と、RAM2343と、通信インターフェイス2344と、通信インターフェイス2345とを備えている。通信インターフェイス2344は、通信回線を介して、PTS端末2064の通信インターフェイス2245と接続される。通信インターフェイス2345は、通信回線2223を介して、インターネット2015と接続されている。ROM2342は、為替サーバ2262の動作を制御するためのシステムプログラムやインターネット2015を介して最新の為替情報を取得するための為替情報取得プログラムや恒久的なデータや両替手数料率Pを示す手数料データ等が記憶されている。また、RAM2343は、為替情報や手数料減算後為替情報等を一時的に記憶する。
プログレッシブサーバ2266は、CPU2201と、ROM2202と、RAM2203と、通信インターフェイス2204と、LED駆動回路2350と、乱数発生器2063と、メモリとしてのハードディスクドライブ2205とを備えている。乱数発生器2063は、所定のタイミングで乱数を発生させる。通信インターフェイス2204は、通信回線を介して、PTS端末2064の通信インターフェイス2245と接続されるとともに、通信回線を介して、大型共通ディスプレイ2300A、大型共通ディスプレイ2300B、小型共通ディスプレイ2301A、小型共通ディスプレイ2301Bと接続されている。ROM2202は、プログレッシブサーバ2266の動作を制御するためのシステムプログラムや恒久的なデータ等が記憶されている。また、RAM2203は、EVENT TIME用蓄積値を示すEVENT TIME用蓄積値データ、ボーナス用蓄積値を示すボーナス用蓄積値データ、各スロットマシン2010に対して設けられた連結発光帯2310が備えるLED2351のうち、点灯済みのLED2351の個数を示す点灯数データ、各スロットマシン2010から受信したデータ等を一時的に記憶する。
また、ハードディスクドライブ2205には、共通ゲームにおいてポイント数を決定する際に参照されるポイント数決定テーブルデータが記憶されている。
また、ハードディスクドライブ2205には、所定値を示すデータ、特定値を示すデータ、が記憶されている。
為替情報取得処理は、所定のタイミングで実行される処理である。
まず、CPU2341は、ROM2342に記憶された為替情報取得プログラムを実行することにより、インターネット2015を介して最新の為替情報を取得する(ステップS22001)。この処理において、CPU2341は、或るタイミングで、例えば、米国の通貨量と日本の通貨量との対応関係(例えば、1ドル=100円)を示す情報を取得する。また、CPU2341は、別のタイミングで、例えば、米国の通貨量と中国の通貨量との対応関係(例えば、1ドル=6.85元)を示す情報を取得する。なお、本明細書では、米国の通貨量Mと他国の通貨量Nとが対応付けられていることを、M=Nのように記載することとする。
まず、CPU2241は、所定のタイミングで、紙幣識別器2022又はコインカウンタ2021Cから入力信号を受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2051)。
この場合、例えば、以下のような構成を採用することができる。
すなわち、PTS端末のROMには、両替手数料率Pを示す手数料データが記憶されている。PTS端末のCPUは、為替サーバから為替情報を受信する。そして、PTS端末のCPUは、ROMに記憶されている手数料データに基づいて、手数料減算後為替情報を決定する。そして、PTS端末のCPUは、決定した手数料減算後為替情報に基づいて、為替レートデータを更新する。
また、為替サーバが、外部から為替レートデータを受信することとしてもよい。
PTS端末2064では、図72を用いて既に説明したように、カメラ2254Cで撮像されて得られた画像データが0.5秒間隔でハードディスクドライブ2246に記憶され続けている。
なお、ハードディスクドライブ2246の消去可能領域に設定された領域に記憶されている画像データは、記憶可能領域が100MBより少なったことを契機として消去されることとなる。
まず、ICカードR/W2253は、ICカードが挿入されているか否かを判断する(ステップS2111)。ICカードが挿入されていると判断した場合、ICカードR/W2253は、ICカードから顧客IDを読み取る。次に、ステップS2113において、ICカードR/W2253は、顧客IDを読み取った旨のID読取信号をPTS端末2064に送信する。なお、ステップS2111においてICカードが挿入されていると判断された場合において、すでに顧客IDを読み取っている場合には、ステップS2112、及び、ステップS2113の処理を行わずに、処理をステップS2114移す。
顧客IDは、本発明の識別データに相当する。また、ID読取信号は、本発明の検出信号に相当する。
カード正常取出信号は、本発明の非検出信号に相当する。
なお、スロットマシン2010とプログレッシブサーバ2266とのデータ等の送受信は、PTS端末2064を介して行われるが、以下においては、記載を簡潔にするため、スロットマシン2010とプログレッシブサーバ2266とが直接データ等の送受信を行っているように記載することとする。
まず、メインCPU2041は、共通ゲームフラグがセットされているか否かを判断する(ステップS2200)。
図80は、フラグセット処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。
まず、メインCPU2041は、所定のタイミングで、共通ゲーム実行信号(図84参照)を、PTS端末2064を介して、プログレッシブサーバ2266から受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2250)。
一方、共通ゲーム実行信号を受信したと判断した場合、メインCPU2041は、共通ゲームフラグをセットし(ステップS2251)、本サブルーチンを終了する。
このように、共通ゲームフラグは、共通ゲームを実行する条件が成立したことを示すフラグである。
受信した通貨量データが示す通貨量と等価なクレジット数は、本発明におけるBET値に相当する。
ステップS2206の処理を行った後、又は、ステップS2205において通貨量データを受信していないと判断した場合、メインCPU2041は、本サブルーチンを終了する。
図82A~図82Cは、ウィニングライン上に再配置されたシンボルの組合せと、払出枚数との対応関係を示す図である。
図83は、表示ブロックに再配置されたシンボルの一例を示す図である。
まず、メインCPU2041は、タイマ2037により計時された時間が所定時間T以上であるか否かを判断する(ステップS10)。
スタートボタン2023がONされていないと判断した場合、ステップS23900に処理を戻す。なお、スタートボタン2023がONされなかった場合(例えば、スタートボタン2023がONされずに遊技を終了する旨の指示が入力された場合)には、メインCPU2041は、ステップS2303における減算結果をキャンセルする。
この処理において、先ず、メインCPU2041は、表示ブロック2028において、シンボルのスクロール表示を開始する。そして、メインCPU2041は、上述したシンボル決定プログラムを実行し、再配置されるシンボルを決定し、表示ブロック2028において、シンボルを再配置する。
図83に示すように、本実施形態に係る表示ブロック2328には、3行3列の計9個のシンボルを再配置することが可能である。真ん中の行には、ウィニングラインWLが設定されている。ウィニングラインWL上に再配置されたシンボルが所定の組合せである場合、賞が成立したと判断され、コインの払出が行われることとなる。
例えば、1枚のコインがベットされたゲームにおいて、図83に示すように、「3bar-1bar-1bar」というシンボルの組合せがウィニングラインWL上に再配置された場合、係る組合せは、「anybar-anybar-anybar」に相当することから、10枚のコインが払い出されることとなる。
コインの貯留を行う場合、メインCPU2041は、RAM2043において、決定された配当量に相当するクレジット数を加算する処理を行う。一方、コインの払出を行う場合には、メインCPU2041は、ホッパー2066に制御信号を送信して、決定された配当量に相当する量のコインの払出を行う。
図84は、共通ゲーム実行処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。
まず、メインCPU2041は、ステップS2350~ステップS2353の処理を実行するが、これらの処理は、図81のステップS2304、ステップS2308~ステップS2310の処理と略同様の処理である。ここでは、図81のステップS2304、ステップS2308~ステップS2310と異なる部分についてのみ説明する。
TIME用蓄積値を示す情報が含まれる。
TIME用蓄積値を示す情報に基づいて、EVENT TIME用蓄積値に相当する枚数のコインを払い出す。ステップS2356においてメインCPU2041が行う処理としては、例えば、スピーカ2029からの報知音の出力、ランプ2030の点灯、払出数を示すバーコードが印刷されたバーコード付チケット2039の印刷等を挙げることができる。
図85は、ゲーム休止中信号受信処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。
まず、CPU2201は、所定のタイミングで、スロットマシン2010から、PTS端末2064を介して、ゲーム休止中信号(図15参照)を受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2450)。
ゲーム休止中信号を受信していないと判断した場合、CPU2201は、本サブルーチンを終了する。一方、ゲーム休止中信号を受信したと判断した場合、CPU2201は、ゲーム休止中フラグを、受信したゲーム休止中信号に含まれるスロットマシン2010の識別番号に対応付けてセットする(ステップS2451)。
まず、CPU2201は、所定のタイミングで、スロットマシン2010から、PTS端末2064を介して、遊技媒体数情報を受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2500)。
TIME用蓄積値に、受信した遊技媒体数情報が示すコインの枚数の一部(本実施形態では、遊技媒体数情報が示すコインの枚数から1を引いた枚数)に対応する値を加算し、加算して得られた数値を新たなEVENT
TIME用蓄積値として、EVENT TIME用蓄積値データをRAM2203に記憶する(ステップS2501)。なお、遊技媒体数情報が示すコインの枚数から1を引いた枚数が0以下となる場合には、ステップS2501の処理を中止する。
受信した両替手数料データが示す通貨量は、本発明における所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量に相当する。
ボーナス用蓄積値が特定値に達したことは、本発明における所定のプログレッシブ払出条件に相当する。
まず、CPU2201は、乱数発生器2063が発生させた乱数を抽出する(ステップS2550)。
まず、CPU2201は、所定のタイミングで、スロットマシン2010から、PTS端末2064を介して、シンボル情報(図84参照)を受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2570)。
シンボル情報を受信していないと判断した場合、CPU2201は、本サブルーチンを終了する。
図89に示すように、ポイント数決定テーブルにおいては、ウィニングラインWL上に再配置されたシンボル又はシンボルの組合せと、ポイント数とが対応付けて設定されている。例えば、ウィニングラインWL上に、「1bar」が1つ再配置された場合、CPU2201は、ポイント数を10に決定する。
発光数決定テーブルは、ポイント数が属し得る範囲と、点灯させるLED2351の個数とが対応付けられたものである。また、ポイント数と、点灯させるLED2351の個数との対応関係が、各スロットマシン2010に対応付けられている。
屈曲部分用発光数決定テーブルにおいて、ポイント数と、点灯させるLED2351の個数との対応関係は、スロットマシン2010によって異なり得る。
直線部分用発光数決定テーブルにおいて、ポイント数と、点灯させるLED2351の個数との対応関係は、すべてのスロットマシン2010において同一である。
該点灯数が所定数以上であると判断した場合、CPU2201は、直線部分用発光数決定テーブルに基づいて、点灯させるLED2351の個数を決定する。
一方、該点灯数が所定数未満であると判断した場合、CPU2201は、屈曲部分用発光数決定テーブルに基づいて、点灯させるLED2351の個数を決定する。
この処理において、CPU2201は、ステップS2572で決定された個数と、該スロットマシン2010の識別番号と対応付けてRAM2203に記憶されている点灯数データが示す点灯数とに基づいて、点灯させるLED2351の識別番号を特定する。そして、CPU2201は、特定された識別番号を示す情報を含む信号を、LED駆動回路2350に対して送信する。該信号を受信すると、LED駆動回路2350は、該信号に含まれる識別番号の付されたLED2351を点灯させる。
また、該信号を送信した後、CPU2201は、該スロットマシン2010の識別番号と対応付けて記憶されている点灯数データが示す点灯数に、ステップS2572で決定された個数を加算し、RAM2203に記憶する。
また、ICカードR/W2253からID読取信号(検出信号)を受信した後、カード正常取出信号(非検出信号)を受信した場合、ICカードは置き去られていない。従って、この間に記憶した画像データを消去しても問題は少ない。一方、ICカードR/W2253からID読取信号を受信した後、カード正常取出信号を受信しない場合には、ICカードが置き忘れとなっていることとなる。しかし、この場合、画像データは消去されない。従って、この画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができる。このように、ハードディスクドライブ2246に記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
次に、本発明の第2実施形態に係る個人追跡システムの他の実施形態について説明する。
なお、第2実施形態に係るゲーミングシステムと共通する部分についてはその説明を省略することとする。また、第2実施形態に係るゲーミングシステムと対応する構成要素には同一の符号を付して説明することとする。
個人追跡システム2800は、カジノ店2801内にいるスタッフ2802(図91では、スタッフ2802A、スタッフ2802B、スタッフ2802C)を管理するためのシステムである。図91に示すカジノ店2801内には、スタッフ2802と顧客2804とが存在する。
なお、カジノ店2801は、本発明の施設に相当する。
本体PCB2060には、復旧完了ボタン2062が接続されている。復旧完了ボタン2062は、キャビネット2011の内部に設けられており、キャビネット2011を開いた状態で操作することが可能である。スロットマシン2010は、異常を検出すると異常検出信号を出力するとともに、ゲームの機能を停止する。その後、復旧完了ボタン2062がスタッフに操作されると、ゲームの機能の停止が解除されるとともに、復旧完了信号がPTS端末2064に対して送信されることとなる。
なお、他の構成については、第2実施形態に係るスロットマシンと同様であるからここでの説明は省略する。
まず、スロットマシン2010が備えるメインCPU2041は、ステップS2600において、異常を検出したか否かを判断する。この処理において、メインCPU2041は、所定量以上の衝撃を検知した場合や、所定量以上の電圧が加えられた場合に、異常を検出したと判断する。なお、図示しないが、スロットマシン2010には、衝撃や電圧を検出するためのセンサが設けられている。
まず、PTS端末2064が備えるCPU2241は、異常検出信号をスロットマシン2010から受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2631)。異常検出信号をスロットマシン2010から受信したと判断した場合、CPU2241は、異常信号をスタッフ管理サーバ2263に送信する(ステップS2632)。
まず、スタッフ管理サーバ2263が備えるCPU2501は、各PTS端末2064に接続されたRFID-R2255により読み取られたスタッフIDデータを取得する(ステップS2641)。なお、取得されたスタッフIDには、スタッフIDが読み取られたRFID-R2255を特定するための情報と、受信強度とが付加されている。
図96は、スタッフ管理サーバが備えるディスプレイに表示される画像の一例を示す図である。
図96に示すように、ディスプレイ2506には、カジノ店2801を上から見た様子を模式的に示した画像が表示されている。ディスプレイ2506の上側には、スロットマシン2010A~2010Jに対応する画像2810A~2810Jが表示されている。また、ディスプレイ2506の左側には、スロットマシン2010AA~2010JJに対応する画像2810AA~2810JJが表示されている。また、ディスプレイ2506の中央右寄りには、ゲーミングマシン2805の夫々に対応する画像2815が表示されている。
ステップS2643の処理において、CPU2501は、ステップS2642の処理において特定されたスタッフ用IDカード2803の位置に基づいて、画像2813を所定の時間間隔で更新しながら表示する。
また、ハードディスクドライブ2246に記憶されてからの期間が、10分(所定期間)以上となった画像データであっても、その期間中に異常検出信号を受信している場合、当該画像データは消去されない。すなわち、異常が検出される所定期間前から異常が検出されまでに撮像された画像の画像データは消去されない。この期間においては、異常が検出されるような行動等を行っているプレーヤの画像が撮像されている可能性が高い。従って、このような画像データについては、消去しないこととしたため、この画像データが示す顔の画像を用いて該顔のプレーヤを特定することができ、異常な行動をしていたプレーヤを特定することができる。
このように、ハードディスクドライブ2246に記憶される画像データの量をなるべく少なくしてメンテナンスを必要最小限で済むようにし、且つ、個人を追跡するための画像データについては、確実に取得できるようにした。その結果、顔の画像を用いて個人の追跡を行う技術を、利便性を維持しつつ、ゲーム分野に適用することが可能になる。
また上述した他の実施形態では、本発明における所定の条件が、ハードディスクドライブ2246に記憶されてからの期間が、異常検出信号を受信することなく所定期間(他の実施形態では、10分)以上となった画像データではないこと、である場合について説明した。
しかしながら、本発明における所定の条件は、上述した例に限定されない。
本発明における所定の条件は、画像データを消去しない方がよいと判断され得る条件であればよく、例えば、所定額以上の金銭の支払いが発生する賞が成立したタイミングを含む所定期間内に撮像された画像の画像データではないこと、であってもよい。
次に、カジノ店内にスタッフと顧客とが存在する場合について説明する。
なお、スタッフ管理処理が異なる以外は、上述した実施形態に係る個人追跡システムと略同様の構成を有するので、以下では、上述した実施形態に係る個人追跡システムと共通する部分についてはその説明を省略することとする。また、上述した実施形態に係る個人追跡システムと対応する構成要素には同一の符号を付して説明することとする。
まず、スタッフ管理サーバ2263が備えるCPU2501は、入場用カードリーダ2807によりスタッフ用IDカード2803から読み取ったスタッフIDデータをRAM2503に記憶する(ステップS2671)。
一方、顔画像データが示す人物と、画像データが示す人物とが一致すると判断される基準を満たさないと判断した場合(ステップS2673:NO)、CPU2501は、監視用カメラ2808から送信されてきた画像データと、ハードディスクドライブ2505に記憶されているすべての顔画像データとを比較し、顔画像データが示す人物と、画像データが示す人物とが一致すると判断される基準を満たすか判断する(ステップS2674)。
一方、顔画像データが示す人物と、画像データが示す人物とが一致すると判断される基準を満たさないと判断した場合(ステップS2676:NO)、CPU2501は、画像データ(監視用カメラ2808から送信されてきた画像データ)を客画像データとしてハードディスクドライブ2505に記憶する。このとき、CPU2501は、さらに、客画像データを画像サーバ2267に送信する。その結果、客画像データは、画像サーバ2267においても管理されることとなる。ステップS2675、ステップS2677、又は、ステップS2678の処理の後、本サブルーチンを終了する。
しかしながら、本発明における出力装置は、この例に限定されず、印刷装置であってもよい。この場合、顔画像、及び/又は、スタッフIDとを印刷したものを出力(プリントアウト)することとすればよい。また、出力装置は、スピーカ等の音出力装置であってもよい。この場合、スタッフIDを出力することによればよい。
量データに基づいて、スロットマシン2010では、ゲームが行われる。
従って、プレーヤは、米国の通貨や日本の通貨といった、互いに異なる複数種類の通貨を用いてゲームを行うことができる。そのため、手持ちの基本通貨(米国の通貨)がなくなってしまった場合でも、プレーヤは、わざわざ両替をすることなく、別途所持している通貨(例えば、日本の通貨)を用いてゲームを継続することができる。これにより、プレーヤを不便に感じさせにくくすることができる。また、手持ちの基本通貨がなくなってしまったときに、プレーヤがゲームをやめてしまう可能性を低減させることができ、プレーヤにゲームを長時間に亘って行ってもらいやすい環境を整備することができる。
従って、プログレッシブジャックポットに係る払い出しを行うことが可能なゲーミングシステム2001を構築しようとする場合であっても、そのようにして変換された基本通貨の量に基づいて、金額のプールを行うようにすればよく、特に大きな弊害が生じることもない。
すなわち、上記ゲーミングシステム2001によれば、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨が使用されることにより、所定の手数料に相当する基本通貨の量がボーナス用蓄積値としてプールされることになる。そして、所定のプログレッシブ払出条件が成立したとき、複数のスロットマシン2010のうち何れかのスロットマシン2010に対して、基本通貨以外の種類の通貨を使用した際の所定の手数料を原資としたボーナスを付与する。従来とは原資が異なるボーナスが存在することにより、遊技の興趣の向上を図ることができる。
具体的には、PTS端末2064が備えるCPU2241は、入金受付処理において、両替手数料データを対応関係にあるスロットマシン2010に対して送信する。両替手数料データを受信した場合、スロットマシン2010が備えるメインCPU2041は、受信した両替手数料データが示す通貨量に相当するコインの枚数を、RAM2043に記憶されているボーナス用蓄積値データが示すボーナス用蓄積値に加算し、加算して得られた数値を新たなボーナス用蓄積値として、ボーナス用蓄積値データをRAM2043に記憶する。そして、メインCPU2041は、RAM2043に記憶されているボーナス用蓄積値データが示すボーナス用蓄積値が特定値に達したと判断した場合、コインの払い出しを行う。
このように構成した場合には、自分が貯留したボーナス用蓄積値に基づくボーナスを自分が受けることができるため、プレーヤ間に不公平感が生じることを防止することができる。また、米国の通貨以外の通貨を多く使用すればするほど、ボーナス用蓄積値が大きくなるため、プレーヤに米国の通貨以外の通貨を積極的に使用させやすくなる。
また、例えば、ICカードR/W2253に挿入されたICカードに記憶されているプレーヤが行った遊技の履歴に関するデータにより、当該プレーヤの失った金額が一定の金額以上であると判断された場合に、為替レートを優遇することとしてもよい。
このように構成した場合、例えば、両替手数料が2.75ドルの場合には、2.75ドルを基本通貨単位量である1ドルで除して得られる端数量である0.75ドルをボーナス用蓄積値として計数する。また、両替手数料が2.0ドルの場合には、ボーナス用蓄積値の計数を行わない。
例えば、以下のような構成を採用することができる。
すなわち、ゲーミングマシンは、そのような共通ゲームを実行するためのプログラムを記憶することが可能である。共通ゲーム実行信号を受信したことを契機として、各ゲーミングマシンは、該プログラムを読み出して実行する。そして、共通ゲームの結果を示す情報をプログレッシブサーバ2266に対して送信する。プログレッシブサーバ2266は、該情報に基づいて、各ゲーミングマシンにおける共通ゲームの結果を比較することにより、各ゲーミングマシンに対して設けられた連結発光帯において点灯させるLEDの個数を決定する。
なお、以下においては、上述した実施形態に係るゲーミングシステム2001の構成要素と同一の構成要素には、同一の符号を付して説明することとする。
また、上述した実施形態における説明が以下の実施形態においても当てはまる部分については、説明を省略することとする。
図98は、第二実施形態に係る遊技媒体数情報受信処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。
まず、CPU2201は、ステップS2701~ステップS2706の処理を実行するが、これらの処理は、図86のステップS2500~ステップS2505の処理と略同様の処理である。ここでは、図86のステップS2500~ステップS2505と異なる部分についてのみ説明する。
図99は、他の実施形態に係る当籤スロットマシン決定処理のサブルーチンを示すフローチャートである。
まず、CPU2201は、ステップS2730~ステップS2732の処理を実行するが、これらの処理は、図87のステップS2550~ステップS2552の処理と略同様の処理である。ここでは、図87のステップS2550~ステップS2552と異なる部分についてのみ説明する。
この場合、両替紙幣識別器2065Aは、上述の実施形態に係る両替紙幣識別器2065と異なり、米国の通貨以外の紙幣だけではなく、米国の紙幣も受け入れることができる。すなわち、両替紙幣識別器2065Aは、基本通貨である米国の紙幣を含む複数の国の紙幣を受け入れるものであり、受け入れた紙幣の適否、種類、枚数を読み取り可能となっている。
なお、以下においては、上述した実施形態に係るゲーミングシステム2001の構成要素と同一の構成要素には、同一の符号を付して説明することとする。
また、上述した実施形態における説明が以下の実施形態においても当てはまる部分については、説明を省略することとする。
図100は、他の実施形態に係るPTS端末において行われる入金受付処理を示すフローチャートである。
まず、CPU2241は、所定のタイミングで、両替紙幣識別器2065Aから入力信号を受信したか否かを判断する(ステップS2800)。
<<<<第3の実施の形態>>>>
前記紙幣搬送路3003は、紙幣挿入口3005から奥側に向けて延出しており、第1搬送路3003Aと、前記第1搬送路3003Aから下流側に向けて延出し、第1搬送路3003Aに対して所定角度、下方側に向けて傾斜した第2搬送路3003Bとを備えている。この第2搬送路3003Bの下流側は、鉛直方向に向けて屈曲しており、その下流側端部には、紙幣収容部3100に紙幣を排出する排出口3003aが形成されて、ここから排出される紙幣は、鉛直方向に向けて、紙幣収容部3100の導入口(受入口)3103に送り込まれる。
<<<第1の態様の制御手段3200>>>
<<<第2の態様の制御手段3200>>>
形状データ)を格納した基準データ記憶部3234と、前記データ処理部3232において特定された判別対象となる紙幣の形状データと基準データ記憶部3234に格納されている基準データとを比較し、搬送される紙幣に損傷があるか否かの判別処理を行う比較判定部3235と、を備えている。
ここで、図117に示すような、紙幣先端部分に欠けのある紙幣Mが挿入された場合について説明する。
この場合、搬送される紙幣Mの先端の隅に欠けMaがあるような紙幣が挿入されて、これが紙幣読取手段3008を通過すると、紙幣の幅方向に亘って配設されるCCDラインセンサを有する受光部3081aによって、その欠けMaの形状を具体的に取得することが可能である。これは、例えば、受光部3081aにおいて受光する透過光データでは、欠けMaの部分を透過する透過光の受光量が大きくなること、或いは、反射光データでは、欠けMaの部分から反射光が得られないこと等から、前記変換部3231で変換される画素情報によって、搬送される紙幣Mの具体的なエッジ形状(欠けMaのあるエッジ形状)のデータを取得することが可能となる。
通常、紙幣は、図118(a)に示すように、裁断工程等を考慮して、印刷領域3300の周囲に非印刷領域3301が形成された構成となっている。この非印刷領域3301は、インクが付着していない領域であることから、透過光を受光部3081aにおいて取得すると、印刷領域3300と比較して、ラインP1を境にして画素毎の濃度値は高い値が得られるようになる。
次に、上述した制御手段3200によって実行される紙幣処理装置3001における紙幣の処理動作について、図107、図119、図120、図110~図112、図121及び図122のフローチャートに従って説明する。なお、上述した第3の実施の形態と同様の処理をするフローチャートは省略した。また、上述した第3の実施の形態と同様の処理をするステップについては、同様の符号を付した。
まず、第1の損傷判別処理では、図121のフローチャートに示すように、最初に、紙幣を所定の長さ読取ったか否かが判断される(ST3250)。この所定長は、上述したように、第3の実施の形態では、搬送される紙幣Mの先端M1から20mmに設定されており(図117;R参照)、この長さの読取りが終了した段階で、制御手段3200の紙幣判別処理部3230は、基準データ記憶部3234に記憶されている基準データを参照し、比較判定部3235で得られた紙幣の形状データを基準となるデータと比較して、紙幣の損傷について判別処理を実行する(ST3251)。
また、第2の損傷判別処理では、図122のフローチャートに示すように、最初に、紙幣を所定の長さ読取ったか否かが判断される(ST3350)。この所定長は、上述したように、第3の実施の形態では、搬送される紙幣Mの先端M1から20mmに設定されており(図118(c);R参照)、この長さの読取りが終了した段階で、取得された紙幣Mの先端領域における透過光による画素の合計濃度値が算出される(ST3351)。
<<<第3の態様の制御手段3200>>>
<<<<第4の実施の形態>>>>
路4003)が形成されると共に、両者の前面露出側に、前記紙幣搬送路4003に一致するようにして、紙幣挿入口4005が形成されるよう構成されている。なお、前記紙幣挿入口4005は、紙幣の短い辺側から装置本体4002の内部に挿入できるようにスリット状の開口となっている。
前記紙幣搬送路4003は、紙幣挿入口4005から奥側に向けて延出しており、その下流側には、紙幣収容部4100に紙幣を排出する排出口4003aが形成されている。
<<<第1の態様の制御手段4200>>>
4のような乗除算を用いることで、各画素の濃度値を補正することも可能である。
識別の精度を向上することができる。そして、このような真贋識別方法において、透かし画像の部分に折れ目が付いていたとしても、上述したような折れ目除去処理を施すことで、折れ目による影響を低減した適切な二次元画像を取得することが可能となって、精度良く、真贋識別処理を実行することが可能となる。また、折れ目については、幅方向に生じているものについて例示したが、透かし画像領域に、搬送方向に沿った折れ目が付いていたり、皺が生じているようなケースでも、上述した手法により、折れ目や皺を除去して、真贋の識別処理を行うことが可能となる。
識別する各種の装置に組み込むことが可能である。
<<<第1の態様の制御手段4200>>>
し領域の画像情報と、標準画像の透かし領域の透過光による画像情報との間で、上記した式7で示す相関係数R´を導くことで、搬送される紙幣の真贋を識別するようにしている。
図140(a)は、搬送される紙幣の漉き入れマーク形成領域4105における反射光(近赤外光に基づく反射データ)による画像データであり、変換部4232よって変換された色情報を含む画素情報を示している。なお、図140(a)では、説明を簡単にするために、漉き入れマーク形成領域4105における一方向(縦方向)で12画素分が抽出され、搬送方向(横方向)で7画素分が抽出されたものとしてある。また、図140(b)は、予め基準データ記憶部4233に記憶されている漉き入れマーク形成領域における標準データであり、図140(a)と同じ位置における透過光による画像データを示している。
れば、近傍探索として、全体で81通りの相関係数が導き出される。そして、導き出された夫々の相関係数については、RAM4224に順次記憶して行き、最終的に全ての相関係数を算出した後、その相関係数の絶対値が最も高くなった位置を、真贋の識別対象として特定が成される。
<<<<第5の実施の形態>>>>
<<<第1の態様の制御手段5030>>>
<<<第2の態様の制御手段5030>>>
図152に示すように、紙幣Mに形成されている細線(隣接する黒いバーで示す)5200の間隔をbとした場合、その間隔bが、上述した紙幣読取手段5020を構成するラインセンサ5025が1画素を読取る間隔dよりも広ければ(b>d)、紙幣の細線5200を正確に読取ることができるため、読取画像データ(a)は、そのまま紙幣の細線を再現した状態となり、モアレ縞が発生することはない。
1010、2010 ゲーミングマシン
1011,2011 キャビネット
1016、2016 画像表示パネル
1030 コントロールパネル
1105 PTSパネル
1121 カードスタッカー
1707A、1708A ダクト
1700、2064 PTS端末
1704(1705)マイク
1707、1708 スピーカ
1712、1713 人体検出カメラ
1719 LCD表示部
1820 管理サーバブロック
1861、2261 カジノボールサーバ
1862、2262 為替サーバ
1863、2263 管理スタッフサーバ
1864、2264 会員管理サーバ
1865、2265 ICカード・金銭管理サーバ
1866 メガバックスサーバ
2266 プログレッシブサーバ
1867、2267 画像サーバ
3001 紙幣処理装置
3002 装置本体
3003 紙幣搬送路
3005 紙幣挿入口
3006 紙幣搬送機構
3008 紙幣読取手段
3010 スキュー補正機構
3080a 第1発光部
3081 受発光ユニット
3081a 受光部
3081b 第2発光部
3200 制御手段
4001 紙幣処理装置
4002 装置本体
4003 紙幣搬送路
4005 紙幣挿入口
4006 紙幣搬送機構
4008 紙幣読取手段
4010 スキュー補正機構
4080a 第1発光部
4081 受発光ユニット
4081a 受光部
4081b 第2発光部
4200 制御手段
5001 紙幣処理装置
5002 フレーム
5005 紙幣搬送路
5006 紙幣挿入口
5008 紙幣搬送機構
5020 紙幣読取手段
5026 受光部
Claims (11)
- 複数のゲーミングマシンと、
前記ゲーミングマシンの各々に対応付けられ、異なる通貨の紙幣及び当該紙幣の金額を識別し、識別された結果を表すデータを出力する紙幣識別装置と、
前記ゲーミングマシンの各々に一体化され、前記紙幣識別装置から出力されるデータを、内部に記憶した為替レートに基づいて、ゲームを実行するためのクレジットデータに変換し、前記ゲーミングマシンに送出するプレーヤトラッキング装置と、
外部から為替レートを入力し、入力された為替レートを前記プレーヤトラッキング装置に提供して前記プレーヤトラッキング装置に記憶されている為替レートを更新する制御装置と、
前記プレーヤトラッキング装置に一体化され、前記ゲーミングマシンのゲーム結果に応じてプレーヤに付与される金額に相当するデータを情報カードに記憶させると共に、前記情報カードから読み取った金額に相当するデータに基づいて、ゲームを実行するためのクレジットデータを前記ゲーミングマシンへ送出する情報カード装置と、
を備えることを特徴とするゲームシステム。 - 前記情報カードは、
各種のデータを書き替え可能に記憶する記憶部と、
外部装置に対してデータ通信を行う送受信部と、
前記外部装置に対するデータ通信により認証を行う認証部と、
前記認証が適切である場合、前記記憶部に記憶された前記データを、前記外部装置によりアクセス可能にするアクセス許可部と、
前記記憶部に記憶された少なくとも一部の前記データを表示する表示部とを有することを特徴とする請求項1に記載のゲームシステム。 - 前記プレーヤトラッキング装置は、
ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、
複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な前記紙幣識別装置との夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されており、基本通貨の量と、前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、前記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリと、
下記(A)~(B)の処理を実行するようにプログラムされたプロセッサと
を備えることを特徴とする請求項1記載のゲームシステム。
(A)前記紙幣識別装置により識別された紙幣の種類を示す紙幣種類データと、該紙幣の量を示す紙幣量データとを、前記通信回線を介して、前記紙幣識別装置から受信する処理、及び、
(B)前記処理(A)により受信した紙幣種類データが示す紙幣の種類が前記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、前記処理(A)により受信した紙幣量データが示す紙幣の量と、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後紙幣量データを、前記通信回線を介して、前記コントローラに送信する処理。 - 前記紙幣識別装置は、
紙幣が挿入される挿入口と、
前記挿入口から挿入された紙葉類を搬送可能な搬送機構と、
前記搬送機構により搬送された紙葉類を読取る読取手段と、
前記読取手段により読取られた紙葉類の真贋を判定する真贋判定手段と、
を有しており、前記読取手段による紙葉類の読取りが終了する前までに、読取られた部分における紙葉類の形状と、基準となる紙葉類の形状とに基づいて紙葉類の損傷を判別する損傷判別手段と、前記損傷判別手段による判別結果に基づいて、前記搬送機構による紙葉類の搬送を制御する制御手段と、を設けたことを特徴とする請求項1に記載のゲームシステム。 - 前記紙幣識別装置は、
紙幣が挿入される挿入口と、
前記挿入口から挿入された紙葉類を搬送可能な搬送機構と、
前記搬送機構により搬送された紙葉類を読取る読取手段と、
前記読取手段で読取った画像を、明るさを有する色情報を含み、所定の大きさを1単位とする画素毎に変換する変換部と、
前記変換部で変換された画素毎の濃度値と、基準となる紙葉類の画素毎の濃度値とから真贋を判定する真贋判定手段と、
を有しており、前記読取手段による紙葉類の読取りが終了する前までに、読取られた部分における画素毎の濃度値と、読取られた部分に対応する基準となる画素毎の濃度値とに基づいて紙葉類の損傷を判別する損傷判別手段と、
前記損傷判別手段による判別結果に基づいて、前記搬送機構による紙葉類の搬送を制御する制御手段と、を設けたことを特徴とする請求項1に記載のゲームシステム。 - 前記紙幣識別装置は、
紙葉類に対し光を照射する発光部と、
前記発光部から照射され、紙葉類を透過した透過光、及び紙葉類から反射した反射光を受光する受光部と、
前記受光部で受光した透過光、及び反射光を、明度を有する色情報を含み、所定の大きさを1単位とする画素毎にそれぞれ変換する変換部と、前記受光部で受光した透過光から前記変換部で変換された複数の画素によって構成される透過画像、及び前記受光部で受光した反射光から前記変換部で変換された複数の画素によって構成される反射画像を記憶する記憶部と、
前記記憶部により記憶された各画像に基づいて紙葉類の真贋を判定する真贋判定処理部と、
前記透過画像の所定領域における画素の明度と、透過画像の所定領域に対応する反射画像の画素の明度との比較結果に基づいて、前記所定領域を真贋判定の対象から除外する判別部と、を備えることを特徴とする請求項1に記載のゲームシステム。 - 前記プレーヤトラッキング装置は、
サーバと、
施設への入場ゲートに設置された入場用カードリーダと、
前記施設内を撮像可能に設置されたカメラと、を備え、
前記サーバは、
従業員を識別するための従業員識別データと従業員の顔の画像を示す顔画像データとが対応付けて記憶されているメモリと、出力装置と、プロセッサと
を備え、
前記プロセッサは、
(A)前記入場用カードリーダにより読み取られた従業員識別データを記憶する処理、
(B)前記カメラで撮像された画像を示す画像データを連続的に記憶する処理、
(C)前記処理(B)により記憶された夫々の画像データと、前記処理(A)により記憶された従業員識別データに対応する顔画像データの夫々とを比較し、特定の条件を満たすか否かを判断する処理、及び、
(D)前記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データ、及び/又は、前記特定の条件を満たさないと判断された際の顔画像データに対応する従業員識別データを前記出力装置から出力する処理
を実行するようにプログラムされていることを特徴とする請求項1に記載のゲームシステム。 - 下記構成を備える通貨価値変換装置であり、
ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置との夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されており、
基本通貨の量と、前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、前記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリと、
下記(A)~(B)の処理を実行するようにプログラムされたプロセッサと
を備えることを特徴とする通貨価値変換装置。
(A)前記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、前記通信回線を介して、前記通貨識別装置から受信する処理、及び、
(B)前記処理(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が前記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、前記処理(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、前記通信回線を介して、前記コントローラに送信する処理。 - 下記構成を備える通貨価値変換装置であり、
ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置と、基本通貨の量と前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係を示す為替情報を所定のタイミングで繰り返し取得する為替サーバとの夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されており、
前記基本通貨の量と前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が前記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリと、
下記(A)~(D)の処理を実行するようにプログラムされたプロセッサと
を備えることを特徴とする通貨価値変換装置。
(A)前記為替サーバが為替情報を取得する毎に、前記為替サーバから、前記通信回線を介して、為替情報に基づいて特定される情報を受信する処理、
(B)前記処理(A)により受信した情報に基づいて、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータを更新する処理、
(C)前記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、前記通信回線を介して、前記通貨識別装置から受信する処理、及び、
(D)前記処理(C)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が前記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、前記処理(C)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、前記通信回線を介して、前記コントローラに送信する処理。 - 下記構成を備える通貨価値変換装置の制御方法であり、
前記通貨価値変換装置は、
ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置との夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されており、基本通貨の量と、前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が、前記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備え、
前記制御方法は、
(A)前記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、前記通信回線を介して、前記通貨識別装置から受信する段階、及び、
(B)前記段階(A)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が前記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、前記段階(A)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、前記通信回線を介して、前記コントローラに送信する段階
を含む。 - 下記構成を備える通貨価値変換装置の制御方法であり、
前記通貨価値変換装置は、
ゲーミングマシンの備えるコントローラと、複数種類の通貨を受け入れることが可能であるとともに、受け入れられた通貨の種類及び量を識別することが可能な通貨識別装置と、基本通貨の量と前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係を示す為替情報を所定のタイミングで繰り返し取得する為替サーバとの夫々と、通信回線を介して接続されており、
前記基本通貨の量と前記基本通貨以外の種類の通貨の量との対応関係が前記基本通貨以外の種類ごとに定められた為替レートを示す為替レートデータを記憶することが可能なメモリを備え、
前記制御方法は、
(A)前記為替サーバが為替情報を取得する毎に、前記為替サーバから、前記通信回線を介して、為替情報に基づいて特定される情報を受信する段階、
(B)前記段階(A)により受信した情報に基づいて、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータを更新する段階、
(C)前記通貨識別装置により識別された通貨の種類を示す通貨種類データと、該通貨の量を示す通貨量データとを、前記通信回線を介して、前記通貨識別装置から受信する段階、及び、
(D)前記段階(C)により受信した通貨種類データが示す通貨の種類が前記基本通貨ではない場合、該通貨の種類と、前記段階(C)により受信した通貨量データが示す通貨の量と、前記メモリに記憶されている為替レートデータとに基づいて特定される基本通貨の量を示す変換後通貨量データを、前記通信回線を介して、前記コントローラに送信する段階
を含む。
Priority Applications (6)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CN2009801298034A CN102123770A (zh) | 2008-07-28 | 2009-07-16 | 游戏系统 |
AU2009277649A AU2009277649A1 (en) | 2008-07-28 | 2009-07-16 | Game system |
US13/054,951 US9105141B2 (en) | 2008-07-28 | 2009-07-16 | Game system |
JP2010522675A JP5329543B2 (ja) | 2008-07-28 | 2009-07-16 | ゲームシステム |
JP2013152745A JP5603980B2 (ja) | 2008-07-28 | 2013-07-23 | ゲームシステム |
US14/751,731 US9646446B2 (en) | 2008-07-28 | 2015-06-26 | Game system |
Applications Claiming Priority (12)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2008193648 | 2008-07-28 | ||
JP2008-193648 | 2008-07-28 | ||
US9312008P | 2008-08-29 | 2008-08-29 | |
US9309608P | 2008-08-29 | 2008-08-29 | |
US9309808P | 2008-08-29 | 2008-08-29 | |
US9309108P | 2008-08-29 | 2008-08-29 | |
US61/093,091 | 2008-08-29 | ||
US61/093,096 | 2008-08-29 | ||
US61/093,098 | 2008-08-29 | ||
US61/093,120 | 2008-08-29 | ||
JP2009131897 | 2009-06-01 | ||
JP2009-131897 | 2009-06-01 |
Related Child Applications (2)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/054,951 A-371-Of-International US9105141B2 (en) | 2008-07-28 | 2009-07-16 | Game system |
US14/751,731 Continuation US9646446B2 (en) | 2008-07-28 | 2015-06-26 | Game system |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2010013600A1 true WO2010013600A1 (ja) | 2010-02-04 |
Family
ID=41610299
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2009/062884 WO2010013600A1 (ja) | 2008-07-28 | 2009-07-16 | ゲームシステム |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (2) | US9105141B2 (ja) |
JP (2) | JP5329543B2 (ja) |
CN (1) | CN102123770A (ja) |
AU (1) | AU2009277649A1 (ja) |
WO (1) | WO2010013600A1 (ja) |
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN101833829A (zh) * | 2010-03-12 | 2010-09-15 | 秦小枢 | 带图像监控识别分析系统的取款机或存取款机 |
CN101894416A (zh) * | 2010-07-30 | 2010-11-24 | 秦小枢 | 带图像监控识别分析系统的取款机或存取款机 |
CN102063763A (zh) * | 2010-11-16 | 2011-05-18 | 江苏科技大学 | 基于图像识别银行卡忘记取出提示系统及其提示方法 |
CN102262799A (zh) * | 2010-11-16 | 2011-11-30 | 江苏科技大学 | 基于图像目标跟踪的银行卡忘记取出提示系统及提示方法 |
JP2019092877A (ja) * | 2017-11-22 | 2019-06-20 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 情報処理装置 |
Families Citing this family (56)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US9286745B2 (en) * | 2006-09-22 | 2016-03-15 | Aruze Gaming America, Inc. | Gaming system, server, gaming terminal, including a currency exchange module and game control method |
US8721447B2 (en) * | 2006-12-08 | 2014-05-13 | Aruze Gaming America, Inc. | Game delivery server, gaming system, and controlling method for game delivery server |
JP5184157B2 (ja) * | 2008-03-14 | 2013-04-17 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 紙葉類識別装置、及び紙葉類識別方法 |
JP5352178B2 (ja) * | 2008-10-14 | 2013-11-27 | 任天堂株式会社 | 表示制御プログラム、表示制御装置、及び、表示制御システム |
JP5222707B2 (ja) * | 2008-12-08 | 2013-06-26 | 京セラドキュメントソリューションズ株式会社 | 画像形成装置、カード受付装置、画像取扱システム |
US8388429B2 (en) * | 2009-05-29 | 2013-03-05 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Player tracking apparatus and gaming machine and control method thereof |
AU2010241389B2 (en) * | 2009-11-16 | 2015-01-29 | Global Payment Technologies Australia | Systems and methods for providing interaction with a terminal |
WO2012111239A1 (ja) * | 2011-02-17 | 2012-08-23 | 株式会社コナミデジタルエンタテインメント | 対価計算システム及び対価計算用のコンピュータプログラム |
JP5772069B2 (ja) * | 2011-03-04 | 2015-09-02 | ソニー株式会社 | 情報処理装置、情報処理方法およびプログラム |
US20150235509A1 (en) * | 2011-03-31 | 2015-08-20 | Fernando DiCarlo | Slot Game with Credit Redistribution |
JP2014221106A (ja) * | 2013-05-13 | 2014-11-27 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | ゲーミングマシン |
JP2015021985A (ja) * | 2013-07-16 | 2015-02-02 | 株式会社東芝 | ポイント算出装置、ポイント算出プログラム及びポイント算出方法 |
EP4039344B1 (en) * | 2013-08-08 | 2024-05-15 | Angel Playing Cards Co., Ltd. | A method for administrating a package of shuffled playing cards |
US20150087408A1 (en) * | 2013-09-24 | 2015-03-26 | Jcm American Corporation | Electronic Voucher Ticket System |
US10235839B2 (en) | 2013-09-24 | 2019-03-19 | Jcm American Corporation | Electronic voucher ticket system |
US20160371914A1 (en) * | 2014-03-04 | 2016-12-22 | Glory Ltd. | Bank notes handling apparatus |
US9646460B2 (en) * | 2014-05-22 | 2017-05-09 | Igt | Gaming system and method providing a slot game including a symbol replacement feature |
US9508208B1 (en) | 2014-07-25 | 2016-11-29 | Cummins Allison Corp. | Systems, methods and devices for processing coins with linear array of coin imaging sensors |
US10685523B1 (en) * | 2014-07-09 | 2020-06-16 | Cummins-Allison Corp. | Systems, methods and devices for processing batches of coins utilizing coin imaging sensor assemblies |
US11410481B2 (en) * | 2014-07-09 | 2022-08-09 | Cummins-Allison Corp. | Systems, methods and devices for processing batches of coins utilizing coin imaging sensor assemblies |
JP6633268B2 (ja) * | 2014-09-03 | 2020-01-22 | グローリー株式会社 | センサモジュール及び紙葉類処理装置 |
US9875608B1 (en) * | 2014-09-16 | 2018-01-23 | American Wagering, Inc. | Sports-wagering kiosk and method of using and operating the same |
US10318942B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2019-06-11 | Jcm American Corporation | Electronic voucher ticket system |
US10970967B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2021-04-06 | Jcm American Corporation | Electronic voucher ticket system |
US10235838B2 (en) | 2014-09-24 | 2019-03-19 | Jcm American Corporation | Electronic voucher ticket system |
KR101757263B1 (ko) * | 2015-07-08 | 2017-07-12 | 현대자동차주식회사 | 근거리 물체 감지 장치 및 방법과 이를 이용한 차량 |
CN115177942A (zh) * | 2015-08-03 | 2022-10-14 | 天使集团股份有限公司 | 游戏币、检查装置、游戏币的制造方法以及桌面游戏的管理系统 |
US10970962B2 (en) | 2015-08-03 | 2021-04-06 | Angel Playing Cards Co., Ltd. | Management system of substitute currency for gaming |
US11074780B2 (en) | 2015-08-03 | 2021-07-27 | Angel Playing Cards Co., Ltd. | Management system of substitute currency for gaming |
SG10201913909XA (en) | 2016-08-02 | 2020-03-30 | Angel Playing Cards Co Ltd | Inspection system and management system |
EP3516635B1 (en) * | 2016-09-22 | 2023-07-26 | JCM American Corporation | Bill validation and cash dispensing device, system and method for use in a casino context |
US11094167B2 (en) * | 2016-11-18 | 2021-08-17 | Angel Playing Cards Co., Ltd. | Inspection system and inspection device |
JP2018130183A (ja) * | 2017-02-13 | 2018-08-23 | エンゼルプレイングカード株式会社 | 遊技用代用貨幣トレイ、テーブルゲームの管理システム、遊技用代用貨幣トレイシステム、及び遊技用代用貨幣管理方法 |
JP7149688B2 (ja) * | 2017-03-31 | 2022-10-07 | エンゼルグループ株式会社 | 遊技用代用貨幣及び管理システム |
CN107485854B (zh) * | 2017-08-03 | 2022-03-01 | 惠州Tcl移动通信有限公司 | 一种游戏手柄的控制方法、存储介质及游戏手柄 |
US20190132629A1 (en) * | 2017-10-26 | 2019-05-02 | Jonathan Kendrick | Application for detecting a currency and presenting associated content on an entertainment device |
JP7020878B2 (ja) * | 2017-11-22 | 2022-02-16 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 情報処理装置 |
JP7123549B2 (ja) * | 2017-11-22 | 2022-08-23 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 情報処理装置及び換算装置 |
US10817706B2 (en) * | 2018-05-01 | 2020-10-27 | Universal City Studios Llc | System and method for facilitating throughput using facial recognition |
US11087585B2 (en) | 2018-08-13 | 2021-08-10 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Limited | Gaming device and method for operating a gaming device |
US10593152B1 (en) | 2018-08-22 | 2020-03-17 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Limited | Gaming machine and method for evaluating player reactions |
JP7333042B2 (ja) * | 2018-10-16 | 2023-08-24 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 情報管理システム及び情報処理装置 |
JP7139213B2 (ja) * | 2018-10-16 | 2022-09-20 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 不正防止システム及び情報処理装置 |
US11189130B2 (en) | 2019-01-23 | 2021-11-30 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Limited | Gaming machine security devices and methods |
JP7306674B2 (ja) * | 2019-02-04 | 2023-07-11 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 通貨取扱システム |
US20200342704A1 (en) * | 2019-04-24 | 2020-10-29 | Jcm American Corporation | Evaluating Currency in Areas Using Image Processing |
US11263866B2 (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2022-03-01 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Securely storing machine data on a non-volatile memory device |
US11308761B2 (en) | 2019-05-31 | 2022-04-19 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Ticketing systems on a distributed ledger |
US11625975B2 (en) | 2019-11-29 | 2023-04-11 | Aristocrat Technologies Australia Pty Limited | Electronic gaming machine and method for providing hotspot functionality to GUI |
US11195371B2 (en) | 2019-12-04 | 2021-12-07 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Preparation and installation of gaming devices using blockchain |
US10945051B1 (en) | 2020-04-06 | 2021-03-09 | Bank Of America Corporation | System and method for intentionally distorting digital media to reduce the accuracy of generative machine learning algorithms |
US11636726B2 (en) * | 2020-05-08 | 2023-04-25 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for gaming machine diagnostic analysis |
US11721163B2 (en) * | 2020-09-11 | 2023-08-08 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Credit-substitution symbol mechanics with reel growth for random based game outcomes |
US11676454B2 (en) | 2020-09-11 | 2023-06-13 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Credit-substitution symbol mechanics for random based game outcomes |
US11270552B1 (en) | 2020-09-24 | 2022-03-08 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Symbol frame mechanics for random based game outcomes |
CN112233313B (zh) * | 2020-10-19 | 2022-06-21 | 中国工商银行股份有限公司 | 一种纸币识别方法、装置及设备 |
Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH105418A (ja) * | 1996-06-26 | 1998-01-13 | Sophia Co Ltd | 遊技情報媒体 |
JP2000093637A (ja) * | 1998-09-18 | 2000-04-04 | Takeya Co Ltd | 玉貸装置 |
Family Cites Families (16)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH03191495A (ja) * | 1989-12-21 | 1991-08-21 | Shikoku Keisoku Kogyo Kk | 紙幣識別装置 |
JP2869830B2 (ja) * | 1991-12-25 | 1999-03-10 | 株式会社エース電研 | 遊技装置 |
WO1994002221A1 (en) * | 1992-07-23 | 1994-02-03 | Kabushiki Kaisha Ace Denken | Game media dispensing machine having fee collection function, game machine system, and fee collection method in game center |
DE4318402A1 (de) | 1993-06-03 | 1994-12-08 | Boehringer Mannheim Gmbh | Verfahren zum Nachweis eines programmierten oder induzierten Zelltods eukaryontischer Zeller |
JPH07129812A (ja) * | 1993-11-02 | 1995-05-19 | Shinko Electric Co Ltd | 紙幣判別装置 |
JP2000099811A (ja) * | 1998-09-21 | 2000-04-07 | Takeya Co Ltd | プリペイドカード販売機 |
EP1358643A2 (en) * | 2000-08-18 | 2003-11-05 | Igt | Gaming system with player tracking |
US6852029B2 (en) * | 2000-10-19 | 2005-02-08 | Aristocrat Technologies, Inc. | Method for retrofitting gaming machines to issue and redeem tickets |
US6887157B2 (en) * | 2001-08-09 | 2005-05-03 | Igt | Virtual cameras and 3-D gaming environments in a gaming machine |
US6846238B2 (en) * | 2001-09-28 | 2005-01-25 | Igt | Wireless game player |
US20030195037A1 (en) * | 2002-04-11 | 2003-10-16 | Vt Tech Corp. | Video gaming machine for casino games |
JP2006202075A (ja) | 2005-01-21 | 2006-08-03 | Mars Engineering Corp | 紙幣識別装置および紙幣識別方法 |
JP2007179323A (ja) * | 2005-12-28 | 2007-07-12 | Nippon Conlux Co Ltd | 紙葉類識別装置および方法 |
US8641513B2 (en) * | 2007-08-24 | 2014-02-04 | Igt | Multiple monetary type gaming machine with cash conversion functionality |
AU2009206987A1 (en) * | 2008-01-25 | 2009-07-30 | Universal Entertainment Corporation | Banknote processing device and authentication determining and processing method |
JP5317263B2 (ja) * | 2008-09-24 | 2013-10-16 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 紙葉類処理装置 |
-
2009
- 2009-07-16 WO PCT/JP2009/062884 patent/WO2010013600A1/ja active Application Filing
- 2009-07-16 US US13/054,951 patent/US9105141B2/en active Active
- 2009-07-16 AU AU2009277649A patent/AU2009277649A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2009-07-16 JP JP2010522675A patent/JP5329543B2/ja active Active
- 2009-07-16 CN CN2009801298034A patent/CN102123770A/zh active Pending
-
2013
- 2013-07-23 JP JP2013152745A patent/JP5603980B2/ja active Active
-
2015
- 2015-06-26 US US14/751,731 patent/US9646446B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH105418A (ja) * | 1996-06-26 | 1998-01-13 | Sophia Co Ltd | 遊技情報媒体 |
JP2000093637A (ja) * | 1998-09-18 | 2000-04-04 | Takeya Co Ltd | 玉貸装置 |
Cited By (7)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CN101833829A (zh) * | 2010-03-12 | 2010-09-15 | 秦小枢 | 带图像监控识别分析系统的取款机或存取款机 |
CN101894416A (zh) * | 2010-07-30 | 2010-11-24 | 秦小枢 | 带图像监控识别分析系统的取款机或存取款机 |
CN102063763A (zh) * | 2010-11-16 | 2011-05-18 | 江苏科技大学 | 基于图像识别银行卡忘记取出提示系统及其提示方法 |
CN102262799A (zh) * | 2010-11-16 | 2011-11-30 | 江苏科技大学 | 基于图像目标跟踪的银行卡忘记取出提示系统及提示方法 |
CN102063763B (zh) * | 2010-11-16 | 2013-03-06 | 江苏科技大学 | 基于图像识别银行卡忘记取出提示系统及其提示方法 |
JP2019092877A (ja) * | 2017-11-22 | 2019-06-20 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 情報処理装置 |
JP7049098B2 (ja) | 2017-11-22 | 2022-04-06 | 株式会社ユニバーサルエンターテインメント | 情報処理装置 |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP5329543B2 (ja) | 2013-10-30 |
US20150356825A1 (en) | 2015-12-10 |
US20110124405A1 (en) | 2011-05-26 |
JP5603980B2 (ja) | 2014-10-08 |
US9646446B2 (en) | 2017-05-09 |
CN102123770A (zh) | 2011-07-13 |
JPWO2010013600A1 (ja) | 2012-01-12 |
JP2013242903A (ja) | 2013-12-05 |
AU2009277649A1 (en) | 2010-02-04 |
US9105141B2 (en) | 2015-08-11 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP5603980B2 (ja) | ゲームシステム | |
JP5432995B2 (ja) | ゲームシステム | |
JP5314419B2 (ja) | 紙幣の真贋判定方法、及び紙幣の真贋判定装置 | |
US20080041932A1 (en) | Casino Deposit Unit and System | |
CN101105873A (zh) | 纸币处理装置 | |
JP6757587B2 (ja) | 紙葉処理装置 | |
JP6732500B2 (ja) | 紙葉処理システム | |
JP5083937B2 (ja) | 紙幣処理装置 | |
JP6732501B2 (ja) | 紙葉処理システム | |
US20070142112A1 (en) | Method and system for checking money-equivalent documents | |
US20220335402A1 (en) | Payment acceptor with a multifunction imaging sensor | |
JP6713810B2 (ja) | 紙葉処理システム | |
JP5322313B2 (ja) | 紙幣処理装置 |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 200980129803.4 Country of ref document: CN |
|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 09802843 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 2010522675 Country of ref document: JP Ref document number: 2009277649 Country of ref document: AU |
|
WWE | Wipo information: entry into national phase |
Ref document number: 13054951 Country of ref document: US |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2009277649 Country of ref document: AU Date of ref document: 20090716 Kind code of ref document: A |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 09802843 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |